MicroSurvey 3 Layout User manual

Measure Only (No Store)

Measure and Store

Measure and Auto-Store

Offsets

Line - Angle Intersection

Horizontal Angle Offset

Vertical Angle Offset

Line - Distance Offset

Intersections

Two Line Intersection

Line - Perpendicular Point

Vertical Plane Projection

Manual

Manual Entry

Manual Distance

Measure Modes (GNSS Reference)

Overview

Known Geodetic Position

Averaged Geodetic Position

Local Transformation to Point

Measure Modes (GNSS Rover)

Standard Measurement

Offset Measurement

Tilt Offset Measurement

Auto Record Points

Local Transformation Point

Measure Modes (Disto/Laser)

Rotate/Translate/Scale Points

Apply User Defined Parameters

Apply Control Calculated Parameters

Table of Contents

- 16 -

MicroSurvey Layout

- 17 -

GNSS Local Transformation

Scientific Calculator

Bolt Patterns

GNSS Reference / GNSS Rover

Total Station

Auto-Locate - Point On Wall

Auto-Locate - Point On Floor or Ceiling

Auto-Locate - Pipe Through Wall

Import / Export

ASCII Coordinate Import

ASCII Coordinate Export

DGN/DXF/DWG Import

DXF/DWG Export

LandXML Import

LandXML Export (Points and Chains)

Import DTM Surface File (QSB)

Roads Manager

Manage Road

Manual Entry - Alignment C/L

Manual Entry - Vertical Profile

Manual Entry - Template

Advanced Template Editing

LandXML Cross Sections

Alignment DTM Surface

Alignment Staking - Part 1

Alignment Offset Staking

Alignment Slope Staking

Total Station Reference

Make and Model Settings

Total Station Profile

Model and Communication

Table of Contents

413

- 18 -

MicroSurvey Layout

- 19 -

Radio Configuration

EDM Settings

Search Settings

Conventional Total Station

Total Station Profile

Connect to Instrument

Getting Started

Robotic Total Station

Create Total Station Profile

Connect to Instrument

Getting Started

No Communication

Target Manager: Backsight

Target Manager: Foresight

Prism Selection Window

Target Manager: Leica Instruments

Target Manager: Backsight

Target Manager: Foresight

Target List: Leica

New Target: Leica

Edit Target: Leica

Default Settings: Leica

GNSS Reference

Create/Edit GNSS Profile

Select GNSS Profile

GNSS Reference Profile

GNSS Rover Profile

GNSS Model and Communication

GNSS Tolerance Settings (Reference)

GNSS Tolerance Settings (Rover)

GNSS Antenna Height

Overview - Reference Receiver

Overview - Rover Receiver

Profile and Coordinate System Files

Rover Connection Procedure

Electronic Bubble / Tilt Survey

Reference and Rover Common Tools

Correction Link

GNSS RTCM Transformation

Correction Information

Disto/Laser Reference

3D Disto

S910 Disto

Bluetooth Disto

Connecting to Computer

Microsoft ActiveSync / Windows Mobile Device Center

Table of Contents

487

493

453

- 20 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Installing ActiveSync / Windows Mobile Device Center

Connecting ActiveSync / Windows Mobile Device Center

MicroSurvey Transfer

Synchronize

RAW File Reference

Raw File Record Types

Conventional Raw Data Records

Index

499

509

- 21 -

Getting Started

ETTING

TARTED

Introduction

MicroSurvey Layout was designed specifically for construction and layout contractors to provide unequaled data collection simplicity and field calculating performance.

Layout takes advantage of the touch screen capability by allowing you to tap points and lines in your drawing to open toolbars with all the function you need instantly. Functions that are not available directly from the Layout graphics display are available from a simple main menu which is organized by task. Please spend some time looking over this document to become familiar with the functionality of

Layout.

Layout was built for MicroSurvey's latest data collector and total station models. Instrument control using the touch-screen is easy to use and very powerful. Access to your instrument controls is available on the main interface at all times so there is no need to swap to other screens or menus.

A graphical interface is the heart of Layout; it helps you see your project in real-time as it is being created. You can quickly visually inspect the data you've gathered and be confident that you have all you need before leaving the site.

Exchange your projects seamlessly between Layout on your data collector and MicroSurvey Point

Prep on your desktop or laptop, for easy preparation or review of your data. Or, easily transfer your data to other software packages using the industry-standard ASCII and DXF formats.

As always, MicroSurvey welcomes your comments and suggestions for our products.

Hardware Requirements

Layout can be installed on various Windows Mobile, WinCE, and Windows Tablet/PC devices.

Please visit the Hardware Support page for a list of supported devices. If in doubt, please contact

Technical Support

Installing Layout

If you purchased a new data collector with Layout, Layout will most likely come pre-loaded on it.

If you are installing Layout yourself onto an existing data collector, please confirm that your hardware is supported by Layout. If you're reading this topic then you probably already know if Layout will run on your data collector. If you're not sure, you can refer to the

hardware requirements

topic or call our technical support department.

- 22 -

MicroSurvey Layout

To install onto your data collector you need to make sure you have a

Microsoft ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center

connection established between your computer and your data collector.

To install Layout onto your device you will need to download the installation files from our website at http://helpdesk.microsurvey.com/ .

Starting Layout

During install, shortcuts are created and will be located in either your Start Menu, or Start Menu | Programs, or directly on your desktop. Simply press the shortcut to start the program.

Auto Repair

Upon start-up Layout checks the registry for corruption, and also checks to make sure important system files are where they need to be for Layout to run properly. If it detects any problems, it will automatically fix them for you.

Hard Reset or Battery Drain

In these scenarios as with other software, you would usually have to re-install your software.

However, because Layout can repair itself all you need to do is use the File Explorer or My Computer program on your data collector to browse to where Layout is installed and find the programs folder. In there, if you run the "splash" program it will automatically fix all problems and re-install your shortcuts for you.

The splash program will be an executable file and it will include the word "splash" in it. For example on a Windows Mobile device, the file is called SplashWM6.exe.

Registration & Demo Mode

Main Menu | About

When you start Layout for the first time you will see the registration screen which will list the Device

ID. This ID is unique for each device that Layout is installed on.

- 23 -

Getting Started

Activation

To activate Layout you need access to the Internet. With your purchase you should have received a serial number (also known as a Globally Unique ID, or GUID) that you will need along with the Device

ID generated by Layout.

A typical serial number will look something like the following:

D9C83164-FB0E-4713-B457-CE593EFEA296

A typical Device ID will look something like the following:

D003-F38C-4421-B482

Step 1

From a computer that has access to the internet, please visit the following web page: www.microsurvey.com/register

Follow the instructions on the Layout registration pages.

NOTE: Your GUID is valid for only one activation.

Step 2

Using the Key generated by the online registration system, enter the key values into Layout.

When done, press the Apply Key. You will see the words "Activation Key Valid". The Run Demo

Mode button will also change to say Continue.

- 24 -

MicroSurvey Layout

More Help or Purchase

HELP: For online help, click here .

To purchase Layout please call MicroSurvey Software at 1-800-668-3312.

Product Registration

To receive news and notifications about your product, please register your software at: www.microsurvey.com/reg

Available Modules

l l l l l

Standard - Real-time Automated Linework, COGO Calculations, Traverse Closure and Adjustments, ASCII/DXF Import/Export, MicroSurvey Exchange, and more!

Total Station - Adds non-robotic total station control.

GNSS - adds RTK GNSS control, Coordinate Calculator, GNSS Local Transformations.

Robotic - adds Robotic Total Station control.

MEP - adds Auto-Locate capabilities.

Run Demo Mode

To run Layout in demo mode press the Run Demo Mode button.

- 25 -

Getting Started

Retrieve Lost Key Codes (passwords)

The key code that was generated for a serial number can be accessed from the online registration page www.microsurvey.com/register . Just enter the serial number you which to retrieve the key code for and the key code and the Device ID it is assigned to will be displayed.

Technical Support

If you need help with Layout please contact

Technical Support

Project Manager

Main Menu | Project Manager

The Project Manager is used to create, open, or delete Projects stored on your data collector. When you start Layout this is always the first screen you will see.

You can sort the list by Project name or date by tapping on the column's header.

Projects Folder

Press this button to specify a different Project folder than the default. The default is ...\Mi-

croSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows CE/Mobile) or ...\Docu-

ments\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows Tablet/PC). Once you set the directory it is written to the MSurvey.ini file and is used for all subsequent Projects.

- 26 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Delete Project

To delete a Project, pick the Delete trash can icon next to the Project Name. You will be asked to confirm that you really want to delete the Project.

Notes:

- You cannot delete a Project that is currently open

- Projects that have been deleted cannot be restored

Open Project

open an existing Project

, simply select it in the list and press the Open button.

Review & Open Project

To review and open an existing Project, simply select it in the list and press the Review & Open button. This option will display the Project files used with the Project.

New Project

create a new Project , simply press the New Project button. You will then see the New Project

screen which will allow you to enter a name, choose your AutoMap library and set the units for the Project.

Exit

To exit from the Project Manager press the Back Arrow button.

- 27 -

Getting Started

Project Review

When you create a new Project or open an existing Project; you will have the option to review the Project Files screen.

Here you can confirm the files associated with the Project and change or add files as needed.

Set Active Raw File

This indicates the name of the raw file that is going to be used. You can select a different one by pressing the button and either generate a new raw file name or choosing an existing raw file to open.

The Encrypted option indicates whether or not this raw file is encrypted. You can only change this option when creating a new Project; once set, this option cannot be undone. Encrypting the raw file ensures that users cannot accidentally or intentionally edit their raw files with a text editor or other software. The state of the encryption toggle is retained for subsequent new Projects.

Set Project AutoMap

This indicates the AutoMap Library Template that will be loaded into the Project. You can change it by pressing the button and either choosing a different template library or creating a new blank library.

AutoMap files contain pre-defined descriptions that can be used in Layout. The template library that you select will be copied into the Project's folder with a name of ProjectName_automap.csv, and any changes that you make to the AutoMap Library will affect only the Project library, not the template library.

- 28 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Set Feature File

Use this to select a feature list that you want to use with the Project, for collecting GIS point attributes.

Quick Start: Open Existing Project

Start Layout by running the icon contained either in your Start Menu or on the Desktop of your data collector.

If you start Layout in demo mode, the first screen you will see is the

About screen , where you can

enter a registration code to license your copy of Layout. Press the Run Demo Mode button if you see this screen.

By default a Project named House Sample is installed. For this example let's open it by highlighting it and pressing the Open button. You can also double tap the file name which will also open it. Use the Review & Open button to also review the Project files of the Project.

If you picked the Review & Open option; you will be able to review the Project files associated with the Project and make any changes if needed.

- 29 -

Getting Started

Layout will then check to see if the Project has a previous instrument setup. If one is found you will be asked if you would like to reuse it.

The main menu will then be displayed. Press the button to access the map screen, or use any of the available menu commands.

You may see an option to reconnect to the previous instruments on the instrument toolbar. If you are using the same equipment, press Reconnect.

- 30 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The Map screen will then be displayed. You should now see your Project, here is what the House

Sample Project should look like:

Quick Start: New Project

Start Layout by running the icon contained either in your Start Menu or on the Desktop of your data collector.

When you start Layout in demo mode the first screen is the

About screen , where you can enter a regis-

tration code to license your copy of Layout. Press the Run Demo Mode button if you see this screen.

- 31 -

Getting Started

Next, the Project Manager appears. Press the New Project button to create a new Project.

Enter a name for your new Project. You can press OK to accept the settings and continue. If you need to change any of the settings, press the Project Settings button.

- 32 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Project Settings

The Project Setting screen allows you to refine the various aspects of the Project and save them as default for future Projects if desired.

Units and Scale

In the

Units and Scale

screen, you can specify the units for your Project. Set them as desired, then use the Save As Default button to set these settings as defaults for all subsequent new Projects.

- 33 -

Getting Started

Coordinate System

The

Coordinate System

screen allows you to select Horizontal and Vertical coordinate systems.

These settings are critical for working with GNSS equipment. Use the Save As Default button to set these settings as defaults for all subsequent new Projects.

- 34 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Project Files

The

Project Files

screen allows you to specify the Raw File, the AutoMap Library Template File, and

Feature List File to use, and whether you want your raw file to be encrypted and/or appended.

Project Information

The

Project Information

screen allows you to enter information about the Project, crew and weather conditions.

- 35 -

Getting Started

You will then see the

map screen . Use the Select Instrument button on the instrument toolbar to

connect to an instrument

, or open the Main Menu to access other parts of the program.

Common Layout Buttons

The Layout interface has a consistent structure and to use it effectively the user needs to become familiar with several commonly used buttons.

Clicking on this button will open up the

keypad .

Clicking on this button will open up the Windows Start Menu.

Available on Pocket PC and Windows Mobile devices only.

Clicking on this button will open up the

RPN Calculator .

Clicking on this button will open up the help page for whatever topic you are currently at. The help page will open up in an Internet Explorer window.

- 36 -

MicroSurvey Layout

This button will take you back to the previous menu until you are back at the

main menu .

This button will take you back to the

map screen .

This button will save your Project and close Layout.

This button will accept the input or changes, then continue to the next screen or finish the command.

This button will close the current screen and return you to the previous screen without saving any changes.

Pressing this will close the currently open toolbar and return you to the previous screen.

Pressing this will open the

Point Chooser toolbar

Layout Project Files

Every Layout Project will contain usually 7 files, but may contain more depending on what files you've exported or copied to the directory. Typically you will see that the file names will begin with the name of your Project.

Filename.cdx

Filename.dbf

Filename.ini

Filename.raw

Filename_figures.dbf

Filename_figures.cdx

Filename_automap.csv

This is the index for the database file.

This is the database file that contains your coordinate information.

This file contains information pertinent to your Project.

This is the raw file that contains your observations.

This is the database for your figures in your Project.

This is the index file for the figures database.

This is the AutoMap Library for your Project.

- 37 -

Getting Started

When you create a new Project, the Project name that you use will become the "folder" for your Project files. By default, your Project will be stored in the ...\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows

CE/Mobile) or ...\Documents\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows Tablet/PC) directory.

Note:

After creating a new Project, do not later rename the folder containing your Project's files or the actual files, doing so will cause Layout to not recognize the folder as a valid Project and you will not be able to open it.

Automatic Save

There are a few things to keep in mind when manually entering data in Layout:

All stored data is automatically saved. There is no need for a Save function. Always close the program by going to the

RPN Calculator , and some distance fields will open the

and choose the Exit button to prevent loss of measurement data.

Input fields that are left blank are stored as undefined. For example, if you enter only a horizontal coordinate for a point and leave the elevation field blank, we do not automatically set the elevation as

0.000. The elevation remains undefined.

Data Entry (Extended Edit Fields)

Throughout Layout you will see edit fields for entering various values. These types of fields are called

Extended Edit Fields, and can be used not only for typing values, but can also launch related commands such as the keypad, calculator, point chooser, inverse tool, etc. This type of functionality is unique to Layout.

Text Entry

For most text entry fields in the program, tapping in it will open up the

keypad

Points

When you see an extended edit field for a Point ID, tapping in it will open the

point chooser toolbar

Distance and Angles

Tapping in other numeric fields such as those for directions and distances will open the

Inverse

tool.

Multi-function Fields

Some fields will display a pop up menu if multiple functions can be opened from that field, just select the desired function from the list.

- 38 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Keypad

The keypad can be opened from any

extended edit entry field

. This provides a method of easy text and numeric entry on devices that do not have a physical keypad but it can be used on any device.

Calculator

The RPN

Scientific Calculator

can be called up from the keypad by pressing the Calculator button. If you press the Calculator button, the value entered in the keypad entry field will be copied to the calculator's command line (Note, it must be a numeric value, alpha portions will be stripped off in the calculator) where it can be used for any calculations. When you are done with the calculator, pressing the OK button will return the result back into the keypad.

Pressing the OK button will close the keypad, and set the entered value into the text field from which the keypad was opened.

Cancel

Pressing the Cancel button will close the keypad without setting anything into the text field from which the keypad was opened.

- 39 -

Getting Started

Distance Entry & Recall

Distance Entry

You can customize Layout to work with the direction input of your choice. See the

Units & Scale

topic for details.

The number you enter is assumed to be in the same units as your Project, unless a unit modifier is specified (see below). So 5.25 would be interpreted as 5.25 feet, or 5.25 meters depending on your

Project's default unit setting.

Distance Recall

You can recall the distance between two points, by inputting in the form: FromID..ToID Example:

26..84 will be recognized as the distance computed between points 26 and 84. The distance will be returned in whichever format your units settings is set to.

Unit Modifiers

Recognition of the unit symbols m, ', ft, usft, ftus are supported, and can be used to override the Project's unit settings.

Meters

You can specify that a distance is in meters by entering "m" after the value, for example 100m means

100 Meters, even if your Project is in Feet. Therefore, if your Project is in US Feet and you enter

100.00m in a distance field, you will see it automatically get converted to 328.08 feet.

- 40 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Feet (International or US Survey)

The ' symbol will be interpreted as either International Feet or US Survey Feet, whichever units the current Project is in. For example, entering 1000' will match the feet units that your Project is in, so it can mean either 1000 International Feet or 1000 US Survey Feet. If your Project is in meters, then the

' symbol is interpreted as International Feet.

Fractional Feet

When entering distances in a fractional format, use a ' symbol or a space between the feet and inches values to separate them. A " symbol is not required. For example, you can enter 10'6 or 10 6 which both mean 10'6". You can enter fractional inches by placing a space between the whole and fractional inches, and using a / symbol in the fraction. For example, 10'6 1/2 or 10 6 1/2 both mean 10'6.5". You can also enter decimal values, such as 10.5' to mean 10'6" or 10'6.5 (or just 10 6.5) to mean 10'6 ½".

International Feet

You can specify that a distance is in International Feet by entering ”ft” after the value, for example

1000ft means 1000 International Feet.

US Survey Feet

You can specify that a distance is in US Survey Feet by entering ”usft” or ”ftus” after the value, for example 1000usft and 1000ftus both mean 1000 US Survey Feet.

Distance Entry Examples

Project Units:

Format:

User Entered Value:

International Feet

Decimal

Interpreted As:

1000.23 in Project units

1000.23 US Survey Feet

Result (always matches

Project units):

1000.23'

1000.25'

1000.23

1000.23'

1000.23usft

1000.23 usft

1000.23ftus

1000.23 ftus

20.117m

20.117 m

10000m

10000 m

10 6

20.117 meters

10000 meters

10 feet 6 inches

66.00'

32808.40'

10.50'

- 41 -

Getting Started

10'6

10'6"

10 6 1/2

10'6 1/2

Project Units:

Format:

User Entered Value:

1000.23

1000.23'

10000.23usft

10000.23 usft

10000.23ftus

10000.23 ftus

10000.23ft

10000.23 ft

20.117m

20.117 m

10000m

10000 m

10 6

10'6

10'6"

10 6 1/2

10'6 1/2

Project Units:

Format:

User Entered Value:

1000.23

10 feet 6.5 inches

US Survey Feet

Decimal

Interpreted As:

1000.23 in Project units

10000.23 US Survey Feet

10000.23 International Feet

20.117 meters

10000 meters

10 feet 6 inches

10 feet 6.5 inches

Meters

Decimal

Interpreted As:

1000.23 in Project units

10.54'

Result (always matches

Project units):

1000.23'

10000.23'

10000.21'

66.00'

32808.33'

10.50'

10.54'

Result (always matches

Project units):

1000.23m

- 42 -

MicroSurvey Layout

1000.23'

10000.23usft

10000.23 usft

10000.23ftus

10000.23 ftus

10000.23ft

10000.23 ft

20.117m

20.117 m

10'6

10'6 1/2

10 6

10 6 1/2

1000.23 International Feet

10000.23 US Survey Feet

304.870m

3048.076m

10000.23 International Feet

20.117 meters

10 feet 6 inches

10 feet 6 1/2 inches

Not allowed, must enter units for feet such as 10ft 6, or 10usft 6.

Not allowed, must enter units for feet such as 10ft 6 ½, or 10usft 6

½ .

3048.070m

20.117m

3.200m

3.213m

Using Math Operations

Math operators are now supported again. You are now permitted to use math operators in distance fields.

User Entered

Value

3.5/2+1.2

1..2/2+10

(assume 1..2 =

10)

8' + 3'

1'+2 3+1m

Interpreted As

3.5 divided by 2 plus 1.2

((Distance from point 1 to 2) divided by 2) plus 10

8 feet plus 3 feet

1 foot plus 2 feet 3 inches plus 1 metre

Result if Project

Units Set to Feet

2.95 feet

15.00 feet

11.00'

6.53'

Result if Project

Units set to Metric

2.950 metres

15.000 metres

3.353m

1.991m

- 43 -

Getting Started

NOTE: If your Project is set to feet and you enter 2 3 (2 space 3), this will be interpreted as 2 feet 3 inches. This occurs if your Project is set to either decimal or fractional feet.

You can also use the RPN Calculator to further manipulate distance values. For example, if you want to find the distance halfway between points 1 and 2, enter 1..2 into the distance field to recall that distance. Then double tap on that extended edit field to pull that recalled distance into the calculator, where you can divide the distance by 2 (or perform any other calculations with it). Then press the OK button in the calculator to copy the result back into the field you started from.

Direction Entry & Recall

Direction Entry

You can customize Layout to work with the direction input of your choice. See the

Units & Scale Settings

topic for details.

To enter an angle using the format selected in your units settings, simply enter the angle. For example, 120.4530 means 120°45'30" if your Project is in Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, 120°45.3' if your Project is in Degrees/Minutes, or 120.453° if your Project is in decimal degrees.

Direction Recall

You can recall the direction between two points, by inputting in the form: FromID..ToID Example:

26..84 will be recognized as the direction computed between points 26 and 84. The direction will be returned in whichever format your units settings is set to.

Unit Modifiers

You can always override your Project's units setting by entering the bearing with the cardinal quadrant indicated before or after the direction. If there is no quadrant specified, then the input direction will be interpreted as an Azimuth.

Decimal Degrees

You can always specify that an angle is in decimal degrees by entering "d" after the value, for example 45.5083d means 45.5083° or 45°30'30".

Degrees, Decimal Minutes

You can always specify that an angle is in degrees and decimal minutes by entering "dm" after the value, for example 45.305dm means 45°30.5' or 45°30'30".

Degrees, Minutes, Decimal Seconds

You can always specify that an angle is in degrees, minutes, and decimal seconds by entering "dms" after the value, for example 45.3030dms means 45°30'30".

- 44 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Bearings

To enter a bearing, use the cardinal quadrant letters (N, E, S, and W) before or after the angle. For example: NE60.4530, 60.4530NE, or N60.4530E means NE 60°45'30” if your Project is in DMS, NE

60°45.3' if your Project is in DM, or NE 60.453° if your Project is in decimal degrees. It does not matter if you have spaces between the quadrant designation and the angle. You can also separate the degrees, minutes, and seconds values with a space. For example, N 60 45 30 E or N60.4530E both mean NE 60°45'30". You can of course also use any of the "d", "dm", or "dms" (or "g" or "r", see below) designators with a bearing entry, such as NE45.305dm to mean N 45°30'30" E.

Gons (Gradients)

You can specify that an angle is in Gons/Gradients by entering "g" after the value, for example 100g means 100 Gradients (equals 90 degrees).

Radians

You can specify that an angle is in Radians by entering "r" after the value, for example 1.57r and means 1.57 Radians (approximately 90 degrees).

Project set to Azimuth

Direction Entry Examples

Angle Units:

Format:

User Entered Value:

Degrees

DDD°MM'SS.s"

Azimuth

Interpreted As:

90.5016

90 degrees, 50 minutes, 16 seconds

North East quadrant, 45 degrees,

30 minutes, 30 seconds

NE45.3030

NE 45.3030

N45.3030E

N 45.3030 E

45.3030NE

45.3030 NE

SE45.3030

SE 45.3030

S45.3030E

South East quadrant, 45 degrees,

30 minutes, 30 seconds

Result (always matches

Project units):

90°50'16"

45°30'30"

134°29'30"

- 45 -

Getting Started

S 45.3030 E

45.3030SE

45.3030 SE

SW45.3030

SW 45.3030

S45.3030W

S 45.303 W

45.3030SW

45.3030 SW

90.5016dm

90.5016 dm

90.5016d

90.5016 d

100g

100 g

100.2345g

100.2345 g

3.141593r

3.141593 r

South West quadrant, 45 degrees,

30 minutes, 30 seconds

90 degrees, 50.16 minutes

90.5016 degrees

100 gradians

100.2345 gradians

3.141593 radians

225°30'30"

90°50'10"

90°30'06"

90°00'00"

90°12'40"

180°00'00"

Project Set to Bearings

The angle codes below provide versatile direction input.

When your Project is set to Bearings, you are permitted to use numeric and alpha character codes for angle and direction input.

1 or NE = North East bearing

2 or SE = South East bearing

3 or SW = South West bearing

4 of NW = North West bearing

Angle Units:

Format:

Degrees

DDD°MM'SS.s"

Bearing

- 46 -

MicroSurvey Layout

User Entered Value:

90.5016

NE45.3030

NE 45.3030

N45.3030E

N 45.3030 E

45.3030NE

45.3030 NE

SE45.3030

SE 45.3030

S45.3030E

S 45.3030 E

45.3030SE

45.3030 SE

SW45.3030

SW 45.3030

S45.3030W

S 45.303 W

45.3030SW

45.3030 SW

90.5016dm

90.5016 dm

90.5016d

90.5016 d

100g

100 g

100.2345g

100.2345 g

3.141593r

3.141593 r

Interpreted As:

90 degrees, 50 minutes, 16 seconds azimuth

North East quadrant, 45 degrees,

30 minutes, 30 seconds

Result (always matches

Project units):

S89°09'44"E

N45°30'30"E

South East quadrant, 45 degrees,

30 minutes, 30 seconds

S45°30'30"E

South West quadrant, 45 degrees,

30 minutes, 30 seconds

S45°30'30"W

90 degrees, 50.16 minutes azimuth

90.5016 degrees azimuth

100 gradians

100.2345 gradians

3.141593 radians

S89°09'50"E

S89°29'54"E

S90°00'00"E

S89°47'20"E

S0°00'00"W

- 47 -

Getting Started

Using Math Operations

You can then use the calculator to further manipulate the angle. For example, if you want to determine

1..2 then add 90 degrees, enter 1..2 to recall that angle. Then double tap in the extended edit field to pull that recalled angle into the calculator, where you can add 90 to it (or perform any other calculations with it).

Note : You can perform advanced direction recall functions that include math operators directly in a direction field. For example, 1..2+90 is a valid entry. In this example the direction between points 1 and

2 will have 90 degrees added to it (if Project is in degrees).

Math operations can also be done using the RPN calculator. Please refer to the

Calculator

section for more information on performing specific math operations.

- 48 -

Main Interface

AIN

NTERFACE

The Layout interface is separated into various toolbars which contain common functions or tools that the user will use most often.

Calculate Length button

Offset Tool button

Point Patterns button

Layout Mode Toolbar

As-Built Mode Toolbar

- 49 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Two Versions of the User Interface

There are two versions of the user interface depending on which handheld device you're using. Some devices have a landscape screen orientation, and have the advantage of a physical keyboard. Others have a portrait screen orientation, and utilize a virtual on-screen keyboard. Note that the function of both versions is essentially the same.

Portrait Display

- 50 -

Main Interface

Landscape Display

Toolbars

Display Toolbar

The display toolbar, located at the top of the map screen, is used to zoom, pan, change 3D perspectives, and for displaying information.

Next, Previous

These switch to the next or previous set of buttons.

- 51 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Zoom Extents

This is a zoom extents which will zoom to the extents of your Project.

Dynamic Zoom

This is a dynamic zoom. When enabled, drag from top to bottom of the screen to zoom out, or bottom to top of the screen to zoom in. Or, when enabled, you can also use the arrow keys on your keypad to zoom in and out in the map.

Zoom Window

This is a zoom window. When enabled, drag on the map screen to define a zoom window.

Dynamic Pan

This is a dynamic pan. When enabled, you can drag across your map screen to pan around your Project. Or, when enabled, you can use the toggle or arrow keys on your keypad to pan around.

Zoom Previous

You can use this to zoom back up to 10 previous views. This includes zoom and pan changes.

World Button

It is used by the Layout commands to hide unrelated points and lines in your map during stakeout.

3D View

When this is turned on you will be able to rotate your Project in a 3D perspective.

To return to plan view, press the Zoom Extents button.

3D View - Full Screen

When using the full screen mode for Layout this will allow you to rotate your Project in a 3D perspective. To return to plan view, press the Zoom extents button.

Grid Display

When using the full screen mode for Layout this will allow you to toggle the display of a grid on your map screen, and configure the grid settings..

Layers Manager

This opens the

Layers Manager

for managing visibility of layers in your database,

DXF Layers, LandXML elements, and Raster Images.

- 52 -

Main Interface

Surface Manager

This opens the

for importing and displaying DTM surface models

(TIN, TGRID, or Contours) and for computing Volume Calculations.

Options

This opens the

screen, and will automatically expand the Map Configuration section for quickly turning on or off the ID, description, and elevation labels for your points.

Help

This opens the Help topic for the current toolbar(s) visible on your screen. If there are multiple toolbars visible, you are prompted to select the help file based on the position of the toolbar: Top, Side, or Bottom Toolbar. The help file will open up in your default web browser such as Internet Explorer .

Observation Toolbar

Display Toolbar | Observation Results button

You can access the Observation Toolbar by tapping on this icon in the

Display Toolbar .

Total Station Observations

Total Station users can toggle through the following information: l l l

Horizontal Angle (HA), Vertical Angle (ZA), and Slope Distance (SD)

Horizontal Angle (HA), Horizontal Distance (HD), and Vertical Distance (VD)

Northing (N), Easting (E), and Elevation (H)

If using a conventional (non-robotic) total station, the observations displayed in the toolbar will be from the last measurement taken with Layout.

If using a robotic total station, the observations displayed in the toolbar will continually update in real time.

GNSS Observations

GNSS users can toggle through the following information:

- 53 -

MicroSurvey Layout l l l l

Latitude (Lat), Longitude (Lon), and Geodetic Height (h)

Northing (N), Easting (E), Orthometric Height (H)

Standard Deviation Horizontal (SD H), Standard Deviation Vertical (SD V), and Positional Dilution of Precision (PDOP).

Velocity (SOG) and Heading (COG) of the GNSS receiver as well as current UTC Time.

If using GNSS, the observations displayed in the toolbar will continually update in real time.

Display Size +/-

By tapping on the + and - buttons on the screen you can increase or decrease the displayed font size/text for easier viewing.

Page Toggle

The Page button allows you to swap between pages changing the displayed observation information.

3D View Toolbar

The 3D View toolbar is used to help you view your Project in a 3D perspective. You can also define a virtual grid that will displayed in the drawing and can be turned on and off.

To turn this feature on select the 3D View button on the

Display toolbar

. When you do this the 3D

View Toolbar will appear at the bottom of your screen. The buttons on the toolbar are described below.

3D View

When this is turned on you will be able to rotate your Project in a

3D perspective. This tool is handy when used in conjunction with surfaces, road alignments, or

vertical projections

. To return to plan view, close the 3D View toolbar and press the Zoom

Extents button. It can also help you find points that have incorrect elevations.

- 54 -

Main Interface

Center on Point

Use this to center the view on the selected point. This will not change your current view rotation or zoom depth.

Hz Grid

Use this to turn on a horizontal grid that will be displayed in your drawing. You can set the grid spacing in the settings.

Vert Grid

Use this when using the

tool to turn on a vertical grid that will be displayed in your drawing. You can set the grid spacing in the settings.

Planar View

Use this when using the

instrument settings , target

tool to set the view perpendicular to the vertical plane, so that the wall or other projected plane is displayed face-on in the map view.

Grid Settings

Use this to set parameters that affect the grid spacing and origin.

You can select the grid origin using a point chooser and specify lengths for the sides. You can also specify the interval for each axis.

- 55 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Total Station Toolbar

When Layout is connected to a Total Station or the Total Station

Demo profile, you will see this toolbar on the side of the map area.

User Input

option determines which side of the map area the toolbar is on.

This toolbar allows you to control your

heights, and

, as well as initiating a measurement.

- 56 -

Auto-Center

This toggles the auto-center feature on or off. If turned on, whenever you take a measurement, the map screen will always re-center on the measured point.

Instrument Settings

This opens the

screen where you can control specific settings for your total station such as EDM settings,

Tolerance setting and Instrument Connect/Disconnect.

Target Manager

Press this button to access the

. Here you can set target heights and create, edit, copy, and delete targets.

Measure Mode

This opens the

Measure Modes , as well as initiating a meas-

screen where you can select what type of measurement you want to take. The current Measure Mode is always displayed on this button - for example if you're using the distance offset mode it will display "Dist Off".

Measure Button

This triggers your total station to take a measurement.

Robotic Total Station Toolbar

When you use Layout in robotic total station mode, you will see this toolbar on the side of the map area. A

User Input

option determines which side of the map area the toolbar is on.

This toolbar allows you to control your

instrument settings

, target heights, and

urement.

The current state of the instrument target aiming settings are displayed, and you are able to toggle the instrument target aiming settings between Manual / ATR / LOCK states. With LOCK enabled, Search and Search Next functionality is available for some instruments.

Main Interface

Manual mode

This button indicates that the instrument is in manual aiming mode.

l l

Single Tap - Switch LOCK mode to ON.

Double Tap - Switch ATR mode to ON.

- 57 -

MicroSurvey Layout

LOCK mode, not following a prism

These buttons indicate that the instrument is in LOCK mode, however not currently following a prism.

Single Tap - Begin PowerSearch to search for prism. The left button starts a clockwise search, the right button starts a counterclockwise search.

Double Tap - Switch LOCK mode to OFF and set manual aiming. Same action on both buttons.

Searching

This button indicates that a target search is in progress.

LOCK mode, following a prism

These buttons indicate that the instrument is in LOCK mode, and following a prism.

l l

Single Tap - Begin PowerSearch Next to search for the next prism. The left button starts a clockwise search, the right button starts a counterclockwise search.

Double Tap - Stop following the prism. Same action on both buttons.

ATR mode

This button indicates that the instrument is in ATR mode.

Single Tap - Switch ATR mode to OFF and set manual aiming.

Cursor Tracking

Toggle Cursor Tracking. When enabled, the instrument makes continuous measurements and the current position of the target will be displayed on the screen in real time. When stationary, the cursor is a hollow triangle pointing towards the instrument. When moving, the cursor is a solid triangle pointing in the direction of travel.

Instrument Settings

Opens the

screen, where you can control specific settings and features for your total station.

- 58 -

Main Interface

Target Manager

Opens the

where you can set the target, target height and EDM mode.

Measure Mode

Opens the

screen where you can select what type of measurement you want to take. The current Measure

Mode is always displayed on this button - for example if you're using the distance offset mode it will display "Dist Off".

Measure Button

Measure and store distances and angles. The current state of

Manual / ATR / LOCK mode determines the sequence of events: l l l l

Manual mode - The instrument starts a measurement immediately.

LOCK mode, not following a prism - The instrument first searches for a prism and takes a measurement only if a prism is found.

LOCK mode, following a prism - The instrument starts a measurement immediately.

ATR mode - The instrument first searches for a prism and takes a measurement only if a prism is found.

If you are using a conventional non-robotic total station, please see the

Instrument Toolbar

topic.

If you are using GPS, please see the

GNSS Toolbar

topic.

- 59 -

MicroSurvey Layout

GNSS Toolbar

Once the user has selected a GNSS receiver and communication has been established, the GNSS toolbar will appear on the

main interface .

NOTE: You will only see the GNSS toolbar if you selected GNSS

Reference, GNSS Rover, or GNSS Rover Demo as your instrument type. If you have selected a GNSS Profile but are not yet connected to the receiver, most of these buttons will be disabled.

- 60 -

Auto-Center

Single-tapping this button will re-center the display on the current position of your receiver.

Double-tapping this button will set the system into an auto-pan mode where the display will always be centered on the current position. When active, single-tapping this button once more will disable the auto-pan mode.

GNSS Settings

If you press this button while you are connected to a receiver, you will see the

screen. At any time this button can be used to adjust or stop your GNSS survey.

If you press this button without being connected to a receiver, you will see the

screen where you can edit your

GNSS profiles or connect to your receiver.

DOP Values

This displays the current DOP (Dilution of Precision) values.

Pressing this button will cycle through the PDOP, HDOP and

VDOP. The PDOP is the default setting as this is most often used to ascertain the quality of the satellite geometry.

Satellite Plot/Satellite List

This shows the total number of satellites the receiver is currently using in its solution. Press this to view a

sky plot

of the current

SVs visible to the rover, or to access the

Satellite List .

Measure Mode

This opens the

Measure Modes , as well as initiating a

screen where you can select what type of measurement you want to take. The current Measure

Mode> is always displayed on this button.

Measure

This is the measure button.

This button also indicates the current solution type. This tells the user if the solution is Fixed, Float, WAAS, DGPS or Autonomous.

This button will also indicate to the user if the corrections from the reference station have been discontinued by denoting "No Link".

Please refer to the

GNSS Measurement

topic for more information.

Disto/Laser Toolbar

When Layout is connected to a Disto/Laser device, you will see this toolbar on the side of the map area. A

User Input

option determines which side of the map area the toolbar is on.

This toolbar allows you to control your instrument settings, target height, device toggles, and

measurement.

- 62 -

Auto-Center

This toggles the auto-center feature on or off. If turned on, whenever you take a measurement, the map screen will always re-center on the measured point.

Instrument Settings

This opens the instrument settings screen where you can control specific settings for your Disto/Laser.

Target Manager

Press this button to access the

. Here you can set the target height.

Laser Toggle

Press this button to toggle the state of the red laser pointer.

Map Toggle

Press this button to toggle between the map view or live video stream. NOTE: The live video stream is only available on supported devices, such as the Leica 3D Disto.

Zoom Controls

Zoom in and out on the live video stream view. NOTE: The live video stream is only available on supported devices, such as the

Leica 3D Disto.

Crosshair Toggle

Press this button to toggle the crosshair presence on captured images that are stored.

Photo Note Toggle

Press this button to toggle whether a photo note is automatically stored when a point is measured and stored. The photo can have a crosshair showing the measurement point, depending on the crosshair toggle.

Measure Mode

This opens the

Measure Mode

Measure Button

This triggers your device to take a measurement.

Main Interface

Topo Toolbar

- 63 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The Topo Toolbar is used to help automate linework as well as show you the description and next point number for your shot. Just like previous versions of Layout you can control your linework by tuning on and off the line, arc and curvy toggles. There is also a user-programmable button that can be customized to start any command.

Main Menu Button

This button takes you into the

Draw Lines Button

This is used to toggle on and off the draw lines function.

When turned on points will be connected with a line as you measure them.

Draw Curvy Lines Button

This is used to toggle on and off the draw curvy lines button. This function will draw a best-fit curve through your points as you shoot them.

Draw 3-Point Arc Button

3-Point arcs can be started using the same method as for a Line or Curvy Line.

However, to switch to 3-Point arc within an ongoing Line, select the Draw 3-Point Arc button before shooting the second of the three points that will define the arc (POC:

Point on Curve). (Note that this is not the radius point).

After measuring to the 2nd point, a dashed line will appear to illustrate that a 3-Point arc is in progress. Shoot the 3rd point and the arc will appear. The current draw option will change from Draw 3-Pt Arc to Draw Line after the third shot and the arc is complete.

Compound 3-point arcs are supported. Simply re-select the 3-Point Arc button before measuring the next POC.

Next ID Field

- 64 -

This field displays the point number that will be assigned to your next shot. You can change it at any time prior to recording your shot. In a new Project this field will always start at 1. If you open an existing Project, then we scan the raw file for the last sideshot or store point and if we find one, we'll set the point number accordingly. For example, if the last sideshot in the raw file was to point

58, then the next time the Project is setup we will set the next id to 59.

Active Line List Button

Much like the first line in the Project, just select the desired description from the list and select the desired draw option before shooting the first point for the new line.

When you press the button a screen will appear listing all your active lines. Selecting one of them and pressing the

OK button will make it the current line.

The key to note is the display of -Start Line- in the Active

Lines list. Once the first point for the new line has been measured, the Active Lines list will set and display the new line as current.

To change the current line, simply select the desired line from the Active Lines list and continue taking shots to add to the selected line. All settings are stored for each line so there is no need to re-select the Description or draw option.

Description Selection Button

Use this button to set the current description that will be used when you shoot your points. When you press the description button you will see a screen listing all the descriptions read in from your

AutoMap Library . Select

the description you want to use and press the OK button.

You can type in the letters of the description which will automatically scroll to the descriptions matching your entry.

Main Interface

- 65 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Map Select Toolbar

When you tap on an empty spot in the map view, the selected point will be highlighted with a blue dot and the Map Select toolbar will appear along the bottom of the screen, showing the coordinate of the selected point.

Note, this toolbar functionality can be enabled or disabled via the Map Position Select check-box in the

screen.

Measure Distance

When this is toggled on, subsequent taps will cause the blue dot to move to the new location, a second blue dot will appear at the previous location, and a dashed line will follow the entire path of the selected points. The total distance and the direction of the last segment will be displayed. To reset the measured distance, toggle this mode off then back on again.

Turn to Point

If you are using a motorized total station and have occupied a point in the Project, this will cause your instrument to turn to the selected point (as indicated by the blue dot in the map).

Store Point

This will open the

dialogue with the coordinates entered for the selected point, so you can store it into your Project database.

- 66 -

Main Interface

Layout Mode

When you chose to use Layout in Layout mode, specific functions and tools will be loaded for you automatically that will aid you with stakeout tasks. You can enable Stakeout Mode by selecting it from the

Figure Toolbar

The following toolbar will be loaded when you click on a figure.

Please review the

topic for more details.

Point Toolbar

The following toolbar will be loaded when you click on a point.

Please review the

Point Toolbar

topic for more details.

Layout Mode Toolbar

In the map screen you will see the following toolbar which contains tools used most often during stakeout procedures.

Main Menu Button

This button takes you into the

Plan Builder

Use this tool to quickly enter and draw a plan. Please review the

Plan Builder

topic for more details.

- 67 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Staking Menu

Use this to display a menu with staking options. Please review the

Staking Menu

topic for more details.

Calculate Length

Use this to calculate the length of a line or arc. Please review the

Calculate Length

topic for more details.

Offset Tool

Use this to offset points from lines or arcs. Please review the

Offset Tool

topic for more details.

Point Patterns

Use this to create point patterns for stakeout. Please review the

Point Pattern

topic for more details.

As-built Mode

When you choose As-Built Mode from the

Layout will load toolbars and tools to help you generate as-built data as you survey.

Figure Toolbar

The following toolbar will be loaded when you click on a figure.

Please review the

AutoMap Library . Select the description you want to use

topic for more details.

Point Toolbar

The following toolbar will be loaded when you click on a point.

Please review the

Point Toolbar

topic for more details.

- 68 -

Main Interface

Linework Toolbar

The following toolbar will be available along the bottom of the map screen.

The Linework ModeToolbar is used to help automate linework as well as show you the description and next point number for your shot. With Layout you can control your linework by tuning on and off the line, arc and curvy toggles as you measure.

Please review the

Active Linework

topic for more detailed information regarding linework generation.

Main Menu Button

This button takes you into the

Main Menu .

Draw Lines Button

This is used to toggle on and off the draw lines function. When turned on points will be connected with a line as you measure them.

Draw Curvy Lines Button

This is used to toggle on and off the draw curvy lines button. This function will draw a best-fit curve through your points as you shoot them.

Draw 3-Point Arc Button

3-Point arcs can be started using the same method as for a Line or Curvy Line.

However, to switch to 3-Point arc within an ongoing Line, select the Draw 3-Point Arc button before shooting the second of the three points that will define the arc (POC: Point on Curve). (Note that this is not the radius point). After measuring to the 2nd point, a dashed line will appear to illustrate that a 3-Point arc is in progress. Shoot the 3rd point and the arc will appear. The current draw option will change from Draw 3-Pt Arc to Draw Line after the third shot and the arc is complete.

- 69 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Compound 3-point arcs are supported. Simply re-select the 3-

Point Arc button before measuring the next POC.

Next ID Field

This field displays the point number that will be assigned to your next shot. You can change it at any time prior to recording your shot. In a new project this field will always start at 1. If you open an existing project, then we scan the raw file for the last sideshot or store point and if we find one, we'll set the point number accordingly. For example, if the last sideshot in the raw file was to point 58, then the next time the project is setup we will set the next id to 59.

Active Line List Button

Much like the first line in the project, just select the desired description from the list and select the desired draw option before shooting the first point for the new line. When you press the button a screen will appear listing all your active lines. Selecting one of them and pressing the OK button will make it the current line.

The key to note is the display of <Start line> in the Active Lines list. Once the first point for the new line has been measured, the

Active Lines list will set and display the new line as current.

Description Selection Button

Use this button to set the current description that will be used when you shoot your points. When you press the description button you will see a screen listing all the descriptions read in from your

and press the OK button. You can type in the letters of the description which will automatically scroll to the descriptions matching your entry.

- 70 -

- 71 -

MicroSurvey Layout

OINTS

& F

IGURES

Points

Layout Projects typically are comprised of points that have been imported, calculated or measured.

These points are always stored in a file made up of the Project name and will have an extension of

DBF. DBF files can be viewed using a DBF reader or with Microsoft Excel.

Point Labels

In the drawing area you will always see a node or dot that marks the coordinate location of the point.

For each point you can control what is displayed on the screen such as the point's number, elevation, description and note. To control the visibility of the labels, use the Options button on the

Display Toolbar

Editing Single Points

To edit a point you can tap on it which will open the

Point Toolbar . Press the Edit button to open the

Edit Points

screen.

Working with Multiple Points

If you need to search, list, or edit multiple points at the same time you will use the Coordinate Database Editor. Please see the

Coordinate Database

topic for more information.

Point Toolbar

Point Toolbar in

Layout Mode

Point Toolbar in

As-Built Mode

- 72 -

Points & Figures

When you tap on an existing point in the drawing you will see the point toolbar appear near the bottom of your screen. The point toolbar contains functions that are frequently used on points in your Project.

Following is an explanation of what each button will do.

Points List

This will display the list of all points in your current Project and you can sort the list by tapping on any of the column headings. When you find the point you want simply tap it and press the ok button.

Layout List

This will display the Layout List dialog.

Inverse Tool

Use this to measure the

inverse

between points.

New Point

This will open the

store and edit

dialog and allow you to enter coordinates for a new point.

Edit Point

Use this to edit the coordinate value for the selected point.

Delete Point

This will delete the selected point from the drawing and database.

You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the point.

Offset

This will open the

Offset Tool .

Draw Plan Tool

This will open the

draw plan tool

. This tool can help you draw a house foot print.

- 73 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Zoom to Point

This button when pressed for the first time will force the point to be centered on the screen. Subsequently, if you keep pressing it, it will continue to zoom in on the point.

Stake Point

Pressing this will help you stake the point that is currently selected and take you to the

screen.

Select Point

Use these two buttons to scroll up and down numerically through the points in your database.

Point ID

This displays the Point ID of the point you've currently selected.

Select Point Toolbar

The point chooser is a mechanism that is called by routines requiring a point number entry. You access it by selecting the point chooser icon next to point number fields, or by double-tapping in an extended edit point number field.

When select it you will see the point chooser toolbar open up towards the bottom of your screen.

- 74 -

Points & Figures

Point ID

You can either type the Point ID into this field if you know what it is, or when you tap on a point in the map screen its point ID will be displayed here.

Quick Select

If Quick Select is turned on, then as soon as you tap on a point in the map screen you will be automatically returned to the routine you were selecting the point for. If Quick Select is turned off, then after you tap on a point in the map screen, the coordinate data of that point will be displayed, and you must press the Select button to get back to the previous routine.

Select

Pressing this will take you and your selected point back to the routine you were selecting the point for.

List

Use this to open a grid displaying all the points in your Project database. From this list you can click on a point and when you press the OK button it will be inserted into the Point ID field.

New

Use this to open the

screen. This will enable you to create a new point.

Cancel

Pressing this will take you back to the routine you were selecting the point for, without selecting the selected Point.

Point Averaging

Main Interface | Edit | Points

Main Interface | Store Points

Main Menu | Data Manager | Point Database

This routine allows the user to either select a number of points from within the Point Database, and then calculate the average of the coordinate values of the selected points or take repeated measurements on a target and average the coordinate values. You can then create and store a new point based on the averaged coordinates.

Below is a screen capture taken after an observation has been completed and is awaiting to be stored. Note that there is a pull down menu for the user to choose to store this measurement as an averaged point.

- 75 -

MicroSurvey Layout

After the observation has been stored the next screen will prompt you to select the Original Point to which this point will be averaged too. If this is the first observation then the point should be stored as a Side Shot to begin the Point Averaging routine.

After two or more observations are stored as an Averaged Point; Layout will display the Standard

Deviation of all the observations included in the Point Averaging. The user can then choose to Save the temporary observations for future use or Store Averaged to update the Point coordinates with the result of the Point Averaging observations.

- 76 -

Points & Figures

Observations can be toggled manually by pressing the Green Check Mark to select the best ones for averaging calculations.

The Weighted Average check box will only be active when using a GNSS unit

Press the "SAVE" button to store all observations in the Averaged Point routine for future use.

Press the "Store Averaged" button to calculate a point position based on all Point Averaged observations currently being used.

All the temporary shots, observations used for the calculation, and final averaged position are stored in the raw file.

Point Database

Layout can also calculate the averaged coordinates of multiple stored points directly from the Point

Database.

When you enter the Point Database, tap on the green arrow button twice in the bottom toolbar until you see the Average button displayed. Note: The items will loop back around to the first item if you keep pressing the green arrow button.

Select multiple points by tapping on the screen and dragging a box around the items you wish to include in the averaging calculation.

- 77 -

MicroSurvey Layout

In the Point Averaging dialog, the results of the averaging computation are displayed. You can uncheck the box in the Use column to disable/re-enable a selected point.

Press the Average button when finished. This takes you to the Point Averaging dialog.

The Store Point button takes you to the

dialog.

The Cancel button returns you to Point Database dialog.

- 78 -

Points & Figures

Layout also allows the user to select the Original Point from the Point Database and by pressing the

"Edit" button there is a new button in the Edit Point screen that displays all the current Point Averaging observations assigned to the Original Point. So you can continue to add shots to it or if satisfied store a new averaged point location.

Partition Lines/Arcs

Line Toolbar | Partition button

The Partition command is started by selecting a valid line or arc in the map screen, which will open the

where you can select the partition button. After you select the partition button you will see the partition toolbar.

The partition line and arc command allows you to compute points along objects in your Project. You can partition figures that have line and arc segments that have a radius point defined. 3 point arcs cannot be partitioned. Straight lines in DXF files can be partitioned, all other DXF entities are not compatible with the partition command.

- 79 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Equal Partitions

You can partition the segment by equal divisions. Simply select the partition number and press the

Partition button. This will compute new points and split the object up into separate segments.

By Distance

You can partition the segment by specifying a distance between partitions. Simply define the partition distance, then press the Partition button. This will compute new points and split the object up into separate segments.

AutoMap Library

Main Menu | Settings | AutoMap Library

The AutoMap Library editor allows the user complete control over the visibility of points and lines based on the descriptions used to code the points. It also allows you to set attributes for the descriptions such as point and line colour.

- 80 -

Points & Figures

Enter Description

Use this field to auto scroll to description in your list. For example, typing the letters will scroll down to the description. If you type a unique description and press enter, you will be prompted for whether you want to add it into the AutoMap Library or not.

Show descriptions in use only

Use this to display only the descriptions found in your AutoMap Library that are used in the current

Project.

Adding Descriptions to the Library in Layout

While you're working you can add descriptions to the AutoMap Library on the fly. When you enter a description that isn't in the library you will be prompted with a message asking you if you want to add it to your Project's AutoMap Library file.

Note: This prompt can be turned off so Layout always uses the new descriptions without adding them into the AutoMap Library file. To do this you need to make sure you have the "Prompt New Descrip-

tions" toggle turned off in the

menu.

If you answer Yes, then the description will be added into the Project's AutoMap Library file (not to the

AutoMap Template file).

If you answer No, then the description will be used without adding it into the AutoMap Library. If you do not add it to the AutoMap Library, then you will not be able to set options such as defining the layer and colour of points and lines with this description.

- 81 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Editing Descriptions in the Library in Layout

The AutoMap Library editor allows you to edit properties for each description in the library. Pressing the Edit button will bring up the menu shown below for the selected entry:

These properties are stored in the library in specific columns. Please refer to the topic below about editing the library for more information.

Summary

You can use this field to summarize your description. For example, a description IP may have a summary Iron Pin.

Point Symbol

You can define a marker for a point. These markers are not automatically transferred back to the desktop and are not similar to CAD blocks or parts. They are simply point nodes that will be displayed in the map view to help distinguish different points on the screen. There are 27 different marker types.

The symbol for each description is also shown on the AutoMap Library screen.

Point Size

This allows you to change the size of the marker. You will find that using a number of 1 is a good starting point. Adjust from there as needed.

Point Colour

This allows you to set the colour of the markers. You can choose from a list of 255 colours.

- 82 -

Points & Figures

Line Colour

This allows you to change the colour of lines in your drawing.

Layer Name

This specifies the layer that will be used for lines and points with this description.

Connect Points With Line

If this is checked, when you select the description from the topo toolbar on the main display, the connect lines toggle will be turned on automatically. Use this for descriptions that typically are connected by lines such as an edge of road or ditch center line.

Do not assign to DTM

This is very useful for the creation of real-time surface models. If you toggle this ON, then these points will not be included in any DTM created with Layout. Use this for descriptions that are not at ground level.

Deleting Descriptions from the Library from Layout

The AutoMap Editor allows you to delete descriptions from the library. Pressing the Delete button will prompt you to make sure that you want to delete the selected entry. This will delete that entry from the Project's AutoMap Library file, it does not affect the AutoMap Template file.

Editing an Existing Library outside of Layout

The AutoMap Library is a very powerful feature in Layout. When combined with our desktop products, your downloaded files can literally be imported, layers and symbols placed in seconds. For this topic we will concentrate on helping you work with and edit the AutoMap library using Layout.

The Layout AutoMap library is a comma delimited file that can be edited with MicroSurvey Point Prep, with a text editor like Microsoft Notepad, or with a spreadsheet application like Microsoft Excel. Since not every Layout user owns our desktop software we will discuss editing the file with Excel.

The first row in the file is reserved for the column header. Some of the columns are reserved for our desktop products, but the following columns are used in Layout.

Column A = Description (String value)

Column B = Summary of Description (String value)

Column L = Connect Points with Line (1=Yes, 0=No)

Column M = Layer Name (String value)

Column O = Line Colour (Number 0-255)

Column Q = Line or Spline (0=Spline, 1=Line) *** This works in conjunction with Column L.

Column U = Marker Type (Number 0-26)

- 83 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Column V = Marker Size (Number 0-10)

Column W = Marker Colour (Number 0-255)

Column X = Exclude from DTM (1=Yes/Exclude, 0=No/Include)

Column AF = Zone Number (Numeric Value)

Create New Library outside of Layout

You can easily start a new library from scratch simply by creating a simple text file. In the first row add a header followed by your descriptions and summaries. You have to separate the values with a command and when you're done save the file with an extension of .CSV - an example filename might be CODES.CSV.

DESCRIPTION,SUMMARY

PIN,Iron Pin,

EC,Edge of Concrete,

EP,Edge of Pavement,

You can then copy the file to your ...\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows CE/Mobile) or

...\Documents\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows Tablet/PC) directory. When you create a new Project or open an existing one, make sure to select it as the AutoMap Template File.

Notes

Use this to enter or record audio notes for your points. You can access the notes screen by pressing the Notes button on the

activate linework on the fly while surveying, you simply choose the description you want and start taking shots! For MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop users, line connectivity codes setup in the desktop

screen.

- 84 -

Points & Figures

Text Notes

You can type a note up to 32 characters in length and it will be stored in the Project's DBF file. You cannot enter more than this limit into the Note field.

When the file is imported into MicroSurvey Point Prep, the note will appear in its own field, or can be appended to the point's description field.

Continue using this note: Use this if you want to use the note you just entered automatically for future points that are stored.

Text notes can be written to the raw file as comments when the

Option

is enabled.

Audio Notes

Use this function to record and playback audio notes that are related to stored points. These notes will be transferred to MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop software for playback in the office.

The notes will be stored in your Project directory and will be automatically named for you. Example, if you recorded a note for point 2, a file would be created pnt2.wav. The file that is created is a standard windows WAV file that can be played by most audio players.

MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop software will automatically link to any audio note you recorded. This allows you to easily see which points have audio notes.

Recording and Playback Controls

Circle = record

Square = stop

Triangle = playback

Trash = delete

Note that not all handheld devices support audio notes. You must have a record and playback functionality, which for some units requires optional accessories.

To Store an Audio Note:

1. Tap the red circle to activate recording. Speak into your microphone to record the desired information. "This post is bent" etc.

2. Press the square button to stop the recording

3. To confirm your note, press the playback arrow, now green on color displays, and listen to your note

- 85 -

MicroSurvey Layout

To replace an Audio Note with a new note:

1. Delete the existing audio note. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.

2. Record a new audio note.

Lines and Figures

Active Linework

Layout has Code-Free linework control in the field to eliminate the need to remember line codes. To

AutoMap library will be used by Layout. For more information see the Draw Option Defaults

section.

Layout uses the concept of Figures for handling of linework. Some software packages refer to these as "Chains".

At the bottom of the Layout interface, you will see the Active Lines List button on the second row.

When a new Project is started, it will display [ -No Line- ] as the current, active line.

When a new line figure is about to be started, [ -Start line- ] will be displayed on the button. After the first point for a new line has been measured, the active line will be created, made current and displayed.

- 86 -

Points & Figures

In the example shown, notice EP:1 on the button. This is the current Active Line. EP is the point description and 1 is the group number (added automatically). Since this is the first figure in the map, it is assigned group 1.

A Figure is a continuous series of Line, Curve and/or Arc segments. The Figure is identified by Point

Description and a group number. Whenever a new line is started, a new Figure is created and added to the Active Lines list with an automatically assigned group number. The group number will increment by one when a previously used point description is used for a subsequent line. (Notice there are two E/ASPH lines in the example)

Furthermore, all linework in Layout is handled in 3D.

When you press the EP:2 Active Line button you will see a list of the figures in your Project.

- 87 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Figures

Tangents, arcs and curvy lines in Layout are also called figures. Figures are created automatically for you as soon as you connect points in the drawing.

Figures can be created while you survey in real-time using our active linework or you can manually create the figure using the pencil tool.

Layout Figures

When you click on a figure the

will appear. You will also see bold text in the drawing area indicating what you selected.

DXF Linework

When you import a DXF drawing you will see all the linework that exists in the drawing. When you select a DXF line or arc you will see the

line toolbar . On the toolbar press the Line-Spline but-

but everything will be greyed out except for the stake and perpendicular distance buttons. If you press the stake button or perpendicular offset to point button, they will open up their respective toolbars.

When you click on a DXF entity you will see bold text in the drawing area indicating that you picked a

DXF line or arc, and it will display which layer it is on.

You can control the visibility of DXF layers through the

Layers Manager

screen.

- 88 -

Points & Figures

Coordinate DXF Data

You can add coordinates to the DXF entity by pressing the

Coordinate DXF Data button.

Information

You will see the inverse information based on the DXF entity you picked by pressing the Information button

Line Toolbar

Line Toolbar in

Linework Mode

Line Toolbar in

Layout Mode

when selecting a figure.

Line Toolbar in

Layout Mode

when selecting a DXF entity

- 89 -

MicroSurvey Layout

When you tap on an existing line or arc you will see the line toolbar appear near the bottom of your screen. The line toolbar contains functions that are frequently used on line or arcs in your Project. Following is an explanation of what each button will do.

Set Figure Current

Use this to make the current line or arc current in the Active Line

List.

End Figure

Use this to mark a line as complete or finished.

Reverse Figure Direction

Use this to switch the direction of a figure so you can append to the opposite end.

Partition Line / Arc

You can

partition (split)

a figure or DXF line into smaller segments using this command.

Delete Figure Segment

Use this to delete a segment from a figure.

Delete Entire Figure

Use the delete an entire figure.

Close Figure

Use this to close a figure so it finishes at the same point it started at.

Open Figure List

Use this to display the Active Line List.

Draw Tool

Use this to draw lines, points, and connect line work between existing points. This will open the

Draw Tool .

- 90 -

Convert Line to Spline

This will turn an existing figure that is comprised of straight lines into a curvy line, and vice-versa.

Offset Tool

Use this to open the

Offset Tool

Stake Figure

Use this to open the stake line command and stake the current line you have selected.

Coordinate DXF Data

You can add coordinates to the DXF entity by pressing the Coordinate DXF Data button.

Information

This will display the inverse information of the segment you have selected, as well as the perimeter and area if it is part of a closed figure.

Points & Figures

Select Line Toolbar

Various commands will use this toolbar to help you select a line.

- 91 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Whichever Selection Mode you use, the selected line will be highlighted in red in the map screen along with a direction indicator. If necessary, you can press the Switch Direction button to reverse the start and end of the selected line. Press OK to accept the selected line and proceed to the next step.

Selection Mode: Figure/DXF

Pick this mode to select an existing figure or DXF entity by selecting the desired figure from the map screen. You can select any of the following: l l

Figures containing lines and/or arcs (but not curvy splines)

DXF lines, arcs, and/or polylines (but not splines, splined polylines, or fitted polylines)

Selection Mode: Figure Segment

Pick this mode to select an individual line or arc segment from a complex figure, by selecting the desired segment from the map screen. You can select any of the following: l

A line or arc segment from a Figure (but not a curvy segment)

Please Note: A line or arc segment from a DXF polyline cannot be selected.

Selection Mode: Define Points

Pick this mode to select points in your Project to define a line or arc. You can define the following line types: l l l l

Straight Line: select a Start Point and End Point

Arc (CW): select a Start of Curve Point, Radial Point, and End of Curve Point

Arc (CCW): select a Start of Curve Point, Radial Point, and End of Curve Point

Arc (3Pnt): select a Start of Curve Point, Point on Curve, and End of Curve Point.

Switch Direction

The line direction will reverse, and the arrowhead shown in the map screen will show the current "forward" direction of the line.

OK

The highlighted line will be selected, and you will be returned to the appropriate command.

Cancel

You will return to the previous screen without selecting anything.

- 92 -

Figure List

The figure list contains a listing of all figures in your Project.

Points & Figures

Line Column

This is the group id assigned to the figure. Refer to the

Active Linework

topic for more information.

Active Column

If the figure is active, you will see the word YES. To make a figure not active, press the Switch Active

State button.

Description Column

This is the name of your figure which will usually match the description of the first point that the figure is connected to.

Points Column

This is the total number of points that the figure is connected to.

Closed Column

If you

closed the figure

you will see the word Yes.

- 93 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Show Active Figures

When this is selected (default setting) all of your active figures will be listed. You can select a figure that you would like to work on simply by selecting it in the list and pressing the OK button. If this is turned off, then all the figures in the Project will be displayed.

Switch Active State

Use this to change the status of a figure to "finished". When this is done, it will no longer be displayed in the figure list of the Show Active Figures button is on. Once a figure is switched to a not active state, nothing can be added to it.

Figures that are not active, can be made active again simply by selecting the figure you want to use and pressing the Switch State button.

New Figure

Use this to create a

new figure

in the figure list.

Close Figure

Use this to

close a figure

so it will close back to the starting point.

Delete Figure

Use this to delete a figure that you have highlighted in the list. You can delete figures that are flagged as active, or not active. Review the

delete figures

topic for more info on deleting.

Using Active Figures

Active Linework Options

We have 3 Draw Options for Active Linework, selected from buttons that appear beside the Description and Active Lines drop down lists:

Draw Lines button = Connect points with straight lines

Draw Curvy Lines button = Connect Points with a best-fit curvy line.

Draw 3-Point Arc button = Fit an arc through three measured points

- 94 -

Points & Figures

Start the first Line in a Project

To start the first line in a new Project, choose the desired point Description from the Description List and select the desired draw option before you start taking measurements. The Active Lines list will display -Start Line- as shown. At this point, the next point measured will be the first point of a new Active Line using the E/ASPH Description. Use the measure button to measure the starting point for the new line.

After the measurement to the first point for the new line is complete, the line will be added to the Active Lines list, identified by the current point description and an automatically assigned group number:

E/ASPH:3. The group number is three, because this is the third figure using the description E/ASPH.

- 95 -

MicroSurvey Layout

After the second point for this line has been recorded, the first segment will be created. From this point forward, simply continue taking shots to add to the now current Active Line: E/ASPH:3

Note the insertion of ":3", this is the group number. Re-use of the Description E/ASPH for a new line series in the current Project will automatically increment the group number by one. This allows you track and store multiple active lines of the same description without the need for multiple entries in your AutoMap Library. For example, E/ASPH:2, E/ASPH:3 ... E/ASPH:n can now be replaced with a single E/ASPH entry.

- 96 -

Points & Figures

Stop adding to a Line

If you wish to stop adding to the current line, simply deselect the current draw option (Line, Curvy line) before taking any more shots. After turning off the draw option, -No line- will display in the Active

Lines list button.

Start a subsequent New Line

Much like the first line in the Project, just select the desired description from the list and select the desired draw option before shooting the first point for the new line.

The key to note is the display of -Start Line- in the Active Lines list. Once the first point for the new line has been measured, the Active Lines list will set and display the new line as current.

Change Description within an Active Line

You may change the description within one ongoing line. Simply choose a different description and continue taking shots. The ID of the Active Line will not change.

Figure Direction Marker

The current line in the map is always defined by a bold outline and a blue X at the end of the line. The blue X indicates the line direction so you know what end of the line the next measurement will be connected to.

You can see that the blue X is on point 29. After you take your next shot, it will be automatically connected to this point.

- 97 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Once you select the figure, you will see the line toolbar. On this toolbar, select this button to reverse the direction. After you switch the direction, you will see the blue

"X" move to the opposite end of the figure.

New Figure

Pre-selection of Line Descriptions

A list of Active Lines (Figures) may be pre-specified to aid in planning for a complicated Project. Use the New Figure button on the Active Line List screen to specify a Line Description before taking any shots.

- 98 -

Points & Figures

You have the opportunity to use a manually entered comment with this method but the new line will be linked to the selected Line Description. The comment will appear in the Active Lines list to aid correct selection of the line.

Switching Active Figures

You may work on several figures at once. As described, ongoing figures are listed in the

Figure List .

You will notice that in this Project there are three figures.

- 99 -

MicroSurvey Layout

To change the current line, simply select the active line button which will open the Select Figure from

List screen. In this example it is the E/ASPH:3 button.

- 100 -

Points & Figures

Select the desired figure from the list and continue taking shots to add to the selected line. All settings are stored for each line so there is no need to reselect the Description or draw option.

- 101 -

MicroSurvey Layout

3-Point Arcs

To draw a three point arc on an ongoing Line, select the Draw 3-Point Arc button before shooting the second of the three points that will define the arc (POC). (Note that this is not the radius point). After measuring to the 2nd point, a dashed line will appear to illustrate that a 3-Point arc is in progress.

Shoot the 3rd point and the arc will appear. The current draw option will change from Draw 3-Pt Arc to

Draw Line after the third observation and the arc is complete.

We are going to connect a three point arc to the E/ASPH figure. Since we are measuring the midpoint of the arc, you need to turn on the three point arc toggle.

After you complete the measurement, you will see the midpoint drawn on the screen.

- 102 -

Points & Figures

Once you complete the third measurement, you will see the arc drawn in the map.

Tip: Multiple three point arcs can be connected in series if needed.

- 103 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Splines (Curvy) Figures

Figures can contain splines. Splines are "best fit arcs" that are forced to go through the points that define the figure.

Splines can be attached to straight or three point arc segments.

To draw a spline, simply choose the spline toggle.

Changing Active Lines to Curvy Lines

Any Active Line series (figure) can be changed from a series of straight segments to a best-fit curvy line. Select the figure in the drawing to open the

ton which will convert the line to a curvy line. If the line is already a curvy line, it will convert it to straight tangents between the points.

Note that any 3 point arcs or straight line segments will be lost when you use this function.

Complex Figure

Figures that contain straight segments, arcs and spline segments are said to be a complex figure.

- 104 -

Points & Figures

Closing Figures

To make a closed figure with an Active Line, select the Close Current Line button on the line toolbar. This will draw a line from the last point to the first point shot in the figure. The Line will be removed from the Active Lines list as it is now considered complete.

You will see that the figure now is closed back to the original start point.

In the active lines list, if you turn off the Show Active Figures you will see that the figure is flagged as Active = NO and Closed = YES.

- 105 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Alternatively, you can also close a figure in the

Figure List

screen by using the Close Figure button.

End (complete) a Figure

To mark a line as complete or finished, use the End Current Line button on the line toolbar. This will remove the line from the Active Lines list so that no more segments or arcs can be added.

This works similar to

closing a figure , but differs in that the figure will not be forced to close back on to

the original start point.

Re-Activating Figures

When a figure has been marked as complete, you can activate it again as follows:

From the Line Toolbar

You can visually pick on the map view the figure that you would like to re-activate.

On the line toolbar, select the activate button which will make the selected figure active.

- 106 -

Points & Figures

From the Figure List

You can also open the active lines list and if you turn off the Show Active Figures button you will see the figures that are marked as not active. Simply select the figure you want and press the Switch

Active State button which will set it to active.

- 107 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Deleting Figures

To delete linework in your Project simply select the figure you want to delete. When you select the figure, the

line toolbar

will open.

Use this button on the line toolbar to delete an individual segment between two points or a three point arc.

Use this to delete the entire figure that you have selected.

Notes:

Splines: Spline sections are considered to be one entity so using the delete entire figure, or delete segment, each will do the same thing. The entire spline will be deleted.

If a segment or arc is deleted from the middle of a figure, the figure will be broken into two pieces. Each new figure will be assigned a new group number. Closed or ended figures will be re-activated and added to the Active Lines list.

- 108 -

Points & Figures

Draw Option Defaults

To setup draw option defaults you need to own a copy of MicroSurvey Point Prep. From within

MicroSurvey Point Prep you can use the AutoMap editor to set default draw settings for each Description in the MicroSurvey Point Prep AutoMap Library. When this library is copied to your collector, selecting a Description will choose the correct Layout Draw option for Active Linework in Layout.

Lines

Choose the following in your desktop AutoMap library editor to set the draw default for Layout to

Lines.

In Layout when the description is selected, the line toggle will be automatically turned on.

As shown below, the line toggle has been automatically turned on when the E/ASPH description was selected from the list.

Curvy Lines

Choose the following to set the draw default for Layout to Curvy Lines

- 109 -

MicroSurvey Layout

In Layout when the description is selected, the curvy toggle will be automatically turned on.

As shown below, the curvy toggle has been automatically turned on when the E/ASPH description was selected from the list.

None

Choose the following to set the draw default for Layout to None

- 110 -

Points & Figures

As shown below, when the HUB description was selected, all line connectivity toggles are turned off.

Notes:

The 2D Connection and 3D Connection settings do not affect Layout, we only make use of these settings as defaults in MicroSurvey Point Prep. All Layout figures are

3D. With Layout data imported to MicroSurvey Point Prep, there is no need to process

AutoMap connections as Layout figures are drawn automatically. For more details on the AutoMap Library, see your MicroSurvey Point Prep Help System.

Drawing Tool

Main Menu | Calculations | Drawing Tool

Line Toolbar | Pencil button

Point Toolbar | Pencil button

This tool allows you to quickly draw a plan such as a pad or a building footprint into your Project, and is typically used to recreate plans from a paper hard-copy. You can use this to either calculate new points, or to connect existing points that are already in your Project.

You must have at least one point in your Project before you can start, to define the starting position for your plan. If a point does not yet exist (for example if this is the first command you run in a new Project), you will be prompted to store a new point before you can proceed.

Line Mode

Use the Line draw mode to add straight line segments to your figure.

- 111 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Start Point

Specify the start point for the new segment.

For starting a new plan, this should be set to an existing point in your Project, typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from.

As you continue adding subsequent points/segments to your plan, you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you.

Distance

Specify the length of the line segment you wish to draw.

Direction

Specify the direction (Azimuth or Bearing) of the line segment you wish to draw. The easiest way to do this is to use the right/left arrow buttons, which will increment/decrement the direction value by the amount shown in the pulldown list below the arrows. You can select a common angle from the choices in the list (90, 45, or 30 degrees), or you can type any value if you need to increment it by some other amount.

Store

After you have defined the segment to add, press this to store the new point and line segment into your Project.

- 112 -

Points & Figures

Store+

This does the same as the Store button, but you will see the

screen. Use this to confirm or view the coordinates, or to specify a description.

Point by Line Mode

This is the same as the Line mode, except that when you press Store or Store+ it will only store the point, without drawing the line segment.

Arc Mode

Use the Arc draw mode to add arc segments to your figure.

Start Point

Specify the start point for the new segment.

For starting a new plan, this should be set to an existing point in your Project, typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from.

As you continue adding subsequent points/segments to your plan, you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you.

Direction

Specify the direction (Azimuth or Bearing) of the tangent in to the arc segment you wish to draw.

This will default to either the direction of the previous line segment or the tangent out of the previous arc segment, so as long as your arc is tangential to the previous segment you will not need to change this value.

- 113 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Angle / Chord Length / Arc Length

Specify one of the three available methods to define your arc: l l l

Angle: Enter the interior delta angle of the arc.

Chord: Enter the chord length of the arc.

Arc: Enter the arc length of the arc.

Radius

Specify the radius to define your arc.

Clockwise / Counter-Clockwise Arrows

Use the Right/Left arrow buttons to define whether the arc rotates clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Store

After you have defined the segment to add, press this to store the new end and radial points, and draw the arc segment into your Project.

Store+

This does the same as the Store button, but you will see the

screen. Use this to confirm or view the coordinates, or to specify a description.

Point by Arc Mode

This is the same as the Arc mode, except that when you press Store or Store+ it will only store the points, without drawing the arc segment.

Connect Points Mode

This mode lets you draw lines/arcs by connecting points that already exist in your Project.

- 114 -

Points & Figures

Start Point

Specify the start point for the new segment.

For starting a new plan, this should be set to an existing point in your Project, typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from.

As you continue connecting subsequent points to your plan, you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you.

Line Type

Specify one of the five available methods to define your next figure segment: l l l l l

Straight: this will draw a straight line between the specified Start Point and End Point.

Arc (CW): this will draw a clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End Point, with the specified Radial Point.

Arc (CCW): this will draw a counter-clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End

Point, with the specified Radial Point.

Arc (3Pnt): this will draw an arc (clockwise or counter-clockwise) between the specified Start

Point and End Point, going through the specified intermediate Arc Point (any point directly on the arc, does not need to be the midpoint).

Spline: this will draw a curvy line between the specified Start Point and End Point.

- 115 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Store / Store+

The Store and Store+ buttons are disabled for this mode, because new points are not being calculated for your Project. The line or arc segment will be automatically drawn into your Project after you specify its parameters.

Undo

Press the Undo button to undo the last segment you computed, removing both the point and/or the line segment (as appropriate) from your Project. You can undo multiple steps.

Note, there is no Redo function.

Close

Press the Close button to exit from the Draw Plan command, and you will be returned to the

map screen .

Smart Tags

When you select an existing or create a figure in your drawing you will see smart tags appear on the points that make up the figure.

Smart Tag "T"

The T smart tag define points connected to straight line segments.

Smart Tag "M"

The M smart tag defines the midpoint of an arc.

Smart Tag "C"

The C smart tag define points connected by a curvy line type.

- 116 -

Points & Figures

- 117 -

MicroSurvey Layout

AIN

ENU

On the

main interface

of Layout you will see the Layout Start icon which will always activate the main menu or display the previously viewed sub-menu. When the button is pressed you will see the main menu screen:

On the main menu, pressing any of the buttons will take you to its sub-menu.

The Exit button will close Layout.

Project Manager

Selecting this will allow you to create, open or delete Project. Please see the

Project Manager

topic for more information.

Settings

Select this to check or change settings for Layout. Please see the

Settings

topic for more information.

Measure Modes

Select this to choose a Measure Mode such as occupying a point, checking a point, or measuring an offset. Please see the Measure Modes topics for more information.

- 118 -

Main Menu

Calculations

Select this to use our calculating functions such as COGO and inversing. Please see the

Calculations

topic for more information.

Layout Mode Toggle

Toggle to switch between layout-specific and as-built-specific toolbars in the map screen. Please review the

Layout Mode

and

As-built Mode

topics for more details.

Connect/Disconnect

Use this to connect or disconnect the instrument. Please see the

topic for more information.

Layout

Select this to access our layout functions. Please see the

topic for more information.

Import/Export

Select this to import or export ASCII files, and to export DXF, XML, and other files. Please see the

Import/Export

topic for more information.

Please note, additional file types can be imported from the

and the

Manager, both located in the

menu.

Data Manager

Use this to manage your points, DXF files, and surfaces. Please see the

create a new Project , simply press the New Project button. You will then see the New Project

topic for more information.

Roads Manager

Use this to access tools that will help you create or edit alignments, templates, and profiles. Please see the

Roads Manager

topic for more information.

- 119 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Project Manager

Main Menu | Project Manager

The Project Manager is used to create, open, or delete Projects stored on your data collector. When you start Layout this is always the first screen you will see.

You can sort the list by Project name or date by tapping on the column's header.

Projects Folder

Press this button to specify a different Project folder than the default. The default is ...\Mi-

croSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows CE/Mobile) or ...\Docu-

ments\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows Tablet/PC). Once you set the directory it is written to the MSurvey.ini file and is used for all subsequent Projects.

Delete Project

To delete a Project, pick the Delete trash can icon next to the Project Name. You will be asked to confirm that you really want to delete the Project.

Notes:

- You cannot delete a Project that is currently open

- Projects that have been deleted cannot be restored

Open Project

open an existing Project

, simply select it in the list and press the Open button.

- 120 -

Main Menu

Review & Open Project

To review and open an existing Project, simply select it in the list and press the Review & Open button. This option will display the Project files used with the Project.

New Project

screen which will allow you to enter a name, choose your AutoMap library and set the units for the Project.

Exit

To exit from the Project Manager press the Back Arrow button.

- 121 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Settings Menu

Main Menu | Settings

The settings menu is used to setup and review settings that have been set for your current Project.

You can also specify default settings for new Projects that are created.

Most of these settings are stored in a file named MSurvey.ini which can be found in the ...\Mi-

croSurvey\Layout\Programs\ (Windows CE/Mobile) or ...\ProgramData\MicroSurvey\Layout\3\

(Windows Tablet/PC) directory. It is recommended that once you have defined your settings, that you make a backup of this MSurvey.ini file.

Options

Use this to set or change settings that affect Layout's functionality. Please see the

Coordinate System Settings

topic for more information.

Units and Scale

Use this to set or change the units, bearings, distances and scale settings for your Project. Please see the

Units and Scale

topic for more information.

Coordinate System

Use this to define the coordinate system for your Project. Please see the

topic for more information.

- 122 -

Main Menu

Keyboard Shortcuts

Use this to define shortcuts to Layout commands and assign them to your keys. Please see the

Keyboard Shortcuts

topic for more information.

Language Selection

Pick the Language for the program interface. Many options are available, see the

Language Selection

topic for more details.

AutoMap Library

The AutoMap Library editor, see the

AutoMap Library

topic for more details.

Project Information

Use this to enter and save information about your Project. Please see the

Project Information

topic for more information.

About

Opens the

About

screen.

Options

Main Menu | Settings | Options

The options screen helps you set settings that affect the look and feel of Layout.

- 123 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Press the [+] buttons along the left to expand (show) each section, and the [-] buttons to collapse

(hide) it.

l l l l l l l l l

Interface Options

User Input Options

Point Attributes Options

Map Configurations Options

Default Units Options

Interface Options

Map Colour

Use this to force the background color for the main drawing area to be white or black

Map Orientation

Using this will force the map screen to be oriented to the north or south. This is needed for coordinate systems that are referenced south, such as in South Africa. This is different from South Azimuth directions, as used in Hawaii.

Text Size (Info/Grid)

Use this to force the text shown in the Information screens (such as the Observation toolbar and the

COGO History screen) and grid screens (such as the Project Manager and Angle Offset shots) to use a small or large sized text.

Scrollbar Width

Use this to increase the width of the scroll bar on the map screen.

User Input Options

Keypad Text Color

Use this to turn change the keypad text color to show up better against the keypad background color.

Keypad Background Color

Use this to turn change the keypad background color so the text shows up better.

- 124 -

Main Menu

Extended Edit Boxes

Use this to control how you want to bring up the selected keypad when tapping in an edit box: either with a single tap, a double tap, or off. Users of devices with a keyboard should leave this set to

Double Click, and users of devices without a keyboard should set this to Single Click. Setting this to

Off disables both the keypad and any other commands that may be started directly from the edit field, such as the Point Chooser or Inverse Tool, so that edit fields can only be used for typing values from your physical keypad.

Menu Shortcuts

This will enable menu shortcuts so if you have a keyboard device you can press letter and number keys to navigate around the program.

Instrument Toolbar

You can define if the instrument toolbar is located on either the Right or Left Side of your map screen.

SIP Type

Use this to specify which SIP keypad type you want to use on a Windows Mobile device.

Point Attributes Options

Coordinate Order

Use this to control the display of coordinate values in Layout. Options are NEH, ENH, XYZ, XYZ

(South) and YXZ (South) affecting any area of the program where coordinates are displayed.

This option also affects whether the

ASCII Import

and

ASCII Export

commands use a N,E or E,N

(X,Y) file format.

Alphanumeric IDs

When this is enabled you will be allowed to enter Alphanumeric Point IDs such as 21a, AB3, EV2. If this isn't turned on, then Layout will not accept anything but integer numbers. Alphanumeric input of

Point IDs can contain up to 31 characters.

Alphanumeric Case Sensitive

When this is enabled the Point ID that is used as a unique identifier will be case sensitive, points a1 and A1 will be recorded as 2 separate points.

Notes:

- 125 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The Case Sensitive setting is applied when the user stores a measured, calculated, or manually entered point and Layout needs to determine if the Point ID already exists. In other cases the setting is not used, specifically:

- Importing Points: When importing points the setting will not be applied. Layout will treat the Point IDs as Case Sensitive, regardless of what the setting is.

- Point Ranges: Point ranges will be handled as Not Case Sensitive.

- Sorting Points: The Point Database and other sorting applications will always sort as Not Case Sensitive.

- Point Query: Specifying a Point ID as input will always require an exact match and is Case Sensitive.

Point ID Range - Minimum

Use this to force Layout to limit the point numbers that are used to a specific range; here you would specify the minimum range value. If you try to use a point number that is less than this value, you will see a message that will ask you to select a different point number. Note: If you have the Alphanumeric IDs toggle turned on, a natural order sort algorithm determines if a Point ID falls within the range.

Point ID Range - Maximum

Use this to force Layout to limit the point numbers that are used to a specific range; here you would specify the maximum range value. If you try to use a point number that is greater than this value, you will see a message that will ask you to select a different point number. Note: If you have the Alphanumeric IDs toggle turned on, a natural order sort algorithm determines if a Point ID falls within the range.

Alphanumeric Point ID's can have a maximum length of 31 characters.

New Description Prompt

This controls how Layout deals with descriptions that don't match anything in your AutoMap library. If this is on, when you enter a description that isn't in the AutoMap library you will see a warning message asking you if you want to add it.

If it is off, any description that doesn't have a match in the AutoMap library will be automatically added to your Project's AutoMap library.

Time Stamp Saved Points

This tells Layout to write a timestamp into the raw file whenever a point is stored.

Write Notes to Raw File

When this option is enabled, the text note recorded for a specific point will be written to the Raw file as a comment.

- 126 -

Main Menu

Map Configurations

Show ID

This is used to show or hide the point number labels for your points.

Show Description

This is used to show or hide the point description labels for your points.

Show Elevation

This is used to show or hide the point elevation labels for your points.

Level of Detail

The Level of Detail filter, when turned off, will force Layout to show the point labels all the time, independent of your zoom level. If it is turned on, Layout uses an algorithm to determine if displaying the point labels is necessary.

This is demonstrated in the following two images, the first has LOD turned on and the second has

LOD turned off.

With LOD on, as soon as you zoom in to a reasonable level, the labels will appear automatically.

Under normal circumstances you will keep the LOD feature active.

- 127 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Text Size (Map View)

Use this to change the default text size that is used on the Map View.

Map Position Select

If this is turned on, tapping a blank part of the map screen will display the

Map Select Toolbar .

Map DXF Entity Select

If this is turned on, then tapping on a DXF entity will highlight it. If turned off then the DXF file will behave like an underlay and is not selectable.

Default Units Options

These options provide the default settings shown in the

Units & Scale

screen when creating a new

Project; they do not necessarily reflect the actual settings for the current Project. Please see the

Units & Scale

topic for more detailed information on each option.

Distance Unit, Format, Precision

Specify whether new Projects should default to Meters or Feet, in which format, and with how much precision.

Angle Unit, Format, Precision

Specify whether new Projects should default to Degrees, Radians, or Gons/Grads, in which format, and with how much precision.

Direction Format

Specify whether to use Bearings or Azimuths by default for new Projects.

Scale

Specify the default ground-to-grid scale factor to use for new Projects.

Corrections

Specify whether to enable or disable the "Curvature and Refraction Corrections" option by default for new Projects.

GNSS Options

EP+ Records

Toggle the format of the EP record written to the raw file. The standard EP record contains a combined horizontal RMS value, while the EP+ record contains RMS values for Northing and Easting.

EP+ records are required when seeding positions with regards to L-band correction services.

- 128 -

Main Menu

Post Processing Tagging

Start and End times of GNSS measurements can be written to the raw file as comments. These values are required for post processing raw data with Effigis OnPOZ (EZSurv) software. NOTE: End times are captured when the user picks the Store Position button on the GNSS Measurement dialog.

Leap Seconds (GPS-UTC)

Some receivers report UTC time instead of GPS time. When writing Start and End times for GNSS measurements, the Leap Seconds value will be applied to the UTC time to ensure GPS time is recorded. NOTE: This value will change over time and is the responsibility of the user to ensure it is current. This value only applies to those receivers that report UTC time.

Prompt Raw Logging

Raw data logging on most receivers must be manually initialized. A prompt can be displayed at connection time to remind the user to start raw data logging on the receiver.

Test Incoming Data Stream

Some GNSS receivers automatically connect to the previous correction link. FieldGenius can test for incoming corrections at connection time to eliminate the Link Configure step.

Display GNSS Reference Setup

When connecting to a reference receiver, a prompt can be displayed to remind the user of the steps to take to complete a reference setup.

Layout Options

Tolerance

This is the error tolerance that the staking command will use. When your staking "move by" distances are equal to or less than this amount, your direction to a point will be indicated in green text in the

Observation Toolbar at the top left hand corner of the screen. Green text will be displayed to notify you that you're meeting your tolerance; if you do not meet the tolerance, the text will switch to red.

Orientation Total Station

The user can set an orientation preference for a Total Station layout. Depending on the equipment currently in use, Layout will automatically use the defined orientation.

Orientation North (Cardinal)

With the North orientation, North is the reference direction. The "move by" distances are standard cardinal directions.

North: This is the distance you need to move North.

South: This is the distance you need to move South.

- 129 -

MicroSurvey Layout

East: This is the distance you need to move East.

West: This is the distance you need to move West.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Orientation North (Directional)

With the North orientation, North is the reference direction. The "move by" distances are indicated by arows showing the direction of the movement.

Up arrow: This is the distance you need to move North.

Down arrow: This is the distance you need to move South.

Right Arrow: This is the distance you need to move East.

Left Arrow: This is the distance you need to move West.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Instrument

With the staking reference set to Instrument the map view will be twisted so the instrument is centered towards the top of your screen. The "move by" distances are with respect to the rod position looking towards the instrument. This view is useful when using a robotic instrument.

In: This is the distance you need to move towards the instrument.

Out: This is the distance you need to move away from the instrument.

Right: Facing the instrument, move right by this amount.

Left: Facing the instrument, move left by this amount.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Prism

With the staking reference set to Prism the map view will be twisted so the prism is centered towards the top of your screen. The "move by" distances are with respect to the instrument man looking at the prism. This view is handy when using a non-robotic instrument.

In: This is the distance you need to move towards the instrument.

- 130 -

Main Menu

Out: This is the distance you need to move away from the instrument.

Right: Facing the prism, move right by this amount.

Left: Facing the prism, move left by this amount.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

User Point

With the User Point orientation, you can use an existing point in your Project as the reference. The view will be twisted so that the selected point is centered towards the top of your screen.

In: This is the distance you need to move towards your user reference point.

Out: This is the distance you need to move away from your user reference point.

Right: Facing your user reference point, move right by this amount.

Left: Facing your user reference point, move left by this amount.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Orientation GNSS

The user can set an orientation preference for a GNSS layout. Depending on the equipment currently in use, Layout will automatically use the defined orientation.

Orientation North (Cardinal)

With the North orientation, North is the reference direction. The "move by" distances are standard cardinal directions.

North: This is the distance you need to move North.

South: This is the distance you need to move South.

East: This is the distance you need to move East.

West: This is the distance you need to move West.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Orientation North (Directional)

- 131 -

MicroSurvey Layout

With the North orientation, North is the reference direction. The "move by" distances are indicated by arows showing the direction of the movement.

Up arrow: This is the distance you need to move North.

Down arrow: This is the distance you need to move South.

Right Arrow: This is the distance you need to move East.

Left Arrow: This is the distance you need to move West.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

User Point

With the User Point orientation, you can use an existing point in your Project as the reference. The view will be twisted so that the selected point is centered towards the top of your screen.

In: This is the distance you need to move towards your user reference point.

Out: This is the distance you need to move away from your user reference point.

Right: Facing your user reference point, move right by this amount.

Left: Facing your user reference point, move left by this amount.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point's elevation.

Line

With the staking reference set to Line the map view will be twisted so the line is drawn vertically with the start of the line at the bottom of the screen and the end of the line at the top of the screen. The

"move by" distances are with respect to the line.

In: You will not be given an In distance.

Out: You will not be given an Out distance.

Right: Looking down the line (or parallel to it), move right by this amount perpendicularly towards the line.

Left: Looking down the line (or parallel to it), move left by this amount perpendicularly towards the line.

Cut: This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake line's interpolated elevation.

- 132 -

Main Menu

Fill: This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake line's interpolated elevation.

Compass Switch Threshold

This allows a user to input a distance within which the compass on a Total Station.

Attached User ID

Use this to add a value to the point number you’re currently staking. For example if the point you're staking is point 8, and this field is set to 1000. In the raw file it will show that you staked point 1008 and will also store the staked position as point 1008 in the Project database.

Line Mode

Use this to control how your navigation distances are computed and displayed when staking a Line.

In Auto mode, Layout will automatically determine if it should display in/out or left/right offsets to the line. Auto mode will display in/out distances if the line of sight intersects the line equal or greater than

45° (In/Out); if it is less than 45° then Layout will display (Left/Right) offsets to the line.

You can force Layout to always display In/Out distances to the line by setting it to In/Out.

Use Left/Right to always see the Left/Right offset to the line.

If you're staking an arc, Layout will always display in/out offsets no matter what line mode setting Layout is set to.

This option has no effect if you have selected the "Line" Orientation Reference option.

Robotic Prism Tracking

When selected the robotic total station will track the prism as the user moves it across the scene site.

Turn Instrument Mode

If you have a motorized instrument, including robotics, you can control how Layout turns the instrument during stakeouts. If you want Layout to compute the horizontal and vertical angle needed to stake your point, use the 3D (HA + VA) option. If all you want is the horizontal angle to be turned, and the vertical left alone, select the 2D (HA) option.

DTM Layout Name

Use this to select a surface that will be used to compute a new z value for the design point. When you select a surface you need to have the Stake to DTM toggle checked. Once this is turned on, the

elevation for any point you stake will be computed using this surface. In other words, if you’re doing point staking and the point has a design elevation, it will be ignored. The stake point’s N & E will be used to intersect a point on the surface and that elevation will be used to stake the point.

- 133 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Fade Laid Out Points

Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see laid out points displayed differently to non-laid out points. A laid out point will appear as a slightly greyed out inverted triangle. This is for you to make quick assessments of what has been done and what remains to be finished.

Display Point Layout Screen

Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see the Point Layout screen displayed. This screen will always be displayed if there are values in the Design Point Offset fields. This was done to ensure that you never layout a point with a forgotten (and wrong) offset.

Display Layout Result Screen

Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see the Layout Result screen displayed after laying out a point. This screen will always be displayed if the laid out point exceeds the layout tolerances.

Store Layout Point

Place a check mark in this box if you would like the laid out point to be stored along with the raw data.

If no check mark is in this box then only the raw data is stored, and the Store Point dialog will not be displayed.

By default this is checked. What will happen is when you store a staked position using the store button on the stake toolbar you will be prompted with a screen allowing you to assign a point number and description to the new point that will be created.

The point description will default to the current description from the AutoMap Library, as shown on your topo toolbar. If you choose a different description from the library, then it will be retained for all consecutive stakeout points.

Furthermore, when this feature is turned on it will use the value in the Add Id field to determine the point number for the recorded staked position. For example if you staked point 19 and you have an

Attached User Id = 1000, then Layout will automatically use 1019 as a point number. This can be changed by the user.

Show Layout-Stored Points

Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see the laid out point displayed on map. We provide you with the choice so that you can quickly see which points you have already laid out.

Use Layout List

Place a check mark in this box if you would to use the Layout list instead of laying out from the Points database. If you use a layout list, you will never have a measured point presented as a new point to lay out.

- 134 -

Main Menu

Find Next Nearest

Place a check mark in this box if you would like Layout to search in the Points database (i.e. not in the layout list) for the nearest point from the current position, and present it as the next point to be laid out.

Roading Options

Stationing Format

You can specify the format for your stations.

Value

Stationing Format

0+000.000

0+010.000

0+00.00

0+10.00

0.000

10.000

100 0+100.000

1+00.00

100.000

1000 1+000.000 10+00.00 1000.000

10000 10+000.000 100+00.00 10000.000

Force Tangential

Place a check mark in this box if you would like to automatically enforce the direction of alignment geometry elements so they remain tangential to previous geometry elements. This rule can be useful to ensure the alignment geometry elements maintain a common tangent direction between adjacent elements.

Dynamic Horizontal Alignment

Place a check mark in this box if you would like changes to the direction of alignment geometry elements to be applied to subsequent geometry elements. To illustrate: modify the direction of a line geometry element by 10° clockwise. With this feature is enabled, all geometry elements following the modified line will also be rotated by 10° clockwise. With this feature is disabled, only the single line element will be rotated by 10°.

System Options

Show Tool Tips

When turned on, a "Tip of the Day" will be displayed when Layout is started, and tooltips will be displayed when you hover over any button.

Turning this off will hide the "Tip of the Day" dialog and will disable tooltips on buttons.

- 135 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Communication Trace File

When turned on it will create a log file of the communication between Layout and your instrument, which can be used to diagnose communication problems and should only be used in this situation.

The text file will be named TraceTS.txt or TraceGNSS.txt and will be created in the ...\Program Files

(x86)\MicroSurvey\Layout\3\ directory on your device.

Display Use Last Setup Screen

When this option is turned on, you will be offered to the choice to use the last instrument occupied point when for an existing Project is opened. This is useful if the program is inadvertently closed in the middle of a Project and the instrument has not moved from the last occupied point. You can start work again without having to backsight and reestablish the instrument location.

Use Assistant on Open

The Total Station Assistant suggests workflow shortcuts when opening a Project.

Always Auto-Reconnect

When turned on it the program will always attempt to reconnect if communication drops between the device and the collector.

Datum Warning Dialog

When turned on a warning will show up when the datum is changed so the user can move to use a new datum.

Unit Settings

Main Menu | Settings | Units and Scale

The units and scale menu allows you to specify settings for your Project. Some of these settings are recorded in the raw file and the Project's INI file, as well as recorded in the MSurvey.ini file.

Notes:

The Distance Unit (Meters or Feet) and Angle Unit (Degrees, Radians, or Gons) can only be set when creating a new Project. After a Project has been created, these will remain greyed-out and cannot be changed.

- 136 -

Main Menu

You can set these settings as defaults for new Projects by pressing the Save as Default Settings button. The default settings can also be set in the

screen.

Note: the actual precision on distances and angles returned from your instrument may be limited to less than the precision you select here. Selecting a higher precision here will not increase the precision of values queried from your instrument.

Distance Unit

Choose the distance unit that you will be using: Meters, International Feet, or US Survey Feet. All distances will be displayed in the selected format. All distances will be recorded to the raw file in decimal format. Database coordinates are always stored with 6 decimal places, and rounded to the desired precision for display.

Meters

If you choose Meters as your distance unit, you can also specify the number of decimal places to display within Layout, from 0 to 6.

International Feet / US Survey Feet

If you choose International Feet or US Survey Feet, then you can specify to use either a decimal format with a precision from 0 to 6, or a Fractional format with feet and inches.

If you use the decimal format, distances will be displayed in decimal feet, such as 10.5' to indicate

10.5 feet or 10feet-6inches.

If you use the fractional format, distances will be displayed in feet and fractional inches, such as 10'6

1/2" to indicate 10feet-6.5inches or 10.54166667 feet.

- 137 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Angle Unit

Choose the angular unit that you will be using: Degrees, Gons/Gradients, or Radians. All angular values written into the raw file will be recorded in the selected format.

Degrees

If you select Degrees, then you can also select which format to use, either DDD°MM'SS.s" for degrees-minutes-decimal seconds, DDD°MM.m' for degrees-decimal minutes, or DDD.d° for decimal degrees. You can also specify the number of decimal places to use, from 0 to 8.

Gons (Gradients)

If you select Gons (Gradients) then you can also specify the number of decimal places to use, from 0 to 8.

Radians

If you select Radians then you can also specify the number of decimal places to use, from 0 to 8.

Direction Format

Choose the direction format that you will be using: North Azimuth, South Azimuth, or Bearings. When entering a direction, you can always override this setting by entering the angle with the cardinal quadrant indicated before or after the angle. If there is no quadrant specified, then the input angle will be interpreted as an Azimuth.

Scale Factor

You can use a scale factor to adjust ground distances to grid distances.

Distances measured with a total station will be recorded in the raw file with the unscaled, true measured slope distance. This scale factor is applied to the computation of coordinates only.

Distances entered using the Traverse/Intersect tool (COGO) will be scaled by the scale factor.

Distances calculated using the Inverse tool, or recalled using the pt..pt format will be scaled by the inverse of this scale factor. The result will be the inversed grid distance times the inverse of the scale factor, so that the ground distance is returned.

This Scale Factor does not affect any GNSS measurements. Please see the GNSS Local Transformation topic for information on using a GNSS Scale Factor.

Save As Default

Use this to permanently write the current settings to the MSurvey.ini file. When you create a new Project, it will use these settings. The default settings can also be set in the

GNSS Local Transformation

screen.

- 138 -

Main Menu

Coordinate Systems

Coordinate System Settings

Main Menu | Settings | Coordinate System

The coordinate system settings are used to transform GNSS derived curvilinear coordinates (latitude, longitude and ellipsoidal height) into Cartesian coordinates (northing/y, easting/x, and ellipsoid or orthometric height) for presentation on the drawing window and data storage.

Horizontal Group

Set the horizontal projected coordinate system for your Project.

The default coordinate system in Layout is set to UTM83-11. Change this coordinate system as appropriate for your region.

Edit List

The Edit List button opens the

Coordinate System List

dialog, which is used to add predefined or user-defined coordinate systems to the list of selectable systems, create new coordinate systems, copy predefined systems, and edit or delete existing systems.

A predefined coordinate system is one that is included with Layout by default, a user-defined sys-

tem is one that you have created.

More Info

Displays details about the selected coordinate system, including:

- 139 -

MicroSurvey Layout

1. Ellipsoid parameters

2. The datum transformation method and parameters

3. The projection type and parameters

Vertical Group

Set the vertical system for your Project.

The default vertical datum is set to Ellipsoidal (WGS84), meaning that all GNSS derived heights will be referenced to the WGS84 ellipsoid. The list of available systems includes all valid geoid model files that are present within the Mapping directory of your Layout installation. A geoid model is required to reference GNSS derived heights to a geodetic datum. Please review the

Geoid Model

topic for more details.

Save As Defaults

Saves the Horizontal and Vertical systems to the MSurvey.ini file as defaults to be used for all new

Projects.

Coordinate System List

The Coordinate System List dialog is where you can select an existing coordinate system or create a new user-defined coordinate system and add them to a "favourites" list.

This list allows you to define the coordinate systems you uses most often for easy access from the

Coordinate System Settings screen.

- 140 -

Add

Add a new coordinate system to the list by one of three methods:

Main Menu

- 141 -

MicroSurvey Layout

1. Select Coordinate System From Database - Select one of the predefined coordinate systems. Coordinate systems are grouped into countries or mapping systems. Select the country or system that you are surveying in and then choose the coordinate system in the System drop down list. The section below the System field displays the projection, datum, and ellipsoid information related to this coordinate system.

2. Create New User Coordinate System - Create a completely new coordinate system from scratch with known parameters. Enter a name for your coordinate system and optionally enter

- 142 -

a description. NOTE: The system name must have colon in the name.

Main Menu

3. Create New User Coordinate System From Database Selection - Choose a predefined coordinate system to populate parameters for a new coordinate system.

Edit

Edit a user-defined coordinate system. It is not possible to edit predefined coordinate systems.

Remove

Remove the selected coordinate system from the list. If the coordinate system is user-defined; you will have the option to permanently delete the coordinate system. You may want to use the

User

Coordinate System Export

routine to save a backup copy of your user-defined coordinate system before removing it permanently.

OK Button

This will save the coordinate system favourites list to the MSurvey.ini file.

Cancel Button

This will exit the dialog and will save nothing. You will be automatically returned to the Coordinate

System Settings dialog.

- 143 -

MicroSurvey Layout

New / Edit user-defined Systems

Ellipsoid Parameters

To define the ellipsoid for the coordinate system you must enter the known equatorial and polar radiuses for the ellipsoid. The Inverse Flattening is not editable and will be computed automatically and can be used a check.

o o o

Equatorial Radius (a)

Polar Radius (b)

Inverse Flattening (1/f) - Always a read only value, automatically computed from the two ellipsoid radiuses.

Datum Parameters

There are 7 datum types to select from: o o o o o o o

Three Parameter

Four Parameter

Six Parameter

Seven Parameter

Bursa / Wolf

DMA Molodensky

None

If none is selected then no transformation parameters will be applied to the coordinate system transformation.

If a datum other than none is selected then the user will be able to enter the following parameters: o o o o o o o

Delta X (m)

Delta Y (m)

Delta Z (m)

X Rotation (“)

Y Rotation (“)

Z Rotation (“)

Scale (PPM)

Projection Parameters

The user can select one of nineteen projections.

- 144 -

Main Menu o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Lambert Conformal Conic (One Standard Parallels)

Lambert Conformal Conic (Two Standard Parallels

Transverse Mercator or Gauss Kruger

Universal Transverse Mercator

Albers Equal Area Conic

Rectified Skew Orthomorphic, Azimuth at Projection Center

Mercator Cylindrical Projection with Standard Parallel

Mercator Cylindrical Projection with Scale Reduction

Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area

Lambert Azimuthal Equidistant

Miller Cylindrical

Oblique Sterographic

Polar Sterographic

Sinusoidal Projection, Optionally Interrupted

Equidistant Cylindrical

Cassini

Robinson Cylindrical

Bonne Pseudoconical

Krovac Oblique Conformal Conic, Czechoslovokia

Typical projection parameters for most cases are: o o o o o o

Scale Factor

Central Meridian

Origin Latitude

Origin Longitude

False Northing

False Easting

Automatic Backup

Whenever you add or edit a user-defined coordinate system, Layout will automatically create and save your parameters to a file named user-coordsys-backup.csmap to the mapping directory.

This backup file stores your user-defined coordinate systems.

- 145 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Localization (Site Calibration)

Further coordinate transformations can be accomplished with the use of the Local Transformation function of Layout. See the

section for more information.

These settings are stored in your Project's INI file, allowing you to easily use different coordinate systems for different Projects.

Geoid Models

Geoid models are used by Layout to convert ellipsoid heights to orthometric heights. Layout will by default use ellipsoid heights but you can define a geoid model to be used instead if orthometric heights are desired.

Geoid models are not installed by default and must be downloaded from the MicroSurvey website.

Geoid models are available for most regions around the world.

Download Files and Instructions

Please review the following MicroSurvey Helpdesk article for instructions and country specific geoid models: http://helpdesk.microsurvey.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/479

Grid Shift Files

In some countries, or areas, the use of grid shift files are required to accurately compute a horizontal position. When projecting a dataset between two different datums, a transformation is required.

Both equation-based and grid-based transformation methods are supported by Layout. An equationbased transformation can use either a 3-parameter (dX, dY, dZ) or a 7-parameter transformation (dX, dY, dZ, rX, rY, rZ, ds) to translate between coordinate systems. A grid-based transformation uses binary files and interpolations that calculate the differences between the two geographic coordinate systems.

We have created country specific grid shift files and these additional grid shift files are not installed by default and need to be downloaded from the MicroSurvey website.

Download Files and Instructions

Please review the following MicroSurvey Helpdesk article for instructions and country specific grid shift files: http://helpdesk.microsurvey.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/499

Keyboard Shortcuts

Main Menu | Settings | Keyboard Shortcuts

- 146 -

Main Menu

You can now assign command shortcuts to keys on your data collector. This has been added to support our new keyboard layout on the newer Trackers but it also works with any device that has a keyboard.

The defaults for the shortcut keys are based on the MicroSurvey Tracker custom keyboard layout, but you can assign any key you want to the list of available commands. The shortcut definitions are stored in the MSurvey.ini file so they're portable to your other data collectors if you've defined a custom layout.

Another great feature is that the EDM mode for the current instrument you have selected can have shortcut keys assigned to them. For example if you refer to the list above, you would press the 1 key to set your EDM mode on the instrument to IR Standard.

The shortcut keys will only function from the

map screen

Set Shortcut Key

Use this to assign a command to a key on your keyboard. Highlight the command you want to modify, press the Set Shortcut Key button, then press the button on your keyboard to map the command to it. Your new key map will automatically be saved to the MSurvey.ini file.

Disable Shortcut Key

Use this to disable individual shortcuts.

Reset All

This resets all the shortcuts to the factory defaults and all customized settings will be lost.

Disable All Shortcuts

This is a toggle that controls if the shortcut keys are disabled or enabled.

Default Shortcut Keys

Function

Measure Point

(Auto Store)

Temporary Observation

Distance offset

Horizontal Angle Offset

Resection

Set Target Heights

Occupy Point

Shortcut Key

Enter

- 147 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Check Backsight

Check Point

Stake Points

Inverse

Calculator

AutoMap Library

Figure List L

Toggle GNSS Coordinates G

Store Points W

Last Saved Point

Disabled

Point Database

Add Comment

Raw File Viewer

Menu Home

Map Data Layers

SIP Enable/Disable

EDM Mode 1

EDM Mode 2

EDM Mode 3

EDM Mode 4

EDM Mode 5

EDM Mode 6

EDM Mode 7

EDM Mode 8

Prism Search

Prism Track

Prism ATR

Laser Pointer

Guide Lights

Robot Joystick

Backspace

Disabled

Language Selection

Main Menu | Settings | Language Selection

- 148 -

Main Menu

This screen will allow the user to specify what language is to be used at first launching of the program. After the first run and selection, it will default to that language automatically. Note: The Language Selection screen appears after installation is completed when the program is first launched or the user can go into the Settings menu and choose Language Selection to switch to a different one is desired.

Layout also allows the user to import in a Language Resource file (res*.dll) by scrolling down to the bottom of the list and selecting the button "Select a Language Resource File"

AutoMap Library

Please see the

AutoMap Library

topic for details.

Project Information

Main Menu | Settings | Project Information

- 149 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Use this option to record job information about your Project.

Tap OK to save your information to the raw file, or Cancel to exit without saving your changes. Each entry field can accept up to 64 characters.

About Layout

Main Menu | Settings | About

Use this to display information about the Layout version you have installed or view what modules you have registered.

- 150 -

Main Menu

You will also see your Device ID and a series of fields where you can input the Key Code you received from MicroSurvey.

You will see an area that will show you the status of your license, including any modules that you currently have licensed. If you want to use Layout in demo mode, press the Run Demo Mode button.

Please refer to the

Registration & Demo Mode

topic for further information.

- 151 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Measure Modes (Total Station)

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes

These are commands built into Layout that will help you measure and map your points. The desired method must be selected before you begin a measurement.

For a faster way to get to this screen, you can also press the Measure Mode button which is located on the

instrument toolbar .

Note: Several of these Measure Modes will not be available until you have completed a setup.

Setup and Check

Setup on Point

Use this to define an instrument setup. Please see the

Backsight Method

topic for more information.

- 152 -

Main Menu

Resection

This will start the multiple point resection routine to allow you to determine your current instrument position by measuring to known points. Please see the

Resection

topic for more information.

Setup from Offsets

This will start the reference line routine to complete a setup from offsets. Please see the

Setup from

Offsets

topic for more information.

Set Height from Benchmark

Use this to check your current setup elevation, or compute a new one based on a known elevation.

Please see the topic for more information.

Check Backsight

Use this to compare your backsight to your previously measured values. Please see the

Check Backsight

topic for more information.

Check Point

Use this to display a check measurement to an existing point in your Project. Please see the

Check

Point

topic for more information.

Measure Only (No Store)

This will allow you to take a measurement without storing it. Please see the

Measure Only

topic for more information.

Measure and Store

This mode allows you to measure a point. After the measurement, it will allow you to review your measurement data and allow you to make changes to the point ID and description before it is stored.

Please see the

Measure and Store

topic for more information.

Measure and Auto-Store

This mode allows you to measure a point using the next available point id, and the description and line toggles specified on the main map screen. Using this is a very fast method for recording your measurements. Please see the

Measure and Auto-Store

topic for more information.

Layout

Please see the

Layout Menu

topic for more information.

Offsets

Distance Offset

This will start the distance offset routine. Please see the

topic for more information.

- 153 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Horizontal Angle Offset

This will start the angle offset routine. Please see the

Horizontal Angle Offset

topic for more information.

Vertical Angle Offset

This will allow you to compute the height of an object. Please see the

Vertical Angle Offset

topic for more information.

Line - Distance Offset

This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline, then manually enter measured distances.

These distances will be used to compute a new point based on the baseline. Please see the

Line -

Line - Angle Intersection

topic for more information.

Intersections

Two Line Intersection

This allows you to measure two baselines and Layout will compute the intersection point. Please see the

Two Line Intersection

topic for more information.

Line - Angle Intersection

This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline, measure an angle, and Layout will compute the intersection point. Please see the

topic for more information.

Line - Perpendicular Point

This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline, then you can select an existing point which will be used to compute a perpendicular intersection. Please see the

Line - Perpendicular Point

topic for more information.

Vertical Projection

This will allow you to compute points on a user defined vertical plane. Please see the

topic for more information.

Manual

Manual Distance

This will record a HA and VA for a shot, but the user can manually enter the distance. Please see the

Manual Distance

topic for more information.

Manual Entry

This will allow you to manually enter in a shot including HA, VA and SD. Please see the

Manual Entry

topic for more information

- 154 -

Main Menu

Setup & Check

Setup on Point

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Setup on Point

Use this command to specify the instrument location and orientation. You will be asked to specify the point your instrument is occupying, an instrument height and if you will be assuming a backsight direction or sighting an existing point. After you have established your setup and backsight, Layout will graphically show you your setup points.

Occupied Point Location

Backsight Point Location

Backsight Method: Direction

With the backsight method set to Direction you will be able to specify the point you want to setup on and specify a backsight direction.

When you go to measure you have the option of recording an angle and distance to the backsight, or the option of just recording an angle. If a distance is measured to the backsight you will have the option of storing a point for the backsight after you press the measure button.

- 155 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Occupy Point

Type in an existing point number, or double tap in this field to open the keypad or to select a point from the map. You will be able to create a new point, pick one from a list, or pick one from your drawing.

Instrument Height

Use this to enter your current instrument height.

Backsight Direction

Use this to specify the direction that will be used by Layout. You can enter an azimuth or a quadrant bearing.

Target Height

Use this to enter your current target height.

Backsight Method: Point

Use this method to specify the points that will be used for the current instrument location and backsight.

Occupy Point

Instrument Height

Use this to enter your current instrument height.

- 156 -

Main Menu

Backsight Point

Backsight Direction & Distance

When you enter in your points Layout will display the inversed horizontal distance and direction between the points you entered.

Target Height

Use this to enter your current target height.

Measuring to the Backsight

Once you've established the backsight method, entered your points and instrument height you can move on to the next step by pressing the Observe Backsight button. You will be taken back to the map view where you will see the graphical position of your setup and backsight points. There are a few things you should take note of:

1. You can always tell what mode you're in by the "mode" text that appears near the top of your drawing. Since you're using the occupy point command you will see "Observe Backsight" near the top of the map area.

2. You have two measure modes available to you on the instrument toolbar. You can measure an angle and distance to the backsight, or measure only your current plate reading without measuring a distance. The two options are described in more detail in the

Backsight Measure Mode

topic.

3. You can cancel the setup by pressing the Measure Mode button and choosing "Cancel Backsight"

4. While in the backsight mode, you can use any of the controls from the information and display toolbar.

5. You can set the height of target by using the HT button on the instrument toolbar.

6. When you're ready to measure to the backsight, press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar.

Backsight Summary

After you have taken your measurement you will see a summary of your shot. From this screen you can choose to accept the shot or re-shoot it. You can also specify if you want the plate reading set to zero or a specific azimuth (if this is supported on your instrument). For more information see the

Backsight Summary

topic.

- 157 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Backsight Measure Modes

Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes Button

When shooting to your backsight you have two options available and they can be accessed from the

instrument toolbar

using the Measure Mode button. The measure modes available are described as follows:

Angle & Distance

Specifying this will require you to measure a distance to the backsight either to a prism or reflectorless. It will also record the current plate reading on the instrument. Both the measure distance and plate reading will be used as the backsight reading in the raw file.

Angle Only

Specifying this will not require you to measure a distance to the backsight. All that will be recorded is the current plate reading on the instrument and this reading will be used as the backsight reading in the raw file.

Cancel Backsight

Use this to cancel your current backsight and occupy point command.

- 158 -

Main Menu

Backsight Summary

After you have taken your measurement you will see a summary of your shot. From this screen you can choose to accept the shot or measure again. You can also specify if you want the plate reading set to zero or a specific azimuth.

Backsight Observations and Errors

If you specified the point backsight method you will see a comparison between what you measured and the theoretical inverse. If you used the measure angle only mode, or defined a backsight direction you will not see a comparison as there isn't enough information available to compute the inverse.

Plate Setting

Finishing the Setup Routine

Accept

Once you've reviewed your backsight information you can complete it by pressing the Accept button.

This will write a record to the raw file and exit the setup routine.

If you specified the direction backsight method you will be prompted to "Store the point observed at the backsight?" Press Yes to store a point for the backsight, or No to complete the setup without creating a new point at the backsight.

- 159 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Observe Again

If you're not satisfied with the results or made a mistake you can re-shoot the backsight by using this button. Doing so will take you back to the main display where you can take another shot on the backsight.

Occupy Point Raw Records

When you accept your occupy point, points will be stored in the database for the setup and backsight if applicable. Also, the following records will be written to the raw file:

SP,PN2,N 918.0848,E 1057.3576,EL0.0000,--

--Orientation

LS,HI5.000,HR5.000

OC,OP1,N 1000.0000,E 1000.0000,EL0.0000,--

BK,OP1,BP2,BS145.00000,BC0.00000

BR,OP1,BP2,AR145.00000,ZE90.00000,SD100.00000

-- Orientation Notes (several comment lines)

Resection

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Resection

Layout has a multi-point resection routine that can be used to compute a point for a setup. It will use a least squares solution to determine the coordinates from the measurements you make to your points.

The goal at the end of a resection is to compute the unknown coordinates of the instrument's current location based on measurements made to other known points in the Project.

l l l l l

As a minimum you need to have two points to resect off.

You can shoot the resection point in the direct or reverse face.

You can take multiple shots to the same resection point.

There is no limit to the amount of points you can resect off.

When you store your resection point, an occupy record will be created for you automatically.

Specify the Resection Reference Points

First Shot

When you start the command you will see the reference point toolbar. Specify your instrument height and select a reference point to measure. After you select a point, you can press the Measure button to record a shot.

- 160 -

Main Menu

Second Shot

To record the second shot, simply select it from the map screen, then press the Measure button. A minimum of two points are needed to compute a position for the instrument, but you can shoot more points if needed to increase the accuracy of the instrument position. The estimated accuracy of the instrument location will be displayed for you on the toolbar. If the estimated error is within your own tolerances, then you can go ahead and store the point by pressing the Store Point button. All successful solutions will be displayed with green text starting with the characters StdDev:.

Press the Close button to cancel out of the routine. You may need to do this if the solution does not converge, and you need to restart the routine.

- 161 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Three or More Shots

If you have more points to reference to you can continue measuring them using the same process as you did when you shot the second point. As you record more points you should notice that the standard deviations for the northing and easting will begin to get smaller.

Standard Deviation

This is the computed precision for the overall geometry of the resection. Small errors indicate that the measured data "fits" very well with the geometry defined by the known points.

Large errors can indicate that bad measurements were recorded, either due to careless measurement practices such as not holding the prism pole straight or not carefully sighting the prism. Large errors can also happen if the geometry defined by the known points, is not "in the same place" as it was when the points were previously measured.

Please note that while the Standard Deviation relates to the quality of your resection, it is possible to have a low StdDev yet still have a high positional error. As such, it is important that you also look at the angle and distance errors shown in the Information screen when considering the overall accuracy of your resection.

Information (Horizontal and Vertical Filters)

You can enter this screen by pressing the Information button on the top right corner of the reference point toolbar. When you do, you will see a detailed summary of the measurements.

- 162 -

Main Menu

You can determine how each shot to the reference points should be used to compute the resection point. By default each observation you make will be used to compute both the horizontal and vertical position of the resection solution, but you can override this by setting the Use H and Use V options for each measurement.

Use H

a a r r

Use V Result

This shot will be used to compute both the horizontal and vertical position.

This shot will be used to compute only the horizontal position.

This shot will be used to compute only the vertical position.

The shot will be ignored in the computation.

You can also select which observation is to be your backsight point.

HA Error

The horizontal angle error is computed as follows. Using the computed resection point and the measured horizontal angle, a theoretical direction is computed to the reference point. This direction is then compared to the direction measured (plate reading) and the difference is noted in the HA Err column.

HD Error

The horizontal distance error is computed as follows. An inverse is made between the resection point and the reference point. This inversed distance is then compared to the measured distance and the difference is noted in the HD Err column.

- 163 -

MicroSurvey Layout

VD Error

The vertical distance error is computed as follows. Using the resection elevation, and the observation to the reference point, a new elevation is computed for the reference point. This computed elevation is then compared to the reference point's original elevation and the difference is noted in the VD column.

Resection Modes

At any time during the collection of your observations you can choose to shoot an Angle & Distance or Angles Only measurement. You can control this by pressing the Measure Modes button on the

instrument toolbar

after you have started your resection.

Store the Resection Point

When you're satisfied with the resection point you can store its new position by pressing the Store

Pnt button. This will then display the store / edit screen.

Finally you will see the

backsight results

screen.

The backsight point that will be stored will be based on which point you selected in the Information screen shown above, which by default is the first reference point you observed. You do not need to take another measurement to the backsight as it has the original measurement you made. At this point you can do the following: l l

Confirm the instrument and target heights.

Decide if you would like to sight it again and take another measurement.

- 164 -

Main Menu

Raw File Record

After you store the point, several records will be written to the raw file.

--Resection

SP,PN5000,N 1009.1534,E 1000.0000,EL100.3244,--

SP,PN6034,N 1006.1995,E 1002.8319,EL99.7321,--FS

SP,PN6035,N 1001.4706,E 1004.8775,EL99.7361,--FS

RS,PN5000,CR359.59590,ZE87.49010,SD9.1600

RS,PN6034,CR24.33000,ZE92.03450,SD6.8280

RS,PN6035,CR73.13080,ZE92.43050,SD5.1010

SP,PN6036,N 999.9998,E 999.9998,EL100.0011,--

OC,OP6036,N 999.9998,E 999.9998,EL100.0011,--

SP,PN5000,N 1009.1534,E 1000.0000,EL100.3244,--

BK,OP6036,BP5000,BS0.00039,BC0.00000

--Occupy Check

-- Observed Values: HA 0°00'00.0" VA 87°49'22.0" SD 9.160m HD 9.153m

-- Distance Calculated: 9.154m

-- Distance Error: -0.000m

-- BS Elevation: 100.324m

-- BS Elevation Error: 0.001m

Setup from Offsets

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Setup from Offsets

The routine is designed to help you get setup and running as quickly as possible. It is very common for surveyors to setup a job site for a contractor such that two points have been located along the projection of a wall. The offsets from these points to the wall corners are usually marked on the stake, or given to the contractor. Using the two known points, the reference line routine will allow you to shoot the points with a total station after which Layout will automatically compute the building corners, and instrument location.

You can then use these points for layout, or other tasks such as entering a plan, or inserting a template. In our example we are going to assume that the points A and B have been located by a surveyor on the job site for us. After measuring points A and B, Layout will compute points A, A1, B, B2 and C for us.

- 165 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Start Command and Enter Known Information

When you start the command you will see the reference line screen. On this screen we start entering the known information, such as the wall length and direction, instrument height and offsets from the known points.

- 166 -

Main Menu

Observe Stake

After you enter the known information, it is time to measure the stake position with your total station.

Press the Observe Stake button to measure the position of the stakes. After you measure the positions, the error in the last offset will be displayed to you on the reference line screen.

Map View

You can preview your solution prior to storing the points. This is a good way of visually confirming the solution before points are added to your project.

- 167 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Complete Setup

When you are satisfied with the results you can complete the setup by selecting the Complete Setup button. When you do this several assumptions are made for you and are described as follows: l l l l l

The first point you measure to will be assigned a coordinate of 5000.0, 5000.0 and an elevation of 100.0. This point becomes the start of the reference line.

The second point you shoot is used to compute a position for the instrument in relation to the baseline. Now that two points have been measured, the measured distance is compared to the theoretical distance. The error is then displayed on the reference line screen.

Using the direction and distances specified for the wall length and offsets, points are computed for the building corners.

The last point on the reference line which is the second measured point will be computed using the measured distance, not the theoretical distance.

The first point you shoot will become the backsight for the setup.

- 168 -

Main Menu

Set Height from Benchmark

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Set Height from Benchmark

Use this to check your current setup elevation or use it to establish an elevation for your setup. When you start the command you will be taken to the main interface and you will note that the Measure

Mode will be set to Benchmark. If you need to cancel the operation you can do it by pressing the

Measure Mode button and choose the Cancel Benchmark button.

When you're ready to record the shot press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar. You will then see the benchmark shot screen.

- 169 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Calculating an Elevation

Benchmark Method: Elevation

Use this option if you want to manually enter the know elevation for the point you're basing your shot on. The elevation you enter will be used to calculate the elevation of the current setup. The difference in the current and calculated elevations will be displayed towards the bottom of the screen. You can enter in your know elevation in the BM Elevation field.

Benchmark Method: Point

Use this option if you want to base the calculated elevation on an existing point in your project. The elevation of the point you choose will be used to calculate the elevation of the current setup. The difference in the current and calculated elevations will be displayed towards the bottom of the screen.

You can choose your point by using the point chooser button.

This is where you would enter your height of instrument. Note this value will be used to compute the new instrument elevation.

This is where you would enter your height of target. Note this value will be used to compute the new instrument elevation.

- 170 -

Main Menu

Set Elevation

Pressing this button will update your current setup elevation with the one calculated by the Benchmark Shot routine. You will be asked to confirm that you want to update the elevation. Two records will be written to the raw file, a remote elevation (RE) and a store point (SP) record.

RE,OP1,FE0.000,ZE90.00000,SD10.0000,--Remote elev

SP,PN1,N 5001.0000,E 4978.0000,EL0.0240,--

Cancel

This will exit the routine and not save any changes.

Check Backsight

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Check Backsight

Use this to check your backsight. Layout will compare your newly measured value to the one that was stored for your current setup. You will be able to review difference and optionally update your current setup with the new shot to the backsight.

When you start the command you will be taken back to the map screen and the Measure Mode will be set to Check BS. You have two measure modes available when taking a check shot to your backsight. Please see the

Backsight Measure Mode

topic for more information.

Check Backsight Summary

When you're ready to record the shot press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar. You will be presented with a screen that compares your measured values to the ones that were stored for the current backsight.

- 171 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Update Backsight

Pressing this will create a record in the raw file updating your setup and backsight record with the shot information from your check shot. Several notes will also be written to the raw file summarizing your shot. When you choose to update the backsight, a new OC and BK record is saved as well as the shot information. You will also see the word (Updated) which indicates that the user selected the

Update button.

OC,OP5,N 763.8748,E 1000.0000,EL0.0000,--

SP,PN1,N 1000.0000,E 1000.0000,EL100.0000,--start

BK,OP5,BP1,BS0.00000,BC0.00000

LS,HI0.000,HR5.000

--Backsight Check (Updated)

-- Observed Values: HA 0°00'00.0" VA 90°00'00.0" SD 163.12'

-- Backsight Setup: 0°00'00"

-- Backsight Measured: 0°00'00"

-- Backsight Error: 0°00'00"

-- Distance Calculated: 236.13'

-- Distance Measured: 163.12'

-- Distance Error: 73.01'

Pressing this will exit the function and write several notes to the raw file summarizing your check shot.

--Backsight Check (Not Updated)

-- Observed Values: HA 0°00'00.0" VA 90°00'00.0" SD 236.10'

-- Backsight Setup: 0°00'00"

- 172 -

Main Menu

-- Backsight Measured: 0°00'00"

-- Backsight Error: 0°00'00"

-- Distance Calculated: 236.13'

-- Distance Measured: 236.10'

-- Distance Error: 0.03'

Check Point

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Check Point

Use this to measure a check shot to an existing point. When you start the command you will see the point chooser appear where you can create a new point or pick an existing one from a list or from the screen. After you choose your point you will be ready to measure. You will note the Measure Mode will be set to Check Pnt and if you need to cancel the operation you can do it by pressing the Measure Mode button and choose to cancel it.

Check Point Summary

The deltas that are displayed are computed by subtracting the shot coordinates from the known coordinates. In other works if you add the deltas to the shot point coordinates you will end up at the known point.

- 173 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Store Point

Pressing this will exit the function and write several notes to the raw file summarizing your check shot, and allow you to store the shot using the

screen.

--Check Point

-- Check Point ID: 110

-- Check Point dNorthing: -4.59'

-- Check Point dEasting: -1.82'

-- Check Point dElevation: -4.96'

-- Check Point dHorizontal: 4.94'

-- Observed Values: HA 45°00'00.0" VA 90°00'00.0" SD 23.00' HR 5.00'

-- Observed Point Northing: 5016.26'

-- Observed Point Easting: 5016.26'

-- Observed Point Elevation: 95.00'

Close

This will exit the check shot function and not write anything to the raw file or storing a new point.

Measure Only (No Store)

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Measure Only (No Store)

The temporary mode will allow you to take a measurement with your instrument without storing a point or recording anything to the raw file. It also doesn't require you to have established a setup. It is the same as pressing the measure button on the instrument where all it does is report back to you the

HA, ZA, SD, HD and VD.

When in this mode you will see the word Temp on the Measure Mode button.

No Setup Established

If you haven't established a setup and you use the temp mode, when you press the measure button you will see the results of your measurement.

Setup Established

If you have an instrument setup established when you use the temp mode and press the measure button you will see the measurement information as well as calculated coordinates in the observation toolbar. The coordinates will be based on the current setup and the reading from the temporary shot.

Note:

When measuring in temp mode, nothing will be recorded in the RAW file.

- 174 -

Main Menu

Measure and Store

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Measure and Store

If you like reviewing your shots prior to being stored in the database and raw file, then this is the mode you should use. When you press the measure button on the instrument toolbar, after the shot is measured you will see the store point screen prior to storing the point.

When you set this mode you will see the word Measure and Store on the Measure Modes button.

When you complete the measurement using the measure button you will see the

screen.

You can also confirm or change the Target Height used for this shot.

SS,OP350,FP3,AR0.00000,ZE94.50090,SD13.2700,--<No Desc>

Store Pnt

Press this to store the point in the coordinate database and update the raw file.

Cancel

Press this to cancel the shot and not store anything.

Note: For more information on the other buttons found on this screen please read the

Store / Edit

Points

topic.

Measure and Auto-Store

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Measure and Auto-Store

Use this when you have production in mind and you don't need to review your shots before they're recorded in the database and raw file. The Measure Mode allows you to press the measure button and it will store the point in the database and plot it in the drawing without asking you for any further information.

When in this mode you will see the words Measure (Auto) on the Measure Mode button.

It will use the following settings from the main interface when storing the point:

Next Point Number ID

The current point ID on the topo toolbar will be assigned to the point.

Description

The current description on the topo toolbar will be assigned to the point.

Height of Target

The current HT on the instrument toolbar will be used to compute the elevation of the point.

- 175 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Note:

When measuring in the Auto Store mode, a SS record will be recorded in the raw file.

Layout

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Layout

See the

topic for more information.

Offsets

Distance Offset

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Offsets | Distance Offset

Layout allows you to do a distance offset to specify an offset forward or backward along the line of sight, left or right, and vertically up or down.

When you choose distance offset command and take a measurement, you will see the following screen:

- 176 -

Main Menu

From this screen you can specify if the offsets are with respect to the instrument or prism.

l l l l

Offset buttons act as toggles, which allow you to easily define the direction the offset should be applied.

A negative offset will automatically be converted to a positive value.

The elevation of the point will be computed from your shot. This elevation will remain unchanged unless you specify a vertical offset.

The distance is assumed to be horizontal.

Forward / Back Offset

Enter the offset distance from the shot position to the new position.

Right / Left Offset

Enter the perpendicular offset distance from the shot position to the new position.

Up / Down Offset

Enter the vertical offset distance from the shot position to the new position.

Store Point

After you have entered your offsets you can press the Store Point button to save the point

Raw Record

A sideshot (SS) record will be computed to represent the shot. The new SS record will use the original observation plus any offsets defined in the distance offset screen.

OF,AR55.00000,ZE90.00000,SD12.0000

OF,HD1.5000,--Horizontal Distance Offset

OF,LR1.0000,--Left / Right Offset

OF,VD0.0000,--Elevation Offset

SS,OP1,FP6028,AR59.14110,ZE90.00000,SD13.5370,--

Note: Offsets that are to the left, back or down will be stored in the raw file with a negative value.

- 177 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Horizontal Angle Offset

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Mode | Offsets | Horizontal Angle Offset

Layout includes a flexible angle offset routine. It allows you to shoot the angle and distance to a point that cannot be occupied by the rod. An example of where you would use this is if you wanted to record the center of a large object, such as a tree.

When you choose the Horizontal Angle Offset Measure Mode you will see the following screen.

Two observations are required: one to record the angle to the point of interest, and a second to measure a distance perpendicular to the point.

On this screen you determine what order you will make these two measurements. All you need to do is press either the Observe Angle or Observe Distance button.

Note: You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the

Note: The Quick Measure Modes option in the

Options screen

will affect what happens when you press the Observe buttons when you are using the offset routines. If Quick Measure Modes is on, a measurement will automatically be taken. If it is off, the Observe button doesn't actually trigger your total station to take a measurement; it simply takes you to the map screen where you can press the measure button once you are ready to take the measurement.

- 178 -

Main Menu

Angle (Center)

This will record the total station's horizontal angle. When measuring the angle, you should point the total station towards the center of the new point that will be created. This would be measurement "A" in the diagram shown above.

Note: You do not need to sight a prism to record the angle, simply sight the new point and press the

Observe Angle button.

Distance

This will record a distance, measured to a prism which is located at the side of the object. You should try to locate the prism so that it is perpendicular to the center of the object and the line-of-sight from the total station. This is measurement "B" in the diagram shown above.

Note: The target height is important on this shot, because the new point will have the same elevation.

Storing the Shot

After you record your measurements you can store the new point by pressing the Store Point button.

- 179 -

MicroSurvey Layout

After you store the point, you can continue using the offset command to record additional points, or exit it by pressing the Cancel button.

Raw File Record

In the raw file the OF records represent the measurements that were made and the SS record is derived using the two OF records

OF,AR94.49380,ZE88.41340,SD27.3163

OF,OL93.25450,--Right Angle Offset

SS,OP1,FP23,AR93.25450,ZE88.41340,SD27.3081,--ROAD

Vertical Angle Offset

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Offsets | Vertical Angle Offset

When you begin the vertical angle offset routine, you will see the following screen.

Two observations are required, one to record the top or bottom of the object, and a second to measure a distance that is directly underneath or above the new point.

On this screen you determine what order you will make these two measurements. All you need to do is press either the Observe Angle or Observe Distance button.

Note: You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the

- 180 -

Main Menu

Note: The Quick Measure Modes option in the

Options screen

will affect what happens when you press the Measure button when you are using the offset routines. If Quick Measure Modes is on, a measurement will automatically be taken. If it is off, the measure button doesn't actually trigger your total station to take a measurement; it simply takes you to the map screen where you can press the measure button once you are ready to take the measurement.

For example if point "B" was the bottom of an underpass, you could measure its height. Usually it is easier if you position the prism so it is directly beneath the point you want to shoot. You would then record a distance observation to this location which will also be the horizontal position for the new point. Then without turning your instrument, you could rotate the scope vertically so it is sighted on the bottom of the overpass. You could then record this observation which will be used to compute the elevation for the new point.

Once you've recorded these two measurements, you will be able to store the new position.

Storing the Shot

After you make your measurements, you will be able to store the new point. Press the Store Point button to store the point.

Raw File Record

In the raw file the OF records represent the measurements that were made. The SS record is the record that was used to compute the coordinate point for the angle offset and will be a compilation of your two shots.

OF,AR52.53170,ZE91.12240,SD9.5616

OF,ZE91.12240,--Vert Angle Offset

SS,OP1,FP2,AR52.53170,ZE91.12240,SD9.5616,--<No Desc>

Line - Distance Offset

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Offsets | Line - Distance Offset

- 181 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The line distance offset command is used to define two points that will be used to establish a reference line. Once the reference line is established you can then specify offsets along the reference line to the new point.

This is a very powerful offsetting tool that can be used in a lot of different situations.

When you define your reference line, there are three types of offset that can be applied.

You can define a horizontal offset, a perpendicular offset and a vertical (elevation) offset. Each offset button is a toggle that allows you to toggle how the offset is to be applied in relation to the reference line.

When you define the offset direction, you can then enter in the value that you want to offset by.

If the horizontal offset remains set to zero, perpendicular or elevation offset will be applied in relation to point one on the reference line.

Offsets

Horizontal Offset

The horizontal offset can either be left or right of the first point on the reference line. From the total station's perspective, if the new point is to the right of point 1, then you would use the Horz Offset Right of Pnt 1. If it is to the left, then logically, it would be a left offset so you would use the Horz Offset Left of Pnt 1 setting.

- 182 -

Main Menu

Perpendicular Offset

The perpendicular offset is a horizontal distance applied perpendicular to the reference line. From the total station's perspective, when moving perpendicular from the reference line, if the new point ends up being closer to the total station, then you would set the perpendicular offset to Perp Offset

Towards Inst. Alternatively, if the new point ends up being farther from the total station, then you would use the Perp Offset Away From Inst.

Elevation Offset

This is the vertical offset from the reference line to the new point. If the new point is above the reference line, then you would set this to Elev Offset Up. If the new point is below the reference line you would set it to Elev Offset Down.

Measure Points

When you start line angle offset command, you will see an empty list.

Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure button to begin the measuring process.

If you need to redo a measurement, simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button.

Notes:

1. The northing and easting values for the new point will be computed using the horizontal and perpendicular offsets defined by the user. These horizontal offset is referenced to point 1 on the reference line. The perpendicular offset is a perpendicular offset from the reference line.

2. The z value for the new point will be computed using the projected elevation along the reference line, plus or minus any elevation offsets defined by the user.

- 183 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Note: You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the

Store the Point

Once you've made your measurements that will be used to compute the intersection, you can press the Store Point button. This will store a point in the map screen, store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file.

Raw File

Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file.

--Line - Distance Offset

--HI0.000,HR0.000,AR357.09120,ZE81.12250,SD22.4114,--Pnt 1 of Line

--HI0.000,HR0.000,AR353.50430,ZE80.46590,SD21.3255,--Pnt 2 of Line

--Horizontal Offset: 2.000

--Perpendicular Offset: 0.000

--Elevation Offset: 0.000

SP,PN1018,N 123.5558,E 100.2931,EL103.4035,--EV2

Example

The top corner in a closet needs to be located, but it isn't visible from the total station.

So the user lays a hand tape on the floor, with the start of the tape located at the bottom corner of the closet, directly below the point that needs to be recorded. The direction of the tape is then laid out such that two measurements can be made on the tape.

- 184 -

Main Menu

Essentially, the tape now becomes the reference line. Two shots are taken, one at the 2 foot mark, and the other at the 5 foot mark.

After you take your two measurements, all you need to define is the offset distances. In this example, the corner is two feet to the right of the first measurement (point 1), and 8' up from the floor. After you define the offset directions and offset amounts, you can press the Store Pnt button to store the new point.

- 185 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Intersections

Two Line Intersection

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Intersections | Two Line Intersection

The two line intersection command is used to locate the corner of an object, whose corner cannot be directly measured. Two intersecting lines will be defined by four measurements, two shots on each line. The intersection of these two lines will define the corner of the object. This routine is intended to be used with a reflectorless total station.

Measure Points

When you start the two line intersection command, you will see an empty list. Each row represents a measurement to a point on one of the two lines needed to compute the intersection.

Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure button to begin the measuring process.

If you need to redo a measurement, simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button.

Notes:

1. You can shoot the points in any order you like, Layout will determine what direction to go in to compute an intersection

2. The values for the new point will be computed using the intersection of the two lines.

3. The two lines you define will rarely intersect at exactly the same point. The elevation of where the lines intersect will be averaged, and used as the z value for the new point.

- 186 -

Main Menu

Note: You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the

Store the Point

Once you've made measurements to the four points that will define the two intersection lines, you can press the Store Point button. This will store a point in the map screen, store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file.

Raw File

Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file.

--Two Line Intersection

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR280.55220,ZE81.15170,SD6.8350,--Pnt 1 of Line 1

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR276.59380,ZE81.05590,SD6.4400,--Pnt 2 of Line 1

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR287.18580,ZE81.13350,SD6.7960,--Pnt 1 of Line 2

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR296.06280,ZE80.14520,SD6.0940,--Pnt 2 of Line 2

SP,PN3,N -0.0039,E -0.0060,EL0.5325,--

Line - Angle Intersection

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Intersections | Line - Angle Intersection

The Line-Angle Intersection command is used to define two points that will be used to establish a reference line then measure an angle that intersects this reference line, and Layout will automatically compute the coordinate at the intersecting point.

- 187 -

MicroSurvey Layout

An example of where you might use this is to locate the corner wall of a building. Simply shoot two points on one of the walls, then turn the instrument so it is pointing anywhere along the corner of the building. This command is intended to be used with reflectorless total stations.

Measure Points

When you start the Line-Angle Intersection command, you will see an empty list.

Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure button to begin the measuring process.

If you need to redo a measurement, simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button.

Notes:

1. You can shoot the points in any order you like, Layout will determine what direction to go in to compute an intersection

2. The values for the new point will be computed using the intersection of the line and the angle that was read.

3. The z value for the new point will be computed using the projected elevation along the reference line to the point where an intersection is computed.

- 188 -

Main Menu

Note: You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the

Store the Point

Raw File

Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file.

--Line - Angle Offset

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR280.55530,ZE81.12550,SD6.8330,--Pnt 1 of Line

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR277.37420,ZE80.47010,SD6.5020,--Pnt 2 of Line

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR283.46460,ZE86.15500,--Angle Offset

SP,PN4,N -0.0050,E 0.0051,EL0.5761,--

Line - Perpendicular Point

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Intersections | Line - Perpendicular Point

This offset command is used to define two points that will be used to establish a reference line. Once the reference line is established, you can specify a point that will be used to compute a perpendicular intersection from the point to the reference line. The point can either be shot or you can select an existing point from your scene database or map.

- 189 -

MicroSurvey Layout

An example of where you could use this is to pick up the corner of a building, whose corner cannot be scene from the total station. You could take two shots on one wall to define the reference line, and then take another shot on the intersecting wall. A perpendicular intersection will be computed, which in this case would be the corner of the building.

Measure Points

When you start the command, you will see an empty list.

Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure button to begin the measuring process.

If you need to redo a measurement, simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button.

Notes:

1. The values for the new point will be computed by computing a perpendicular intersection between the reference line and a point defined by the user.

2. The z value for the new point will be computed using the projected elevation along the reference line to the point where a perpendicular intersection occurs.

- 190 -

Main Menu

Note: You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the

Averaged Geodetic Position

Select Perpendicular Point

You can define the perpendicular point one of two ways. The first is to simply take a measurement that will define the perpendicular point. The shot is only used to make an intersection, a point isn't stored at the measurement location.

The other method is to choose an existing point that exists in your scene. Press the Select Perpendicular Pnt button to select a point.

Store the Point

Once you’ve made your measurements and defined a perpendicular point that will be used to compute the intersection, you can press the Store Point button. This will store a point in the map screen, store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file.

Raw File

Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file. In the following example, if you shot the perpendicular point you will see a third shot that records the measurement.

--Line - Perpendicular Point

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR353.49130,ZE80.47360,SD21.3386,--Pnt 1 of Line

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR357.07260,ZE81.13020,SD22.4245,--Pnt 2 of Line

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR12.10230,ZE83.00580,SD19.8819,--Perpendicular Pnt

SP,PN6,N 123.3028,E 100.0209,EL104.7737,--RM

- 191 -

MicroSurvey Layout

If the perpendicular point exists in your scene and you selected it using the point chooser, then you will see a store point recorded as a note. The last store point is the new point that was computed.

--Line - Perpendicular Point

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR353.49520,ZE80.46560,SD21.3419,--Pnt 1 of Line

--HI1.340,HR0.000,AR357.07330,ZE81.12210,SD22.4147,--Pnt 2 of Line

--SP,PN7,N 119.2906,E 104.1611,EL103.7580,--Perpendicular Pnt

SP,PN8,N 123.3107,E 100.0504,EL104.7751,--SCR

Trilateration

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Intersections | Trilateration

This routine allows you to trilaterate the position of new points by observing their distances from two known positions. The two known points will make up a baseline, from which a distance-distance intersection will be calculated to determine the position of each new point.

The primary use of this routine is for GNSS users so they can locate inaccessible points. They can locate two points with GNSS, and then use the Trilateration routine to locate the inaccessible points.

This routine can accept distances measured with the Leica Disto.

Static Points (Baseline)

Select your two baseline points, from which you will be observing the distances to the new points.

- 192 -

Main Menu

Add Point

Use this to add a new unknown point to solve for. When you press this, you will be prompted for the new point number and description, and whether it is on the left or right side of the baseline.

Save Point

This saves the selected New Point into your Project database.

Switch Side

This toggles the selected New Point to the Left or Right side of the baseline.

Map View

This takes you to a map view showing your baseline, the distance measured from each point, and the calculated position of the new point.

- 193 -

MicroSurvey Layout

If desired, you can press the World View button on the

Display toolbar

to hide unnecessary data.

Measure from Point 1

Press this to record the distance from Point 1 of your baseline to the selected New Point.

Measure from Point 2

Press this to record the distance from Point 2 of your baseline to the selected New Point.

Vertical Plane Projection

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Intersections | Vertical Plane Projection

This function is for locating multiple points on a vertical place defined by two previously measured points. The program will calculate the distance for each shot taken to an un-measurable position so that coordinates can be generated for the shot.

An example of how you could use this would be to shoot two corners of a wall to define a vertical plane. Then you could sight four corners for window on the second floor and Layout will use the HA and VA values and compute the intersection with the vertical plane. Once the intersection is computed, the point will be stored.

Function

When the command is started you will see a screen that will allow you to specify the points that will form the baseline for the vertical plane.

- 194 -

Main Menu

Note: You need to measure and store the points that will be used to define the vertical mapping plane, prior to starting the Vertical Projection command.

When ready to continue, press the OK button.

You will now be in the Vertical projection mode which will be indicated by the Measure Mode button on the instrument toolbar. To begin calculating points on the vertical plane, you need to point the total station at the new point you want to create. To complete the shot, press the measure button, and then store the point.

Note: You do not need to use a prism when measuring points on the vertical plane. Simply point the instrument at the point you want to create.

Since vertical planes represent 3D data, it is sometimes necessary to rotate your perspective of the

Project to help you see the point you're computing on the vertical plane.

Press the 3D View button on the

display toolbar

which will open the 3D toolbar. If you press the

Planar View button, your scene will be rotated so it matches your perspective. For example, a vertical plane was defined by points 27 and 28. When the planar view option is used, you can see your work in a 3D perspective. You can now see the 4 measurements (points 500 – 503) that were made to record the position of a window on the vertical plane.

Plan View 3D Perspective

You can also hide objects that are behind the vertical plane from viewing by pressing the Vert Grid button. In the example below, you will see that after this is turned on, some of the line work is hidden from view.

- 195 -

MicroSurvey Layout

To exit this routine, simply switch to a different Measure Mode.

Raw File

Each point that is computed on the vertical plane will also have a computed sideshot stored in the raw file.

--VS,PA27,PB28

SS,OP1,FP503,AR142.24510,ZE78.37170,SD17.8888,--VERTICAL

For each shot you record you will see a note before the shot in the raw file indicating which points were used to define the vertical plane.

Special Notes

Vertical projection measurements will automatically be recognized by your MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop software. Please refer to the MicroSurvey Point Prep help file for more information regarding importing vertical projections.

Manual

Manual Entry

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Manual | Manual Entry

When you set the Measure Mode to manual entry on the instrument toolbar you will be required to manually input your measurements. When you press the measure button you will see the following screen:

- 196 -

Main Menu

Press OK to Store the point.

A normal sideshot record will be written to the raw file just as if you shot it with a total station.

Tip:

You can also use the Manual Entry mode for repeating your last shot. If you have previously taken a measurement, then the angle and distance values on this screen will default to those of your previous shot.

Manual Distance

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Manual | Manual Distance

Use this mode to shoot an observation where only the horizontal and zenith angles will be measured with the instrument. You will be then prompted to enter the distance.

When you set the Measure Mode to manual distance and press the measure button the horizontal and vertical angles will be read from your total station. Since this is only measuring angles, you do not need to have a prism to shoot to.

Following this you will see a screen allowing you to enter a horizontal distance.

- 197 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Press OK to save the point. You will now see the measurement info screen.

A regular sideshot record will be created in the raw file.

- 198 -

Main Menu

Measure Modes (GNSS Reference)

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes

When you connect to a reference receiver you need to program a position into the receiver so accurate positions can be transmitted to the rover.

You can access the different Measure Modes to program your receiver with a position by selecting the Measure Modes button in the main menu, or the Measure Modes button on the GNSS instrument toolbar.

Main Menu - Measure Modes Instrument Toolbar

Selecting the Measure Modes button will display these options:

Known Geodetic Position

Local Transformation to Point

- 199 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Overview

There are three different modes available for programming a position into your reference receiver.

When you're ready to program your base receiver with a position you need to select the reference position mode then to start the process press the Measure button on the

GNSS toolbar . Please review

the following sections for a detailed explanation of how each mode is used.

Known Geodetic Position

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Known Geodetic Position

Use this when you know the geodetic position of the point the base is setup on. You have two options, you can program it with a known Geodetic or known Cartesian Coordinate.

- 200 -

Main Menu

Geodetic Coordinates

Enter the know Latitude, Longitude and Ellipsoidal Height for your base setup. The coordinates you enter here will be programmed into the receiver.

Cartesian Coordinates

Cartesian coordinates can be SPCS, UTM coordinates or any other grid system as long as it matches the horizontal and vertical system you've defined in your GNSS profile. You cannot enter local coordinates as Cartesian coordinates! Doing so will cause a warning message to be displayed indicating that the coordinates you entered do not fall inside the GNSS grid files you have loaded on your data collector.

Select Position from Database

This allows you to choose a point a number of different ways. The point you select must be a grid coordinate such as a SPCS or UTM coordinate.

Averaged Geodetic Position

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Averaged Geodetic Position

Use this to measure and average an Autonomous Geodetic position.

- 201 -

MicroSurvey Layout

It is up to you to determine how many observations or the duration of time you want to wait before accepting the averaged position. At any time you can restart the process by pressing the Reset Aver-

age button.

If you press Set Position, your receiver will be programmed with the new position and you will have the option of storing a point's position in the database.

Local Transformation to Point

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Local Transformation to Point

Use this to compute a one point transformation so your GNSS derived measurements can be referenced into a local system.

- 202 -

Main Menu

When this option is used, Layout starts receiving data and computes an averaged Autonomous position for the base receiver. The current position, how many epochs it has received and the total elapsed time is displayed on the screen.

age button.

You then have to define a local coordinate that you want to localize to. It is assumed that the point exists in your Project. If it doesn't, simply double tap the Point ID field which will open the point toolbar. You can use the new option to create a point or if it exists select it from the map or from the list.

When you press Set Position, Layout will save the averaged location into the point database. It will then compute a one point transformation which is simply a horizontal and vertical shift from the grid coordinate system into your local system, as well as a combined scale factor. You will be presented with the option to apply the combined scale factor at the point

- 203 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Pick Yes if: l

You are calculating a one point transformation and your Project coordinates are ground-level coordinates. Please Note: No rotation will be applied and the Project North direction will be

Grid North as per your Project Coordinate System Settings.

Pick No if: l l

You are calculating a transformation from multiple points and will be adding more points to the calculation. In this case the scale parameters will be determined from the best fit to all the points used for the transformation.

You are calculating a one point tranformation and your Project coordinates are grid coordinates as per your Project Coordinate System Settings.

All future GNSS measurements in the current Project will have your new transformation parameters applied automatically.

- 204 -

Main Menu

Measure Modes (GNSS Rover)

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes

When you connect to a rover receiver you will have a choice of Measure Modes available to you.

You can access the different Measure Modes by selecting the Measure Modes button in the main menu, or the Measure Modes button on the GNSS instrument toolbar.

Main Menu - Measure Modes Instrument Toolbar

Selecting the Measure Modes button will display various options:

Standard Measurement

Offset Measurement

Tilt Offset Measurement

Auto Record Points

Local Transformation Point

tolerance settings , Layout will only begin col-

- 205 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Standard Measurement

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Standard Measurement

When you have connected to your rover and you press the measure button on the

GNSS Toolbar

you will see the GNSS Measurement Screen

The measurement process works like this:

- 206 -

Main Menu

Once the satellites have been filtered out based on your

lecting measurement data if all your tolerances are met. During the measurement process you might see that certain tolerances are not being satisfied, this is normal. Layout will continue monitoring the measurement data and will accept measurements that pass the mask criteria.

Once the tolerances have been met, the position status will change to an Accepted position. Prior to accepting the position, the user can look at the RMS values for the computed position and determine if they wish to accept or reject the measurement. Pressing Cancel will exit the measure function without storing any data. Pressing

Store Position

will accept the position and store it in the database.

You can change your true or measured Antenna Height on the Store Point screen.

Offset Measurement

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Offset Measurement

Layout features a GNSS offset functionality to calculate an offset from the current position based on a direction and distance offsets. The direction may be determined from two observations. This feature is particularly handy when a direct observation is inaccessible or there is too much canopy coverage to get an RTK fixed position.

Function

When this mode is enabled Layout the user will press the observation button to start the routine. After this, the GNSS Offset measurement screen as shown below will appear and is ready for the user to press the "Start Point" button to take the first shot. Once that is done the "Start Point" button will change to "End Point". Press this when you are on the second point and ready to take the second observation.

- 207 -

MicroSurvey Layout

After both Start and End points are observed the Direction field will now be filled with the computed bearing between the two observed points. The next step is to manually enter in the Horizontal and Vertical distances to the new offset point. Fill these fields in and press the "Measure" button to take one more observation that will apply the computed direction, horizontal and vertical distances to the shot and will now populate the Northing, Easting and Elevation fields of the new calculated point in the

GNSS Measurement area. The user can now press the "Store Point" button to store the calculated point into the database.

- 208 -

Main Menu

- 209 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Additional Notes

The user has the option to manually enter in the direction to the offset point if it is already known. A vertical distance is not needed to calculate an offset point, only a Direction and a Horizontal distance are required to complete the routine.

Tilt Offset Measurement

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Tilt Offset Measurement

GNSS receivers usually comes with 2 measurement sensors (Tilt Sensor & Magnetic Sensor) to assist with tilted measurements (See

Electronic Bubble

section for more information)

The Tilt Sensor is more reliable and provides better accuracy compared to the Magnetic Sensor. This routine takes advantage of this, and only uses Tilt Sensor to Trilaterate a position what is difficult to survey without tilted pole measurement.

Two methods are available: l l

Two Pole Tilt Intersection

Three Pole Tilt Intersection

- 210 -

Main Menu

Two Pole Tilt Intersection

Make sure the button of the pole is at the same point

Measure Pole Tilt 1

Tilt the pole in one direction and Click this button to store the first tilt angle (Red Circle)

Measure Pole Tilt 2

Tilt the pole in the other direction and Click this button to store the first tilt angle (Green Circle)

There will be two intersecting points, choose Solution A or Solution B for the desired intersecting point, and click Save Point to Store it

- 211 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Two Pole Tilt Intersection

Make sure the button of the pole is at the same point

Measure Pole Tilt 1

Tilt the pole in one direction and Click this button to store the first tilt angle (Red Circle)

Measure Pole Tilt 2

Tilt the pole in another direction and Click this button to store the first tilt angle (Green Circle)

Measure Pole Tilt 3

Tilt the pole in the last direction and Click this button to store the first tilt angle (BlueCircle)

There will be only one intersecting point, click Save Point to Store it

Auto Record Points

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Mode | Auto Record Points

- 212 -

Main Menu

The Auto Recording settings are used when collecting GNSS data in a "Kinematic" mode. The receiver can automatically log a point every X distance or Y seconds. The user simply selects what option they prefer to use for logging Kinematic data and start the survey. Keep in mind while collecting data at higher velocities that Layout receives position updates from the GNSS at a maximum rate of once per second.

Once configured, Auto-Recording is activated on the

Rover Measure Mode

screen after pressing the

Measure button:

Once activated, Auto-Recording is deactivated by pressing the Measure button again.

Layout

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Layout

See the

GNSS Local Transformation

topic for more information.

Local Transformation Point

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Local Transformation Point

This Measure Mode is designed to quickly add control points to a GNSS Local Transformation, using the Similarity method by matching up control points. The procedure is as follows:

1. Set the Local Transformation Point Measure Mode:

- 213 -

MicroSurvey Layout

2. Measure a control point that you wish to use for your localization. You will have the choice to store the observation as a point in the database:

3. Specify whether the control point will be used for horizontal and/or vertical control, then pick Select

Existing to set the local control point:

4. Optionally confirm the measured values for the GNSS Control Point:

- 214 -

Main Menu

5. Pick OK to accept the control pair.

6. Pick OK on the Transformation Control screen:

7. Repeat Steps 2-6 for any additional control points.

8. Review and apply the transformation, please see the

topic for more details.

- 215 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Check Point

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Check Point

Check Point Summary

Store Point

Pressing this will exit the function and write several notes to the raw file summarizing your check shot, and allow you to store the shot using the

screen.

--Check Point

-- Check Point ID: 110

-- Check Point dNorthing: -4.59'

-- Check Point dEasting: -1.82'

- 216 -

Main Menu

-- Check Point dElevation: -4.96'

-- Check Point dHorizontal: 4.94'

-- Observed Values: HA 45°00'00.0" VA 90°00'00.0" SD 23.00' HR 5.00'

-- Observed Point Northing: 5016.26'

-- Observed Point Easting: 5016.26'

-- Observed Point Elevation: 95.00'

Close

This will exit the check shot function and not write anything to the raw file or storing a new point.

Trilateration

Main Menu or GNSS Toolbar | Measure Modes | Trilateration

This routine can accept distances measured with the Leica Disto.

Static Points (Baseline)

Select your two baseline points, from which you will be observing the distances to the new points.

- 217 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Add Point

Use this to add a new unknown point to solve for. When you press this, you will be prompted for the new point number and description, and whether it is on the left or right side of the baseline.

Save Point

This saves the selected New Point into your project.

Switch Side

This toggles the selected New Point to the Left or Right side of the baseline.

Map View

This takes you to a map view showing your baseline, the distance measured from each point, and the calculated position of the new point.

- 218 -

Main Menu

If desired, you can press the World View button on the

Display toolbar

to hide unnecessary data.

Measure from Point 1

Press this to record the distance from Point 1 of your baseline to the selected New Point.

Measure from Point 2

Press this to record the distance from Point 2 of your baseline to the selected New Point.

- 219 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Measure Modes (Disto/Laser)

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes

These are commands built into Layout that will help you measure and map your points while connected to a supported Disto/Laser device. The desired Measure Mode must be selected before you begin a measurement.

For a faster way to get to this screen, you can also press the Measure Modes button which is located on the

instrument toolbar .

Note: Several of these modes will not be available until you have completed a setup.

Setup and Check

Quick Setup

Use this to perform a quick setup procedure, with the instrument on a point facing a certain direction.

Please see the

Quick Setup

topic for more information.

Setup on Point

Use this to define an instrument setup. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Backsight Method

topic for more information.

- 220 -

Main Menu

Resection

This will start the multiple point resection routine to allow you to determine your current instrument position by measuring to known points. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Resection

topic for more information.

Setup from Baseline

Use this to define an instrument setup from the position and orientation of an arbitrary baseline.

Please see the

Setup from Baseline

topic for more information.

Setup from Offsets

This will start the reference line routine to complete a setup from offsets. Same procedure as with a

Total Station, please see the

Setup from Offsets

topic for more information.

Check Point

Use this to display a check measurement to an existing point in your Project. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

topic for more information.

Measure Only (No Store)

This will allow you to take a measurement without storing it. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Measure Only

topic for more information.

- 221 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Measure and Store

This mode allows you to measure a point. After the measurement, it will allow you to review your measurement data and allow you to make changes to the point ID and description before it is stored.

Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Measure and Store

topic for more information.

Measure and Auto-Store

topic for more information.

Layout

Please see the

Layout Menu

topic for more information.

Offsets

Distance Offset

This will start the distance offset routine. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Line - Angle Intersection

topic for more information.

- 222 -

Main Menu

Horizontal Angle Offset

This will start the angle offset routine. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Horizontal Angle Offset

topic for more information.

Vertical Angle Offset

This will allow you to compute the height of an object. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Vertical Angle Offset

topic for more information.

Line - Distance Offset

This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline, then manually enter measured distances.

These distances will be used to compute a new point based on the baseline. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Line - Distance Offset

topic for more information.

Intersections

Two Line Intersection

This allows you to measure two baselines and Layout will compute the intersection point. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Two Line Intersection

topic for more information.

Line - Angle Intersection

This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline, measure an angle, and Layout will compute the intersection point. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

topic for more information.

- 223 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Line - Perpendicular Point

This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline, then you can select an existing point which will be used to compute a perpendicular intersection. Same procedure as with a Total Station, please see the

Line - Perpendicular Point

topic for more information.

Vertical Plane Projection

This will allow you to compute points on a user defined vertical plane. Same procedure as with a Total

Station, please see the

Apply User Defined Parameters

topic for more information.

Quick Setup

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Quick Setup

This setup procedure requires a Point and a direction to complete the setup.

- 224 -

Main Menu

Point ID

Enter a Point ID to set the Station, or tap in the field to open a menu to pick a point from a list or map, or create a new point.

Instrument Height

Enter the height of the device above ground if you wish to reference it.

Set Direction

Enter the direction that the device is pointing, or pick on one of the four direction buttons to set the direction.

Complete Setup

Pick Complete Setup to finish. The direction will be captured and set as the orientation reference.

Setup from Baseline

Main Menu or Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Setup & Check | Setup from Baseline

When setting up a total station or Disto in a room or outside at a Scene, in certain circumstances it is advantageous to define one of the room's walls as a baseline for the scene. Or outside to select a linear feature like a Sidewalk or curb.

- 225 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Using this method ensures that your room or outside Scene coordinate system is oriented to a baseline plane you are defining for the site. This makes the Scene easier to work in Layout and when imported into your desktop drawing program.

Another benefit to using this feature is that all points mapped with the total station will be referenced to the origin and baseline.

Function

Usually this feature will be used in a new Project, but it could be used in an existing scene if needed.

In this example we will begin by creating a new scene.

- 226 -

Main Menu

In the Occupy Baseline screen you need to specify the orientation of the baseline, your instrument height and the position that you want to use for the origin point.

Baseline Direction

This is the direction that you want the wall ”baseline” to face in your Project. The direction that you use is totally up to you. You should pick a direction that will help you visually confirm that the points you're mapping are correct. If you refer to the image at the beginning of this document, the instrument was setup in the lower right corner of the room. From the instrument operator's perspective, it made sense to use a baseline set to East so the far wall would be horizontal along the X axis in the Project.

If you look at the image of the Tracker at the beginning of this topic, you will see that using this feature makes the room align with your scene's coordinate system.

In the examples below, the same origin coordinates and total station measurement were used. The only thing that was different, was the direction specified for the baseline.

- 227 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Position of Origin

The default coordinates are 0, but any value could be used. The origin will be located and defined by your first measurement.

Usually you will want the bottom corner of the wall to be equal to the z value you define. Assuming you're using a reflectorless instrument, if you can't see the bottom corner directly with the instrument, you can measure up the wall and mark a point a known distance from the floor. Then sight this point with you instrument, but make sure you define the distance you measured as your new target height.

Otherwise, if no target height is specified, the location you measure at the corner will be the origin.

Measure Baseline

When you press this you will be required to measure two shots; one to define the origin and the other to define the location of the instrument in reference to the baseline.

How it Works

Using the origin, and the baseline direction you specified, a ”baseline” is created.

- 228 -

Main Menu

Using the first shot, the instrument position cannot be accurate calculated yet. The instrument isn't referenced to the baseline yet, and hinges around the origin point.

Then using the second shot, the total station location in the room can be accurately computed.

Store Reference (Occupy) Position

After you finish measuring the necessary measurement, you will be taken back to the Occupy

Baseline screen.

- 229 -

MicroSurvey Layout

You will now see that the Occupy Inst screen is enabled. Press this to accept your measurements and Layout will store a new point for the reference point. Also, in the raw file Occupy point records will be recorded along with the measurements made on the wall.

--Occupy Room

--Baseline Direction: East

--N 0.0000,E 0.0000,EL0.0000,--Origin Pnt

--HI1.310,HR1.514,AR25.16100,ZE88.26290,SD7.0790,--Pnt for Origin

--HI1.310,HR1.514,AR63.18170,ZE88.26220,SD5.1750,--Pnt on Baseline

OC,OP1,N -5.1514,E 4.8516,EL0.0115,--RP

BK,OP1,BP0,BS316.42594,BC25.16100

LS,HI1.310,HR1.514

You are now ready to continue mapping your scene.

- 230 -

Main Menu

Calculations

Main Menu | Calculations

The calculation menu contains calculation based functions that can be used to compute points, lines and other data.

Length

Use this to measure the length and direction between points. Please see the

Inverse

topic for more information.

Direction Point

This will open the Traverse / Intersect toolbar. You can enter in directions and distances and perform common intersections such as bearing / bearing, distance/distance and many more. Please see the

Traverse / Intersection

topic for more information.

Down/Out

Use this to calculate a point measured down and out from a line between points. Please see the

Down/Out Offset

topic for more information.

Tape Layout

Use this to manually layout points using a simple measuring tape. Please see the

tape layout

topic for more details.

- 231 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Rotate / Translate / Scale

Use this to compute coordinate shifts based on rotation, translation and scale parameters. Please see the

topic and the

Apply Control Calculated Parameters

topic for more information.

GNSS Local Transformation

Use this to compute and apply a GNSS local transformation also known as a site calibration. Please review the GNSS Local Transformation topic for more details.

Drawing Tool

This starts up the

draw plan

tool.

Curve Calculator

Use this to open a curve calculator. You define the values that you know, enter them, and then the remaining unknowns will be computed. Once you compute these values you have the option of storing the PT and Center points. Please see the

Curve Calculator

topic for more information.

Area Calculator

Use this to compute areas using points or lines in your project. You can also use this to compute predetermined areas. Please see the

Area Calculator

topic for more information.

Triangle Calculator

Use this to compute a triangle solution using known angles or distances. Please refer to the

Triangle

Calculator

topic for more information.

Scientific Calculator

Use this to display the RPN calculator. Please see the

Calculator

topic for more information.

Bolt Pattern

Use this to create and apply point patterns for example for bolt plates or pillars.

Length

Main Menu | Calculations | Length

This command will calculate for you the length between two points. It will display the horizontal / slope distance, direction, vertical distance and slope between the two points. You do not need to have a line drawn between the points to use the length command.

- 232 -

Main Menu

Traverse Length

Function

1. Start the length command and make sure the Traverse Length and Line options are selected.

2. Enter or choose the first point to calculate from, and press your enter key to continue on to the next point.

3. Now you can choose or enter the second point and press your Enter button to compute an answer.

4. The length information will be displayed in the results toolbar.

5. In the COGO history you will see the following information for the two points:

-------------------------------

INVERSE

-------------------------------

PNT 44 to 8 (HD 1352.84' @ NA 323°48'03.1") SD 1353.39' GR -2.85' VD -

38.51' AR 323°48'03.1"

Your first length will calculate a right angle from north to the direction you calculated.

Multiple Lines

After you have specified two points, you can continue calculating from point to point. You should notice that the point id previously in the 2nd point field will move to the 1st point field, and the cursor will remain in the 2nd point field allowing you to quickly enter in your next point.

If you continue calculating from point to point, the angle right will not be referenced to north, but the last leg you calculated. Essentially this is computing a clockwise angle between the current and last legs you calculated.

Perimeter Distance and Area

If you close back to the first point, a perimeter distance and enclosed area will also be computed.

Radial Length

You can compute radial lengths from a point.

- 233 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Function

1. Start the length command and make sure the Radial Length and Line options are selected.

2. Enter or choose the 1st point to calculate from, and press your enter key to continue on to the next point.

3. Now you can choose or enter the 2nd point and press your Enter button to compute an answer.

4. The length information will be displayed in the results toolbar.

5. You can now continue computing radial lengths. The 2nd point field will remain activated allowing you to continue entering point numbers.

Radial Arc

You can compute the curve information for an arc defined by three points, PC (start), Radius Point, and PT (End)

Function

1. Start the length command and make sure the Rad Arc button is turned on.

2. Enter or choose the starting point for the arc in the Start field, and press your enter key to continue on to the next point.

3. Enter or choose the radius point in the Arc field, and press your enter key to continue on to the next point.

4. Enter or choose the end point for the arc in the End field, and press your enter key to compute an answer.

5. The length information will be displayed in the results toolbar.

Three Point Arc

You can compute the curve information for an arc defined by three points along the arc.

- 234 -

Main Menu

Function

1. Start the length command and make sure the 3 Pt Arc button is turned on.

2. Enter or choose the starting point for the arc in the Start field, and press your enter key to continue on to the next point.

3. Enter or choose the point that falls on the arc in the Arc field, and press your enter key to continue on to the next point.

4. Enter or choose the end point for the arc in the End field, and press your enter key to compute an answer.

5. The length information will be displayed in the results toolbar.

Direction Point

Main Menu | Calculations | Direction Point

Layout includes a powerful COGO function that allows you to compute new points. The toolbar allows you to specify the solution type, point numbers, directions and distances. When you enter enough information to compute a solution it will be draw visually on the screen. Pressing the Store Pnt button will store the point that you just solved.

Input

You can type in the point ID, or select a point by tapping on the map screen.

The direction and distance fields support the

direction

and

distance

recall features.

If you are measuring distances with a Leica Disto, just double tap in the distance field and choose the

"Disto Observation" option.

Disto Distances

If you have a Leica Disto, you can send distances back to the distance edit fields. Simply double tap the distance field and select "Disto Observation" which will then set Layout in a "waiting" mode. Take the measurement with the Disto, press the Bluetooth icon on the Disto, and the measured distance will be accepted by Layout.

Calculator

You can open our calculator by double-tapping the Direction or Distance fields then pressing Calculator on the Keypad screen.

Information

You can review the results of your calculation by pressing the "i" information button. For intersections with multiple solutions, the results of both solutions will be displayed.

- 235 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Solution Methods

Method: Traverse

The traverse method allows you to define a direction and distance that you want to traverse. After you solve your point and store it, it will become the new start point.

Method: Direction - Distance

This will compute two solutions based on the values you input. To store the solution, simply press the

Store Pnt button which will ask you what solution to use, in this case either A or B.

Method: Direction - Direction

Use this to compute a new point by computing an intersection using directions. After you enter your known values a solution will be displayed on the screen. To store the solution, simply press the Store

Pnt button.

Method: Distance - Distance

Use this to compute a new point by computing an intersection using distances. This will compute two solutions based on the values you input. To store the solution, simply press the Store Pnt button which will ask you what solution to use, in this case either A or B.

Method: Interior Angle Traverse

Use this to compute a new point by turning an angle from another point. Enter the current (setup) and previous (backsight) points, then the interior angle and the distance. Positive angles will be interpreted as angle right; if you want to turn an angle left, enter the angle as negative. To store the solution, simply press the Store Pnt button. After the point is stored, the points will automatically leapfrog so you can continue traversing by just entering the next interior angle and distance.

Down/Out

Main Menu | Calculations | Down/Out

This routine allows you to calculate and draw points and/or figures, offset from other existing points, figures, or DXF entities in your project. You can calculate points on a line or down and out from a line, or offset complete figures.

Selection Mode

Press the "Select Line" button to go into

Selection Mode . You will also automatically go into Selection

Mode if a line is not yet selected when you start this command.

- 236 -

Main Menu

Selection Mode: Figure/DXF

Pick this mode to select an existing figure or DXF entity by selecting the desired figure from the map screen. You can select any of the following: l l

Figures containing lines and/or arcs (but not curvy splines)

DXF lines, arcs, and/or polylines (but not splines, splined polylines, or fitted polylines)

Selection Mode: Figure Segment

Pick this mode to select an individual line or arc segment from a complex figure, by selecting the desired segment from the map screen. You can select any of the following: l l a line or arc segment from a Figure (but not a curvy segment)

(line or arc segments from a DXF polyline cannot be selected)

Selection Mode: Define Points

Pick this mode to select points in your project to define a line or arc. You can define the following line types:

- 237 -

MicroSurvey Layout l l l l

Straight Line: select a Start Point and End Point

Arc (CW): select a Start of Curve Point, Radial Point, and End of Curve Point

Arc (CCW): select a Start of Curve Point, Radial Point, and End of Curve Point

Arc (3Pnt): select a Start of Curve Point, Point on Curve, and End of Curve Point.

Offset Point Mode

Use this mode to calculate a point measured Down and Out from the selected line.

After selecting a line using any of the above Selection Modes, pick this mode and enter the Down/Out distances and the offset direction (left or right, looking down the line).

The calculated point will be previewed in green in the map screen. Press the Save button to store this point.

Station Point Mode

Use this mode to calculate the Down and Out distances to a selected point, and to calculate a perpendicular intersection point on the selected line.

- 238 -

Main Menu

After selecting a line using any of the above Selection Modes, pick this mode and select the Offset

Point by either typing in its Point ID or by selecting it from the map screen when the Offset Pnt field has focus.

The selected point will be highlighted in red in the map screen, and its Down/Out distances from the selected line will be displayed.

A perpendicular intersection point on the line will be calculated and previewed in green in the map screen. Press the Save button to store this point.

Line Mode

Use this mode to draw a new line or figure, offset from the selected line.

- 239 -

MicroSurvey Layout

After selecting a line using any of the above Selection Modes, pick this mode and enter the distance and direction (left or right looking down the line, or both sides).

The offset line will be calculated and previewed in green in the map screen. Press the Save button to store this line. When a line is saved, points will be automatically stored at the start and end points, arc radial points if applicable, and polyline vertex points if applicable.

Tape Layout

Main Menu | Calculations | Tape Layout

The tape layout tool is used to manually layout points with a simple measuring tape. You must have two points that are common on the job site and in your layout project. From these known points you can then select the points you want to locate on the job site.

When you start the command you will see the tape layout screen. From here you specify the two points that you will be measuring offsets from. Enter the points by typing the number, or double clicking the point field to bring up an options menu. Once you select the baseline points, a distance will be displayed for information purposes.

- 240 -

Main Menu

After you define the tape baseline points, you can then select the point that you want to locate. Once you select the layout point, the offsets to measure will be computed and displayed.

Map View

At any time you can press the Map View button to see a graphical representation of the baseline and offset line

Rotate/Translate/Scale Points

Apply User Defined Parameters

Main Menu | Calculations | Rotate/Translate/Scale | Apply User Defined Parameters

Use this to rotate, translate and scale a point or group of points by entering the parameters. When this command is used notes will automatically be written to the raw file indicating what parameters were entered by the user. Coordinates that are updated with the RTS command will be recorded in the raw file with AP (Adjusted Points) records.

The RTS command has the three options located on separate screens. The user can specify more than one option at the same time, for example you could rotate a group of points by 45° CW, then translate them 25' east. This can be done in one operation, instead of two separate ones.

All of the fields have

extended edit

functionality. On the direction or distance fields, if you double tap them you will see a popup menu. From there you can start the calculator or use the inverse command.

When using the inverse option, simply type the two numbers for the inverse, then press the ESC key to automatically copy the value that was computed during the inverse.

- 241 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The RTS function can also be accessed from the

coordinate database . Accessing it from there allows

you to select your points form the list which in some cases might be easier than entering a point range.

Rotate: Simple Angle

This is the simplest form of rotating your points. Specify the base point for the rotation, and a rotation angle.

Rotation Base Point

Use this to specify the pivot point for the rotation. You can select the point by double tapping in the edit field. Use the point chooser to select the point form the map, or simply enter the point number.

Rotation Angle

Specify the desired rotation in degrees, minutes seconds (or whatever your project units are set to).

You can also use the direction recall feature and enter #..# to inverse between two point numbers.

Rotate: Azimuth Difference

This allows you to define two azimuths, usually used to compute the angle needed to rotate a group of points to match a field azimuth to one from a plan.

- 242 -

Main Menu

Rotation Base Point

Original & Destination Direction

Specify the desired rotation in degrees, minutes seconds. Depending on your project units, you will be entering either a bearing or an azimuth. You cannot use the direction recall feature such as #..#.

Instead use the inverse command that appears when you double tap the field.

Translate

Use this option to specify a shift to a point or group of points. The translation is separated into three groups, shift from point to point, shift by coordinate change and shift by direction and distance. In most circumstances you will only need to use one of the three types, but you can use them in conjunction with on another if you need to.

For example, you could specify that the points are to be shifted by coordinate difference between points 10 and 20, then shifted again to the east by 50 feet.

- 243 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Original & Destination Points

These work in conjunction with one another. The difference in coordinates to get from one point to the other is calculated and added to all points. You can use the point chooser to select your points or simply type the points in the fields. The horizontal differences in the northing and easting is computed and applied to the points being transformed. The elevation of the points will remain unchanged.

Add Northing, Easting, Elevation

Any one or combination of these shifts can be applied. Simply input the value for each shift in the appropriate fields. Both negative and positive values are valid.

Add Direction and Distance

Define the shift by direction and distance. The coordinate shift in Northing and Easting will be calculated using the direction and distance you enter in the fields. If desired you may apply two shift components at the same time. For example, shift your selection of points by Direction and Distance, but also add 100.00 to the elevation. You can use

angle

and

distance

recall features to help you compute your answer.

Scale

You can scale a group of points using the scale option.

- 244 -

Main Menu

Scale Base Point

This will be the base point for the scaling and all points selected will be scaled from this point. You can enter the point number in the field or use the point chooser to select the scale point.

Scale Factor

Use this to specify the scale to apply to your selection.

Adjust Points

Once you've specified your options and parameters, press the Adjust Points button to apply to your coordinates. Once you press it, you will see a screen that will allow you to specify which points you want to apply the calculation to.

Restore Points

After you adjust a group of points with the RTS command, you have the option of undoing your changes and restore the points back to their previous coordinate values. You can only undo the last operation that was done. Also if you close Layout, the restore coordinate values are not saved.

Reset All Parameters

After the RTS command is used, if you start the command you will see a message "Reset All Parameters?" If you choose yes, then Layout will restore all the RTS fields back to their default settings. If you choose no, then your previously inputted data is retained.

- 245 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Apply Control Calculated Parameters

Main Menu | Calculations | Rotate/Translate/Scale | Apply Control Calculated Parameters

Use this to rotate, translate and scale a point or group of points by matching up control points. When this command is used notes will automatically be written to the raw file indicating what parameters were entered by the user. Coordinates that are updated with the RTS command will be recorded in the raw file with AP (Adjusted Points) records.

Adding Control

Pick “Add Control” to add a control pair.

- 246 -

Main Menu

Confirm the Control type (2D or 3D, or none) by selecting the “Apply Horizontal” and “Apply Vertical” checkbox options. Pick the “Select” option for Source Control Point selection and Destination Control

Point selection. The standard Point Picker tool is opened to enter or select the point.

Editing Control

Select a control pair, then pick “Edit Control” to edit the control pair. The resulting dialog allows the user to modify any of the parameters of the control pair.

- 247 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Deleting Control

Select a control pair, then pick “Delete Control” to delete the control pair. A confirmation screen is presented.

- 248 -

Main Menu

Resetting Control

Pick “Reset Control” to remove all control pairs. A confirmation screen is presented.

- 249 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Viewing Transformation Parameters

Pick “View Parameters” to view the calculated parameters of the transformation, and to toggle the application of the calculated scale factor. By default the scale will not be calculated.

- 250 -

Main Menu

Adjusting Points

Pick “Adjust Points” to apply the calculated parameters to points in the project. The Point Selection dialog allows the user to pick the option to transform points measured with total station. This option will scan the raw file to extract all Point IDs that were observed with a total station. In addition (or instead), the user can enter the point(s) to be transformed.

- 251 -

MicroSurvey Layout

- 252 -

Main Menu

Additional Notes

1. From the main “Transformation Control” screen, the OK menu option will save the current state of the entered parameters and then exit to the Map Screen. The Cancel menu option will not save any changes made since the current instance of the routine was started.

2. The program saves the values of the point coordinates at the time they were added as control.

After points have been adjusted, the parameters that are stored will not be updated with the new coordinates, and as such they can become “stale”. This is to allow transforming additional points with the original parameters. When point coordinates have changed, the program will alert the user of the modified coordinates. If additional control will be added to re-calculate a transformation, it is best to use the “Reset Control” option and re-add all the control pairs.

GNSS Local Transformation

Overview

Due to a variety of reasons, it may be necessary to adjust position coordinates for distortions which can include scale, rotation, translation in northing and translation in easting. The flexibility of Layout's local transformation utility allows it to be used for a variety of applications and applied to positions derived from GNSS or terrestrial observations. For GNSS applications there are two possible reasons for the need of a transformation:

- 253 -

MicroSurvey Layout

1. Translating from Local System to Plan System

GNSS receivers by default generate geodetic coordinates (latitude, longitude and ellipsoidal height) and the process of converting to Cartesian coordinates (northing, easting and orthometric height) or local system is done with existing well defined map projection systems such as Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) or the State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS).

Selection of the map projection in Layout is done within the Datum page of the GNSS Configuration and a local zone is selected to minimize scale and meridian convergence distortion.

Most land, boundary or property surveys are unique with regards to their generalized plane and coordinate origin for each Project. The coordinate system for these surveys is often referred to as a plan system with coordinate magnitudes being kept small for ease of recording and calculations. The majority of Projects can suffice with a simple translation in northing and easting to produce plan system coordinates from GNSS determined local system coordinates. The translation is easily determined by comparing a plan system coordinate and a local system coordinated for a single point.

2. Consideration for Scale and Rotation

Projects with larger extents need to take into consideration the curvature of the earth's surface which can be handled by the application of scale and rotation transformations plus the previously mentioned translations. In the case of mixing GNSS observations and terrestrial observations it does become important to apply a transformation, especially in scale, due to the fact that there is a difference in distance between positions measured on the ellipsoid and the terrain surface. As seen in Figure 1, coordinates derived from GNSS are always referenced to the surface of the ellipsoid as per the application of map projections. When the two points on the ellipsoid are projected upwards along the ellipsoid normals onto the earth's surface, they diverge, and a terrestrial distance observed between the points will be greater than the computed distance of the same two points on the ellipsoid. The effects of this zenith divergence becomes more evident as distance between the two points becomes greater and for larger terrain heights above the ellipsoidal surface.

- 254 -

Main Menu

Figure 1. Divergence of Ellipsoid Normals.

Transformation Concepts

In order for the transformation parameters to be resolved, a sufficient number of control points are required with coordinates in both the plan system and local system. The determination of a four parameter transformation (two translations, scale and rotation) on a horizontal plane requires at minimum two physical points with each having two sets of corresponding coordinates as illustrated in Figure 2.

Points A1 and B1 exist in what is termed the local system and are transformed into the plan system points of A2 and B2. The use of more coordinate observations will provide redundancy and the means to identify outliers for elimination. Solving for over constrained parameters is done with the application of least squares to provide the most rigorous minimization of residuals. Once transformation parameters have been resolved, newly observed or existing coordinates can easily be converted to the plan coordinate system.

- 255 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Figure 2. Horizontal Four Parameter Transformation.

The selection of control points for determining the transformation parameters are critical in reducing a colinearity condition along a particular axis. Colinearity will present itself if the control points are concentrated in a linear fashion as shown in Figure 3 (Poor Design) and thus weaken the parameters in a perpendicular direction. Control points should extend to the corners of the Project boundary and be extended with equal distances in both horizontal directions.

- 256 -

Figure 3. Transformation Control Design.

Main Menu

Vertical Transformation

The vertical transformation function of Layout operates independently of the horizontal transformation. A sloped plane is calculated from the residuals of the constrained point pairs to determine a vertical bias, slope in X and slope in Y. To determine a vertical bias at least one point pair must be constrained and for all three parameters to be determined at least three point pairs must be constrained.

The use of the vertical transformation function should be restricted to cases where a geoid model is not available or there is a known problem with an existing geoid model.

Transformation Setup

Main Menu | Calculations | GNSS Local Transformation

Starting a new transformation, the following options will be available:

Modify Parameters

The Modify Parameters page allows the user to set the transformation method and parameters. This is always the first step of any local transformation. See the

Modify Parameters

topic for more information.

Import Parameters

Layout has the ability to read in a localization file (*.loc) to apply a previously used transformation to the current Project. Select this button and navigate to the desired .loc file to load it in. There is no need to export the .loc file as it is automatically updated during the transformation routine.

- 257 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Reset Parameters

Use this option to reset any previously applied transformation parameters. This cannot be undone.

NOTE: Depending on what the user specifies at the "Modify Parameters" page, additional options may become available:

Modify Control

Only applicable for a "Similarity" method where the parameters are calculated by matching up control points. This option can be used to add, edit or delete control pairs used for the calculation of the transformation parameters. See the

Modify Control

topic for more information.

Adjust GNSS Points

When the transformation parameters are finalized, this option can be used to update the coordinates of every GNSS measured point in the database. The transformation parameters are always applied to the original Lat/Long of the measured point, to compute the adjusted grid coordinates.

Modify Parameters

Main Menu | Calculations | GNSS Local Transformation | Modify Parameters

The first step of a transformation is to specify the method to use: None, Similarity or Helmert.

Depending on your selection, different input will be required.

- 258 -

None

For this method, the only input required are the

Scale Parameters

Main Menu

Similarity Method

Similarity transformation parameters can be calculated from control points, or manually defined: l l

Calculate Using Control - Requires control points to be measured with GNSS.

- An option exists to Calculate Slopes. This option should only be used if you do not have a geoid model to use for your vertical datum and you need your transformation to align well with the orthometric heights of your local control points. Use this feature with care as it can cause distortions in your elevations if it is used incorrectly.

- An option exists to Calculate Scale. Disabling this option will ensure that no scale is calculated from the control points and the user may want to enter a pre-determined scale in the

Scale Parameters section. When this option is enabled, the Scale Parameters should not be manually defined.

Manually Define - Requires previously determined transformation parameter values. The user enters the Origin and Translate Point coordinates, Rotation, Scale Factor, Height Translation and Slopes.

- 259 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Helmert Method

This method allows the user to manually enter the 7 Parameters of a Helmert Transformation (Translation X, Y and Z, Rotation X, Y, and Z, and Scale). These parameters will usually be pre-computed and/or published.

- 260 -

Main Menu

Scale Parameters

The Scale Parameters can be:

1. User Defined - Manually enter the Grid Factor and Elevation Factor to determine the Combined Factor.

2. Select From Database - Pick a point from the database that was already measured with

GNSS and stored. The Combined Factor of the point will be calculated.

3. Measure GNSS Position - Use the current position of the rover to calculate a Combined

Factor.

NOTE:

In all cases the entered or calculated Combined Factor will be the inverse of the Combined Factor typically seen published or otherwise calculated.

The standard expression of the typical Combined Factor is:

Grid Distance = Ground Distance * Combined Factor.

We can refer to this as the "Ground to Grid" factor.

Layout expects the "Grid to Ground" Combined Factor, which is the inverse of the typical Combined Factor.

NOTE: The transformation parameters are immediately applied to your current position and written to the Project's *.loc file when you confirm the values with OK.

- 261 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Modify Control

Main Menu | Calculations | GNSS Local Transformation | Modify Control

Use this option to Add, Edit and Delete control points used to calculate the Similarity Transformation parameters.

Add Control

Pick Add Control to match a Local Control point with a GNSS Control point. Control points can be matched 1D, 2D or 3D.

- 262 -

Main Menu l l

The Local Control section only allows the user to select an existing point from the database.

The GNSS Control section allows the user to select an existing point from the database (must have been previously measured with GNSS) or to measure a position which can then optionally be added to the database.

- 263 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Edit Control

Select a row and then pick Edit Control to modify any component of a matched pair. For example, after reviewing the residuals of all the control points, it may be necessary to change a 3D match to a

2D match. The calculated parameters are immediately updated.

Delete Control

Select a row and then pick Delete Control to completely remove a control pair from the list. The calculated parameters are immediately updated.

Continue to add/edit/delete control until you are satisfied with the residuals. When done; press the

OK button to take you back to the main GNSS Local Transformation dialog.

NOTE: The transformation parameters are immediately applied to your current postion and written to the Project's *.loc file when you confirm the values with OK.

To complete the transformation and update previously measured GNSS points, pick the Adjust

GNSS Points option.

- 264 -

Main Menu

Drawing Tool

Main Menu | Calculations | Drawing Tool

Line Toolbar | Pencil button

Point Toolbar | Pencil button

Line Mode

Use the Line draw mode to add straight line segments to your figure.

- 265 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Start Point

Specify the start point for the new segment.

For starting a new plan, this should be set to an existing point in your Project, typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from.

As you continue adding subsequent points/segments to your plan, you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you.

Distance

Specify the length of the line segment you wish to draw.

Direction

Store

After you have defined the segment to add, press this to store the new point and line segment into your Project.

- 266 -

Main Menu

Store+

This does the same as the Store button, but you will see the

screen. Use this to confirm or view the coordinates, or to specify a description.

Point by Line Mode

This is the same as the Line mode, except that when you press Store or Store+ it will only store the point, without drawing the line segment.

Arc Mode

Use the Arc draw mode to add arc segments to your figure.

Start Point

Specify the start point for the new segment.

For starting a new plan, this should be set to an existing point in your Project, typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from.

As you continue adding subsequent points/segments to your plan, you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you.

Direction

Specify the direction (Azimuth or Bearing) of the tangent in to the arc segment you wish to draw.

- 267 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Angle / Chord Length / Arc Length

Specify one of the three available methods to define your arc: l l l

Angle: Enter the interior delta angle of the arc.

Chord: Enter the chord length of the arc.

Arc: Enter the arc length of the arc.

Radius

Specify the radius to define your arc.

Clockwise / Counter-Clockwise Arrows

Use the Right/Left arrow buttons to define whether the arc rotates clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Store

After you have defined the segment to add, press this to store the new end and radial points, and draw the arc segment into your Project.

Store+

This does the same as the Store button, but you will see the

screen. Use this to confirm or view the coordinates, or to specify a description.

Point by Arc Mode

This is the same as the Arc mode, except that when you press Store or Store+ it will only store the points, without drawing the arc segment.

Connect Points Mode

This mode lets you draw lines/arcs by connecting points that already exist in your Project.

- 268 -

Main Menu

Start Point

Specify the start point for the new segment.

For starting a new plan, this should be set to an existing point in your Project, typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from.

As you continue connecting subsequent points to your plan, you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you.

Line Type

Specify one of the five available methods to define your next figure segment: l l l l l

Straight: this will draw a straight line between the specified Start Point and End Point.

Arc (CW): this will draw a clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End Point, with the specified Radial Point.

Arc (CCW): this will draw a counter-clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End

Point, with the specified Radial Point.

Arc (3Pnt): this will draw an arc (clockwise or counter-clockwise) between the specified Start

Point and End Point, going through the specified intermediate Arc Point (any point directly on the arc, does not need to be the midpoint).

Spline: this will draw a curvy line between the specified Start Point and End Point.

- 269 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Store / Store+

Undo

Press the Undo button to undo the last segment you computed, removing both the point and/or the line segment (as appropriate) from your Project. You can undo multiple steps.

Note, there is no Redo function.

Close

Press the Close button to exit from the Draw Plan command, and you will be returned to the

map screen .

Curve Calculator

Main Menu | Calculations | Curve Calculator

Layout includes a curve calculator that can be used to check curve data and also compute and curve points.

- 270 -

Main Menu

Define Known Data

You first have to define what known information you want to use to compute the curve. If you click on the drop down list you will see a list of all the options that can be used to compute the unknown values.

Enter the Known Data

Once you define the known data format, you will see grayed out fields which indicate they can't be edited. White areas indicate fields that can be edited, and these fields will match what you defined in the first step.

1. You always have to define the direction for the curve, either right or left.

2. Enter your know values.

3. If you want to store points, you need to define the PC point. You can enter the point id or use the point chooser.

4. You also need to define the PC Tangent direction, so Layout knows the orientation of the curve.

Store Points

Once you have computed your curve data, you have the option of storing the PT and Center points.

When you press either button you will see the store and edit screen.

Area Calculator

Main Menu | Calculations | Area Calculator

The area calculator is used to compute areas.

When defining the boundary area, you can select points, lines and arcs from the map, or type the point numbers in manually. Lines and points from DXF files are also valid and can be selected using the Define Area toolbar.

Defining an Area

Define Area Toolbar (Points)

- 271 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Select Point

The define area toolbar is used to help you define an area. If the first button is set to Select Point, the toolbar is in "point selection" mode and will only accept points picked from the map or point numbers that are typed in. This button acts as a toggle and will toggle between Select Point and Select Line.

Line

If you are defining a straight segment, then you should leave the Line button turned on. Simply select two points from the map, or enter the point numbers manually.

Rad Arc

Use this to define a curved segment where you know the start, radius, and end points. You need to first pick the start of the arc, then press the Rad Arc button to define the radius point. After doing so, the program will automatically switch back to the Line segment type which at that time you should select the end of the arc.

3 Pnt Arc

Use this to define a curved segment where you know three points on the arc. You need to first pick the start of the arc, then press the 3 Pnt Arc button which will allow you to define two more points on the arc for a total of three points. The program will automatically switch back to the Line segment type after the third point is selected.

Remove Previous

Use this to remove segments that were defined for the area boundary. This will remove the segments one at a time starting with the last segment that was defined.

Define Area Toolbar (Line)

Select Line

The define area toolbar is used to help you define an area. If the first button is set to Select Line, the toolbar is in "line selection" mode and will only accept lines picked from the map. This button acts as a toggle and will toggle between Select Point and Select Line.

Switch Direction

Since this routine accepts Layout figures as well as DXF entities, at times you need to switch the direction of a DXF line so that it matches the direction that you are traversing around to define the area boundary. As you select lines from the map you will see a red marker appear at the end of the line.

- 272 -

Main Menu

Remove Previous

Use this to remove segments that were defined for the area boundary. This will remove the segments one at a time starting with the last segment that was defined.

Enclosed Area Calculation

To compute an area you need to press the Define Area button to define the boundary that will outline the area perimeter. It is important to note that you are not required to "close" the area by selecting the original starting point.

The green marker indicates the start of the area perimeter, whereas the red marker indicates the last point on the perimeter. When ready to compute the area, simple press the exit button (red X) on the

Define Area toolbar.

Triangle Calculator

Main Menu | Calculations | Triangle Calculator

The triangle calculator can be used to solve unknown sides or angle of a triangle given three know components.

You first need to select a Method for the triangle calculation. There are 5 methods available to choose from and you can decide what method to use based on your known triangle components.

- 273 -

MicroSurvey Layout l l l l l

Side-Side-Side: Use this when you know the length of the three sides of a triangle.

Angle-Side-Angle: Use this when you know two angles and the distance between them.

Side-Angle-Angle: Use this when you know two angles and one side. The know side must not lie in between the two known angles.

Side-Angle-Side: Use this when two sides and the angle between them are known.

Side-Side-Angle: Use this when two sides and one angle that is not between the known sides are known. This method will produce two solutions.

After you choose the solution method and enter the known components of the triangle, press the

View Results button to complete the calculation.

Scientific Calculator

Main Menu | Calculations | Scientific Calculator

Layout includes an RPN (Reverse Polish Notation) Calculator. RPN Calculators (such as the HP48) are stack based, where values are popped from a stack, and the results of the calculation are pushed back onto the stack. This type of calculator may seem foreign at first, so several examples of its use are included below.

The calculator can be launched several ways:

1. By tapping inside certain numeric entry fields to directly open the Calculator. This will copy whatever value is currently in that entry field into the calculator's command line, and the calculated value can then be automatically copied back into the field which the calculator was launched from.

2. By tapping inside most text and numeric entry fields to open the keypad, and then tapping the

"Calculator" button on the keypad. This will copy whatever value was currently in that entry field first into the keypad and then into the calculator's command line. The calculated value can then be automatically copied back into the keypad and then to the field which the calculator was launched from.

3. Or it can be launched through the menu system.

- 274 -

Main Menu

The Stack

The stack is a series of memory storage locations for numeric data. Each location in the stack is called a Level. There are a maximum of 20 Levels available in the Stack.

As you push new values on the stack, the stack grows to accommodate them: the new data moves into level 1, and older data is pushed to a higher level. Data in level 1 will move to level 2, data in level

2 to level 3, and so on. Any data in level 20 will be bumped off the stack if new data is added, and is unrecoverable. As you pop data off of the stack, the number of levels decrease as data is automatically bumped down to lower levels.

The stack display always shows levels 1 to 5, and you can use the scroll bar to view the other levels up to level 20.

The Command Line

The command line is where you enter or edit data. You can enter up to 20 characters in the command line.

The command line is closely tied to the stack. You use it to enter or edit data and then process it, and the results are pushed onto level 1 of the stack.

Function

Numeric Entry

You can enter values using the keys provided on the calculator or use the numeric keys on your keyboard.

[ 0 ] - [ 9 ] - Types numeric data into the command line

- 275 -

MicroSurvey Layout

[ ← ] - Types a backspace into the command line. You can also use the Backspace key on your keyboard.

Stack Operations

Functions are available to help you manipulate data that is currently stored in the stack.

[ EDIT ] - Pops data from level 1 of the stack into the command line, bumping all other data down one level.

[ SWAP ] - Switches positions of the data in levels 1 and 2 of the stack. Or you can highlight a level on the stack and pressing the Swap button will move the value to level 1.

[ CLEAR ] - Deletes all data from the stack.

[ DROP ] - Deletes the data in level 1 of the stack, bumping all other data down one level.

[ ENTER ] - Pushes data from the command line into level 1 of the stack, bumping all other data up one level. You can also use your keyboard's Enter key.

The Shift Button

[ SHIFT ] - This is used to show the reverse functions of each operation.

When the shift key highlighted in grey, it indicates that the shift key is currently depressed, press it again to un-shift

- 276 -

Main Menu

The OK/Cancel button

[ OK ] copies the value in level 1 of the stack back into the either the keypad or the numeric entry field which was double-tapped to launch the calculator, and closes the calculator.

[ Cancel ] closes the calculator, without copying the data anywhere

Note:

All data will remain on the Stack, and will be available the next time the calculator is re-started. On Exiting from Layout, all data on the stack is written out to a file called

CalcStack.bin and will be automatically re-loaded when Layout is re-started.

Converting Units

[ METER ] , [ FEET ] , [ FTUS ]

Assigns a linear unit to the data in the Command Line, and places it on the Stack. If the Command

Line is empty, then the unit is applied to the data currently in Level 1 of the Stack.

[ DEG ] , [ RAD ] , [ GRAD ]

Assigns an angular unit to the data in the Command Line, and places it on the Stack. If the Command

Line is empty, then the unit is applied to the data currently in Level 1 of the Stack.

Note:

- 277 -

MicroSurvey Layout

You do not need to press enter before pressing a unit button, it will automatically move whatever data is in the Command Line into Level 1 of the Stack.

Example: determine the metric equivalent of 15 feet:

[1][5] [FEET] [METER]

1: 4.572_m

Example: determine the gradient equivalent of 45 degrees:

[4][5] [DEG] [GRAD]

1: 50_grad

Basic Mathematical Operations

[ + ] , [ - ] , [ x ] , [ / ]

Performs a mathematical operation on the data in Level 1 and Level 2 of the Stack, or on Level 1 and the Command Line.

Note:

You do not need to press [ENTER] before pressing a math button, it will automatically move whatever data is in the Command Line into Level 1 of the Stack.

Example: determine the sum of 2 + 3

[2] [ENTER] [3] [+]

1: 5

Advanced Mathematical Operations

Note:

You do not need to press [ENTER] before pressing a math button, it will automatically move whatever data is in the Command Line into Level 1 of the Stack.

[ P>R ] , [ R>P ]

Convert data between Polar and Rectangular notation

- 278 -

Main Menu

Example: Convert 206 feet at 14° to Rectangular components.

[2][0][6] [ENTER] [1][4] [P->R]

2: 199.8809196

1: 49.83591049

Example: Convert x=200, y=50 to Polar components.

[2][0][0] [ENTER] [5][0] [SHIFT] [R->P]

2: 206.1552813

1: 14.03624347_°

[ DMS> ] , [ >DMS ]

Converts data between Degrees/Minutes/Seconds and Decimal Degrees

Example: Convert from 12° 34' 56" to decimal degrees

[1][2][.][3][4][5][6] [DMS->]

1: 12.58222222_°

Example: Convert from 12.3456° to degrees, minutes, seconds

[1][2][.][3][4][5][6] [SHIFT] [->DMS]

1: 12.204416

[ DMS+ ] , [ DMS- ]

Add or subtract DMS angles

Example: 12° 34' 56" + 1° 2' 3"

[1][2][.][3][4][5][6] [ENTER] [1][.][0][2][0][3] [DMS+]

1: 13.3659

[ SIN ] , [ COS ] , [ TAN ] , [ ASIN ] , [ ACOS ] , [ ATAN ]

Trigonometric calculations

Example: Cosine of 12.3456°

[1][2][.][3][4][5][6] [COS]

1: 0.9768757205

Example: Cosine of 12° 34' 56"

- 279 -

MicroSurvey Layout

[1][2][.][3][4][5][6] [DMS->] [COS]

1: 0.9759844006

Example: Arc Cosine of 0.3456°

[0][.][3][4][5][6] [SHIFT] [ACOS]

1: 69.78157371

[ 1/X ]

[ √x ]

[ LOG ]

[ +/- ]

[ x2 ]

[ LN ]

[ EEX ]

[ pi ]

[ x√y ]

[ 10x ]

[ yx ]

[ ex ]

Inverse of X. Example: 1/4 = [4] [1/X] = 0.25

Square Root of X. Example: ROOT(9) = [9] [√x] = 3

Logarithm (Base 10). Example: LOG(1000) = [1][0][0][0] [LOG] = 4

Change Sign. Example: [3] [ENTER] [+/-] = -3

X Squared. Example: 3^2 = [3] [x2] = 9

Natural Logarithm. Example: LN(148) = [1][4][8] [LN] = 4.997212274

Scientific Notation. Example: 3x10^4 = [3] [EEX] [4] = 30,000

Pushes pi onto the stack. Example: [SHIFT] [pi] = 3.141592654

X'th root of Y. Example: 3ROOT(8)= [8] [ENTER] [3] [SHIFT] [x√y] = 2

10 to the X. Example: 10^3 = [3] [SHIFT] [10x] = 1000

Y to the X. Example: 2^3 = [2] [ENTER] [3] [SHIFT] [yx] = 8

Exponent of X. Example: e^1 = [1] [ENTER] [SHIFT] [ex] = 2.718281828

Bolt Patterns

Layout Toolbar | Bolt Pattern Button

Main Menu | Calculations | Bolt Pattern

This routine allows you to create or edit point patterns, and apply them to existing points in your project. This is useful for creating drill holes for bolt patterns, pillar columns, etc.

Note

The *.pattern data files are completely interchangeable between both Layout and

MicroSurvey Point Prep, so any patterns created in one program can be edited or used in the other.

Pattern Toolbar

When you start the Point Pattern command, you will see the Pattern Toolbar along the bottom of your map screen.

- 280 -

Main Menu

Insert Pnt

Specify the point ID for an existing point in your project, either by typing in its point ID, or by tapping on a point in the map screen to select it when this field has focus.

The selected point will be highlighted in the map view with a large red point, and the current pattern will be previewed with smaller green points.

Direction

Use this to specify a direction value for your pattern. The default direction of N0°00'00"E will orient the pattern exactly as it was defined.

To orient your pattern along any arbitrary line between two existing points, enter those two points using the pt#..pt# format like 1..2 and the direction between those two points will be automatically calculated for you. The pattern's X-axis will be applied along this direction.

Load Pattern

Press this button to load a previously saved *.pattern file.

Edit Pattern

Press this button to edit the currently loaded pattern, or to create a new pattern if you have not loaded one. Please see below for more information on the Pattern Editor.

- 281 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Insert Pattern

Press this button to apply the currently pattern to the selected insertion point. New points will be stored in your project at the coordinates, as previewed by the green pattern points. All inserted points will be created with the description "Pattern", and with the same elevation as the selected insertion point.

To insert a pattern onto multiple points, simply change the insertion point and insert the pattern onto each point one-at-a-time as desired.

Pattern Editor

When you press Edit Pattern on the Pattern Toolbar, you will see the Pattern Editor screen.

Enter the X and Y offset values for your pattern as desired. As you enter the points, they will be previewed in the grid, which will automatically zoom to the extents of your pattern. Please see the

Distance Entry & Recall

topic for options on entering the offset values in various units.

The 0,0 origin will always be located at the selected Insertion Point, so a point should not be included in your pattern at 0,0. You can also rotate the pattern into any orientation on the Pattern Toolbar (see above), so you do not need to create different variations of the same pattern to insert it in different orientations.

Press the Delete Point button to remove the selected X,Y offset from the pattern.

Load Pattern

Press this button to load a previously saved *.pattern file.

- 282 -

Main Menu

Save Pattern

Press this button to save the current pattern to disk.

This will always do a "Save As" type save, so you can specify a new filename, or select any existing pattern file to overwrite it with the changes. You will always be prompted for confirmation before overwriting an existing pattern file.

New Pattern

To create a new pattern, simply delete all of the existing points from the current pattern. When you press the Save Pattern button you will always be prompted for a new filename, so you will not lose the previous pattern.

Close

Press this button to close the Pattern Editor and return to the Pattern Toolbar. If you have not saved the current pattern, you will be prompted to confirm this before discarding your changes.

- 283 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Instrument Selection

Main Menu | Connect

The Instrument Selection screen allows you to choose the type of equipment you will be connecting to Layout. An Instrument Profile can be created for each different instrument you will be working with, to make changing between different hardware a breeze. Once you have setup a profile for each different instrument you will be using, switching between them is a simple matter of selecting the appropriate profile and pressing Connect.

Note, this screen is not available if Layout is running onboard your instrument.

For all future Projects you create with Layout, when you create a new or open an existing Project you will see the Instrument Selection screen with the profiles you have already created. It will default to the last Profile you used, so if you are using the same instrument just press Connect. If you are using different equipment, just select the appropriate Instrument Type and Profile (or add a new profile if one does not yet exist for it), then press Connect.

Your profiles are stored in the Settings.xml file within the ...\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows CE/Mobile) or ...\Documents\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows Tablet/PC) directory so once you have configured one data collector, you can copy this file onto other data collectors to make the profiles available on them. This file should also be backed up for easy recovery.

- 284 -

Main Menu

Total Station

When you select the Total Station instrument type, you will be able to Add, Delete, or Edit a profile for your conventional and robotic total stations. See the

Conventional Total Station

topic for more details about configuration for your total station.

For more information on connecting to your instrument please refer to the

and

Robotic Total Station

topics.

GNSS Reference / GNSS Rover

When you select the GNSS Reference or GNSS Rover instrument type, you will be able to Add,

Delete, or Edit a profile for your GNSS receiver. When you edit a GNSS Rover or GNSS Reference profile, you will see the

Configure Rover

Configure Reference

screens. For more information about using Layout for GNSS surveying, you should review the

GNSS Overview

topics.

If you have not purchased the GNSS module for Layout, then you will not have access to the GNSS commands and you will see a "Requires GNSS module license" message.

Disto/Laser

When you select the Disto/Laser instrument type, you will be able to Add, Delete, or Edit a profile for your supported Leica Disto and supported Laser Technology Inc devices. Please review the

Disto/Laser Reference

topic for more details.

Simulators

GNSS Rover Demo

When you select GNSS Rover Demo from the Simulators instrument type, you will be able to Edit and Connect to a profile for a simulated GNSS Rover receiver. When you edit the RTK Demo profile, you will see the

Configure Rover

screen. For more information about using Layout for GNSS surveying, you should review the

GNSS Overview

topics.

The GNSS Rover Demo will simulate connecting Layout to a GNSS Rover receiver. The coordinates in the GNSS Demo are located outside our office in Westbank, British Columbia, Canada, so to use the GNSS Demo mode you need to set your Coordinate System Settings to UTM Zones, NAD83,

UTM83-11, Ellipsoidal.

Total Station Demo

When you select Total Station Demo from the Simulators instrument type, you will be able to Edit and Connect to a profile for a simulated Total Station. All measurements are manually entered, but point coordinates and the raw file are updated as if connected to an instrument.

- 285 -

MicroSurvey Layout

None

Use this option if you're not connecting anything to Layout. With this mode, the instrument toolbar will not be displayed in the map screen.

- 286 -

Layout Menu

Main Menu | Layout

Instrument Toolbar | Measure Modes | Layout

This menu contains layout related functions.

Main Menu

You can access the Layout menu from the Map View by pressing the Layout icon on the

Common

Commands Toolbar

Point

Use this to layout points from a list or from a screen selection. Please see the

Point on Floor or Ceiling

topic for more information.

Line/Arc

Use this to layout lines and arcs. Please see the

Layout Line/Arc

topic for more information.

Layout Elevation

Use this to layout a specific design elevation. Please see the

Layout Elevation

topic for more information.

Layout Alignment

Use this to open the alignment tools screen. Please see the

Layout Alignment

topic for more information.

- 287 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Layout Surface

Use this to layout to a DTM (Digital Terrain Model) surface. Please see the

Layout Surface

topic for more information.

Layout List

Use this to define a layout list that can be used for layout. Please see the

Layout List

topic for more information.

Point on Wall

Use this to auto-locate on the wall surface where an offset point intersects perpendicular. Please see the

Point on Wall

topic for more information.

Point on Floor and Point on Ceiling

Use this to auto-locate on the floor or ceiling surface where an offset point intersects perpendicular.

Please see the

topic for more information.

Pipe through Wall

Use this to auto-locate on the wall surface the intersection point of the projection of a pipe. Please see the

Pipe Through Wall

topic for more information.

Layout Points

Main Interface | Layout | Point

Point Toolbar | Layout

Step 1: Select Design Point

When you start the layout points command you will be able to pick a point from the map, or enter a point id in the point id field, or use a point list by turning on the "Use List" toggle.

- 288 -

Main Menu

Point ID

This allows you to manually enter in the point you would like to stake.

Point Desc

This shows the description of the current design point.

Previous & Next

Use this to automatically advance to the next or previous point in your database. Note that you need to have a value entered in the point number field.

Nearest Search

This will automatically select the closet point to stake.

Layout Point button:

If you're using a non-robotic instrument, you will see the "turn to" screen displaying the angle and distance you need to measure to layout the point. Please see section Step 2a below.

If you're using a robotic instrument or GPS, you will see the map screen and the

point layout toolbar

Please see section Step 2b or 2c below.

- 289 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Step 2a: Non Robotic Total Station Layout

Rotate instrument to:

From this screen you will see what angle and distance you need to turn to on your instrument to layout your point.

At this point you can turn your instrument to match the angles and when ready to start, press the

Continue button. The Turn To information is also available on the next screen in case you need to see it again.

Note: Your target height is used to determine the vertical angle for the stake point.

Auto Rotate

If your instrument has servo motors and Layout supports your instrument, this option will be available.

It will be on by default and will automatically turn to match both the horizontal and vertical angles needed to layout the point. The instrument will begin to turn when you press the Continue button.

Zero Plate

This is used to modify plate reading on your instrument in such a way that if you manually turn to zero you will be facing towards the point you want to layout.

When you do so, you will see a message "Zero the plate circle to the design point and update the backsight setup?" Press Yes to continue, or No to Cancel. After you press Yes, a new backsight reading is set on the instrument and a BK record is written to the raw file.

- 290 -

Main Menu

You will also note that the turn to angle will now display zero, which is the angle you now need to turn to on the instrument.

You can continue using this for any other points you want to layout. Since the plate reading is changing a lot, you will want to check the backsight frequently to make certain any error meets your tolerances.

Continue

Press this button to continue. You will now see the map screen and the

point layout toolbar

Step 2b: Robotic Total Station Layout

If you're using a robotic instrument and have the

Robotic Staking option

enabled, the layout routine will bypass the screen and steps explained in the Step 2a section. Instead, Layout will take you directly to the map screen where you will see our

point layout toolbar .

By default, Layout will have the robotic staking option enabled for all robotic total stations.

Some users may need their robotic instrument to automatically turn to the layout point instead. If this is desired, just disable robotic staking.

Layout Toolbar

The layout toolbar is used in conjunction with the

to help you navigate to your stake point. If you're using a robotic or conventional instrument the staking process will be similar.

- 291 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The layout toolbar can be accessed by pressing the Layout Point button on the

layout settings . Setting this will twist your map view to help

screen.

It will also be accessed from many other commands that require a point to be laid out.

When you first see the layout screen you may be asked to take a measurement first so it can calculate the current position of the rod. Press the measure button if you're using a conventional instrument, or turn on the cursor tracking button if you're using a robot or GNSS.

You should define a map orientation in the

you with your layout and change the way the "move by" distance are reported. Press the top button

"Viewing North/Instrument/Prism" to adjust your Orientation Reference setting. For best results, set the Orientation Reference to Prism for a conventional total station, Instrument for a robotic total station, North for GPNS staking.

Grid Staking Mode is selected by default, select the Grid button on the bottom-left corner will allows you to choose Map staking mode that relays on Observation Toolbar, or Compass staking method if you are using a GNSS receiver or robotic total station.

Note that Compass staking mode for GNSS will require movements to determine the orientation to the point you are trying to stake. Once you are close to the point, the screen will automatically switch to Grid mode for precise staking. The threshold of this switch can be found inside Staking Settings menu.

Buttons

Store Point

When this is pressed the

Layout Settings , then the direction/distance text will be green; if you are outside the tolerance then the text will

screen will appear so you can store the position of the rod. The default is to store a point in the project database as well as write raw records to the raw file. You might not want to store a point for the staked position but want to have a record of it in the raw file. This can be done by turning off "Store Layout Point" in Layout Settings.

(This button not available for GNSS staking, use the Measure button to record the point.)

Select Viewing Direction

This opens up Viewing Direction dialogue where you can select options depending on the current instrument

Current options include: Viewing North/Instrument/Prism/User Point.

- 292 -

Select Staking Method

Depending on the instrument selected, this button allows you to choose from Map, Grid, Compass staking modes.

Staking Information

This displays information about the point you are laying out. It will list the coordinates of the point plus other information that will help you during your layout.

Toggle Observation View

This button allows you to see or hide the

Observation Toolbar.

Select Next Point

This button opens up options to select next point to Layout

Layout List

This displays the Layout list.

Zoom

Map View only - This will automatically zoom to the extents of your current target position and the point you're laying out.

Settings

This will open the

Layout Settings

screen which allows you to setup parameters that will be used during the layout such as your Tolerance, Orientation Reference, and more.

Close

This will close the Layout Toolbar, and return you to the previous screen.

Main Menu

- 293 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Layout Method - Map View

For each of the following methods, if you are within the Tolerance setting defined in the

be red. You can also switch pages within the

at any time to see other measurement information, for example if you want to see the rod elevation instead of a Cut/Fill.

Turn An Angle

This method will display both the required and measured horizontal angles in the

near the top of the screen. This method is useful while staking with a conventional total station, to quickly get online with the design point.

Directional

This method will display the In/Out and Left/Right (or N/S/E/W), and Cut/Fill distances from the current rod position to the design point in the

near the top of the screen. This method is useful while staking with a conventional or robotic total station, but be sure to set the "Orientation

Reference" option to Prism for a conventional total station, Instrument for a robotic total station, or

North for GNSS staking.

Radial

This method will display the Direction (Bearing or Azimuth) and Distance from the current rod position to the design point in the

Layout Settings , then the direction/distance text will be green; if you are outside the tolerance then the text will

near the top of the screen. This method is useful while staking with a robotic total station or GNSS.

Conventional Total Station Tips

If you're using a conventional total station you need to press the measure button on the instrument toolbar before the navigate distances are displayed.

To help with navigating, set your map orientation to Prism in the staking settings screen. This will force the map to orientate itself so the prism is at the top and the instrument is at the bottom.

You can use the Turn An Angle method to quickly get online with your point, then switch to the Directional method to navigate accurately to the point.

Robotic Total Station Tips

If you're using a robotic instrument you need to turn on the cursor tracking button on the instrument toolbar before the navigate distances are displayed. Note that with a robotic instrument, there is no need to press the measure button as the cursor tracking provides real-time positions to the Observation Toolbar.

To help with navigating, set your map orientation to Instrument in the Settings screen. This will force the map to orientate itself so the instrument is at the top and the prism is at the bottom.

- 294 -

Main Menu

You can set the EDM mode on the instrument toolbar to use a fine measurement setting that can be used to record the position of the point. When cursor tracking is on it uses a coarse mode which might not be suitable for the storing the point, but suitable enough to for navigation. For precise layout you can use the following procedure:

1. Use cursor tracking to navigate to your point.

2. When you attain the position to be laid out you can do one of two things: a. If tracking mode is precise enough for your needs you can turn off cursor tracking, then press the Lock button to stop the instrument from tracking the prism. It is useful to do this as the instrument will still be pointed at the layout location and prevents the instrument from following the prism if you have to lay it down.

b. If you need to take a more accurate position before marking the point or pounding in your stake: You can turn off cursor tracking, then press the measure button to help you locate the layout point. By doing this it will use the EDM mode set in the instrument toolbar (make certain it is set to a fine mode) instead of using the coarse (tracking) mode.

Once the point is located, make sure to press the Lock button to stop the instrument from tracking the prism. It is useful to do this as the instrument will still be pointed at the layout location and prevents the instrument from following the prism if you have to lay it down.

3. Mark your point or pound in your stake.

4. Set the prism on the point you just marked and press the No Lock button which will initiate a search. Since you stopped the instrument from tracking in the previous step the instrument should lock onto the prism very quickly.

5. Press the Measure button to record one final position for the stake point.

6. Press the Store Point button on the staking toolbar to store the final location of the point you just staked.

GNSS Tips

To help with navigating, set your map orientation to North in the settings screen. This will force the map to orient itself so that North remains up on the screen.

Use cursor tracking to navigate to your point (this provides real-time positions to the Observation Toolbar) then when you attain the final position to be laid out press the Measure button. The usual GNSS

Measurement procedure will apply, and your current tolerance mode and masks will be in effect for the measurement.

- 295 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Raw File

When you store your point several records are written to the raw file. Following is an example of a point that was laid out:

SP,PN1400,N 715346.319,E 2381454.812,EL1.009,--

CF,EL1.0087,GD1.0000

DE,PN342,N 715346.319,E 2381454.770,EL1.000,--

SD,ND-0.000,ED-0.042,LD-0.009

SK,OP251,FP1400,AR180.00000,ZE89.05000,SD63.0500,--Design Point: 342

The SP record is the point that was recorded when you pressed the Store Point button.

The CF record displays the measured elevation versus design.

The DE record displays the design coordinates for the point to be laid out.

The SD record displays the delta values of the laid out point. This is the DE record - SP record.

The SK record is the recorded raw observation used to compute the store point (SP) record.

Note: If you turned off "Store Layout Point" in the layout settings, then no SP or CF record will be stored in the raw file.

Layout Line/Arc

Main Interface | Layout | Line/Arc

Line Toolbar | Layout

Layout Line

When you start the command from the Layout Menu you will see the

Select Line Toolbar

that will allow you to select the object you want to layout.

- 296 -

Main Menu

Press OK to continue on to the Down/Out screen.

If you want to layout the line, just press the Layout Line button which will take you to the Map View screen and wait for an observation to be taken.

- 297 -

MicroSurvey Layout

If you want to layout a specific point along the line, select the Point On Line Staking button and specify the down/out distances then press the Layout Point button which will display the

layout point toolbar

for the specified design point.

When the layout line toolbar opens you have to take a shot before any information will appear on the toolbar.

- 298 -

Main Menu

Layout Methods

For each of the following methods, if you are within the Tolerance setting defined in the

be red. You can also switch pages within the

at any time to see other measurement information, for example if you want to see the rod elevation instead of a Cut/Fill.

Directional

This method will display the current Station (perpendicular from the rod, as marked by a blue circle on the line), the In/Out, Left/Right, or N/S/E/W distance to the line (from the rod to the red x on the line, keeping the same horizontal angle), and the Cut/Fill distance (from the rod to the interpolated elevation of the station point marked by the blue circle, where a cut represents that the rod is higher than the interpolated station elevation, and a fill represent that the rod is lower than the interpolated station elevation) in the

near the top of the screen.

When using this method, be sure to set the "Orientation Reference" option to Prism for a conventional total station, Instrument for a robotic total station, North for GNSS staking, or use one of the other reference options if preferred.

You can force Layout to display either In/Out or Left/Right distances by changing the Line Mode option in the

Layout Settings

Stationing - Absolute

This method will display the current Down, Out, and Cut/Fill distances relative to the line in the

near the top of the screen. The station point is marked by a blue circle on the line, the

Offset is the Left/Right distance from the blue station point to the current rod position, and the Cut/Fill is the elevation difference from the current rod position to the interpolated elevation of the station point where a cut represents that the rod is higher than the interpolated station elevation, and a fill represent that the rod is lower than the interpolated station elevation.

Stationing - Relative

This method will display the current Down, Out, and Cut/Fill distances relative to the line in the

near the top of the screen. The station point is marked by a blue circle on the line, the

Note:

Please refer to the

Point Layout Toolbar

topic for additional information and tips.

- 299 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Layout Arc

The process is identical whether staking a line or an arc - the only difference is you begin by selecting or defining an arc instead of a line.

Just like staking to a line, Staking to an Arc gives the user the option to either stake anywhere along the selected arc by selecting the "Line Staking" button. Or the user can also indicate a desired point along the line by selecting the "Point On Line Staking" button and enter in a station and offset.

- 300 -

Main Menu

Layout Elevation

Main Interface | Layout Button | Elevation

This routine allows you to layout to a specific elevation (called the Design elevation). The routine will report the cut and fill values from the selected (Design) elevation to your current rod elevation. The horizontal position is not the focus of this routine.

Why would I want to use this? Maybe you may want to use this function if you have to layout a building pad before concrete is poured and you know what the height of the pad should be. You enter this value in the Elevation field and walk around your pad. This routine will inform you of how far your rod is above or below the design elevation.

The first step is to define your constant elevation. You can either type in a design elevation manually into the Elevation field, or you can use the Get elevation from point... button to select a point from your points database, and use its elevation.

- 301 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Continue

Press this button to continue to the Map view. You will now see the map screen displaying the

toolbar. The

Display

toolbar displays the design elevation (the intended or desired elevation), the actual measured elevation (displayed in the Elev field), and the cut/fill amount required to get to the design elevation from the measured elevation.

Design = Elev+ Fill amount or

Design = Elev - Cut amount

Get elevation from point...

Press this button to acquire an elevation from a selected point's elevation. The point database dialog will open and you can select a point to use its elevation.

The Elev and Cut/Fill text fields will display values that are within your layout tolerance in the colour green. Measurements made outside of your layout tolerance are displayed in the colour red .

- 302 -

Main Menu

Layout List

Main Interface | Layout | Layout List

Use a layout list to layout points from a predetermined list of points.

Why Use a Layout List?

The layout list is separate from the Points database. We have added intelligence to the layout list specifically for layout. After importing points and assigning the "To Stake Out" survey role to them, you will never have a measured point appear as a point to be laidout. Moreover, the layout list will always search for and present the next nearest point (shortest path) from the current position as the next point to lay out. This functionality was added to help you lay out more points in a day.

When you start the layout list command you will see the layout list screen and it will be empty, if you haven't previously added any points to it. The image below is of a layout list that contains points.

- 303 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Sort By Point ID

Use this to sort the layout list by Point ID.

Sort By Shortest Path

Select the first point you want to layout, then use this to sort the layout list by shortest path distance from the selected point.

Find Points

Use this to find points that will be added to the list. You can find points based on the Point ID (which includes the ability to select points based on a window crossing in the mapview screen, by point ID range or by a single point and radius) Coordinate, or Description. The system will look in the Points database for points to add to the layout list.

- 304 -

Main Menu

- 305 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Select Point

Use this to pick a point from the map. Points will be added to the list in the order they're selected.

Remove Points

Use this to delete a single row or multiple rows. This will only remove the points from the list and will not delete any points from the Points database.

Remove All Points

Use this to clear the current list. This will only remove the points from the list and will not delete any points from the Points database.

Move Up

This will move the currently highlighted point up one row.

Move Down button:

This will move the currently highlighted point down one row.

Stake Pnt

This will take you to the layout toolbar to layout the point that is currently highlighted in the list.

Layout Status

If a point in your layout list has not been laid out yet, it will have a stake icon displayed in the Layout

Status column. You will see a green checkmark icon if the point has already been laid out.

- 306 -

Main Menu

As you can see in the image above, point 1 has been laid out, and point 2 has not.

Adding Points to the Layout List

There are two ways to add points to a layout list. You can add points that already exist in the Points database via the layout list screen by pressing the Find Points button. The alternative (and possibly the easiest) way is to assign the survey role of To Stake Out to points being imported via the ASCII

Coordinate File Import button in the

Import/Export Menu

. When points are imported using the

ASCII Coordinate File Import button and are assigned the survey role of To Stake Out, these points will automatically be added to the layout list.

Working From the List

To work from the list simply highlight the point you wish to layout and press the Stake Pnt button which will begin the process. Please see the

Point Layout Toolbar

topic for more information. Since you started from the layout list, it will automatically turn on the "Use Layout List" checkbox in the

screen.

When you store your layout point, the layout point command will automatically go to the next point in the list.

Survey Role Setting

The status of a point is controlled by the Survey Role type in the project database. You can view the role by using the

Coordinate Database

viewer. If the point is pending, it will have a survey role type of

"to stake out" (point 2 in the image below). If it has been staked, it will have a survey role of staked out (point 1 in the image below).

Layout Surface

Main Menu | Layout | Layout Surface

- 307 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The Stake Surface command allows you to take a shot anywhere on a surface and a cut or fill value will be computed. The current northing and easting position of the rod is based on the measurement, but the Z value is computed by intersecting the surface at the rod location.

You will first be prompted to select a surface to stake. If you have already imported and turned on the

TIN or Contours for any surfaces, they will be displayed in the list for you to choose from. If the list is empty, you need to use the Surface Manager to import or enable one. Please refer to the

topic for more information on how to load a surface.

When you first see the layout toolbar you may see the words "Waiting for data" in the Observation

Toolbar which means you need to take a measurement first so it can calculate the current position of the rod. Press the measure button if you're using a conventional instrument, or turn on the cursor tracking button if you're using a robot or GPS.

Once you take a shot you will see the following information in the

near the top of the screen: the Design elevation based on the surface model's elevation at your rod's horizontal position, the actual Height or elevation of the rod, and the Cut or Fill between the two. To help you visualize where your shot is in relation to the surface you can always use our

3D view

capabilities.

Staking Method

Unlike Point or Line/Arc staking, there is only one available staking method: Height.

Store Point

When this is pressed the

Manual Entry - Alignment C/L

screen will appear so you can store the position that was staked. Also a raw record will be written to the raw file.

- 308 -

Main Menu

Information

This isn't applicable when staking to a surface and will be grayed out.

Zoom

This isn't applicable when staking to a surface and will be grayed out.

Settings

This will open the

Staking Settings

screen which allows you to setup parameters that will be used during the staking process.

Note:

Please refer to the

Point Layout Toolbar

topic for additional information and tips.

Layout Alignment

Main Menu | Layout | Layout Alignment

When this is selected, the

Alignment Staking

screen will be displayed. Note you first need to define an alignment in the

Road Manager

screen. Use this to quickly continue staking your alignment.

Please see the Road Reference section for more detailed information about creating and defining alignments.

Tell me more about ...

Road Settings

Manual Entry - Vertical Profile

Manual Entry - Template

LandXML Cross Sections

Alignment DTM Surface

Alignment Staking - Part 1

Alignment Staking - Part 2

Alignment Slope Staking

- 309 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Auto-Locate - Point On Wall

Main Menu | Layout | Point on Wall

The Auto Layout Point on Wall mode is only available for the following equipment: l l

Leica 3D Disto

Robotic Total Station such as Leica TS, MS and iCON products

This advanced layout mode allows you to compute the position of a point on a wall using only the non prism EDM mode. The routine will interpolate and determine the location of the wall and will compute the theoretical perpendicular offset from the design point to the plane defining the wall. The laser pointer on your instrument will point to the location that you should mark.

MEP Module

This advanced feature is available when the MEP module is enabled.

Procedure

Define Wall

When you start the routine you will see the Auto-Locate Point on Wall dialog.

On this dialog you can specify the point you want to locate on the wall, plus define the plane that defines the wall.

- 310 -

Main Menu

The first option allows you to point your instrument at the existing wall and lets the software determine the existing location of the wall by taking some shots automatically to determine the plane.

The second option lets you define the wall by using an existing line in your project or by defining the wall by two points.

Target Heights

When using the auto-locate routines you will not need to use a vertical offset. The routine will always default the vertical offset to "No Vertical Offset" and enable "Use Auto-Location".

Important Notes

It's important to understand the importance of finding the plane that defines the wall. In the following image you will see that a design point is to be located and marked on the wall. During construction, walls are never perfect and will differ from the design location. Since the laser pointer is being used to locate this point, if all the instrument did was turn to and point at the theoretical position you will see that it would mark a spot clearly in the wrong location.

Layout will prevent this from happening by determining where the wall is by taking several shots to derive a plane. The point is then intersected with this plane and the instrument will then turn to and point directly at the intersection point.

- 311 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Once the location is marked you can then store it and locate your next point.

Auto-Locate - Point On Floor or Ceiling

Main Menu | Layout | Point on Floor or Point on Ceiling

The Auto Layout Point on Floor and Point on Ceiling modes are only available for the following equipment: l l

Leica 3D Disto

Robotic Total Station with reflectorless capabilities such as Leica TS, MS and iCON products

These advanced layout modes allow you to compute the position of a point on a floor or ceiling using only the non prism EDM mode. The routine will interpolate and determine the location of the floor or ceiling and will compute the theoretical intersection using the x,y location of the point. The laser pointer on your instrument will point to the location of the layout point. Your layout points don't need to have elevations, and only require x,y coordinates.

MEP Module

This advanced feature is only available when the MEP module is enabled on your license.

Procedure

Enable Auto-Location

The user must first enable the Auto-Locate feature to access the MEP functions. To do this go into the Instrument Settings and click on the "Enable Auto-Location" button. This feature will only be available if the license has the MEP module added.

- 312 -

Main Menu l

Note turning the Auto-Location will automatically turn on the instruments reflectorless laser.

Ensure the instrument is not pointing in the direction of you or anyone else.

Operating the MEP Routines Point on Floor and Point on Ceiling

These MEP routines are now accessible from the staking window in Layout Mode. Because the MEP functions are all done with the reflectorless laser you will notice the Target Manager option is now disabled from the instrument Tool Panel and only an instrument height is required when orientating.

After the instrument has been orientated, select the point you wish to stake out from the Map View

Screen and press the Staking icon and indicate whether you wish to layout the point on the ceiling or the floor. The instrument will then take two shots to determine where the ceiling or floor is and continue to take observations to auto locate the particular point on that plane. The staking results will be displayed in the observations information window. This will also display the vertical distance from the point staked to the plane it has been staked to.

After the user has selected to stake to either the Point on Ceiling or Point on Floor the screen below will now be displayed.

- 313 -

MicroSurvey Layout

This Auto-Locate options screen allows the user to select how the instrument searches for the point on the plane. It also allows the user to switch the point that needs to be staked.

l l

Aim Laser - This option will require the user to point the instrument at the desired surface to stake the point to.

Use Search Algorithm - This option will automatically take as many observations as need to define the surface to stake the point to.

- 314 -

Main Menu

After the routine has located the point on the surface the staking results screen will pop up and will display the point details and also prompt the user to either Store the Point and Continue or Continue without storing. After this has been selected it will take you back to the Stake Point screen for the next point to be laid out.

Target Heights

When using the auto-locate routines you will not need to use a vertical offset. The routine will always default the vertical offset to "No Vertical Offset" and enable "Use Auto-Location".

When you start the routine it will automatically start taking measurements on the floor or ceiling depending on the layout mode selected. The measurements will determine a plane that the design point will be projected onto for layout.

Important Notes

It's important to understand the importance of finding the plane that defines the floor or ceiling. In the following image you will see that a point with coordinates (1,1,0) is being located on the floor and ceiling. Since the laser pointer is being used to locate this point, if all the instrument did was turn to and point at the theoretical position you will see that it would mark a spot clearly in the wrong location.

Layout will determine where the floor or ceiling is by taking several shots to derive a plane. The point is then intersected with this plane and the instrument will then turn to and point directly at the intersection point.

- 315 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Once the location is marked you can then store it and locate your next point.

Auto-Locate - Pipe Through Wall

Main Menu | Layout | Pipe Through Wall

The Auto-Locate Pipe Through Wall mode is only available for the following equipment:

- 316 -

Main Menu l l

Leica 3D Disto

Robotic Total Station such as Leica TS, MS and iCON products

This advanced layout mode allows you to compute the penetration location of a pipe through a wall using only the non prism EDM mode. The routine will interpolate and determine the location of the wall and will compute the theoretical penetration point and the laser pointer on your instrument will point to the location that you should mark.

MEP Module

This advanced feature is available when the MEP module is enabled.

Procedure

Define Pipe and Wall

When you start the routine you will see the Auto-Locate Point on Wall dialog. On this dialog you can specify the pipe centerline by selecting two points or an existing line in your project.

The second option lets you define the wall by pointing at it with your instrument, or by letting the software find the wall automatically.

Target Heights

When using the auto-locate routines you will not need to use a vertical offset. The routine will always default the vertical offset to "No Vertical Offset" and enable "Use Auto-Location".

- 317 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Important Notes

It's important to understand the importance of finding the plane that defines the wall. During construction, walls are never perfect and will differ from the design location. Since the laser pointer is being used to locate the penetration point, the software must determine the current location of the wall.

Layout will determine where the wall is by taking several shots to derive a plane. The pipe line is then intersected with this plane and the instrument will then turn to and point directly at the penetration point.

- 318 -

Main Menu

Import / Export

Main Menu | Import / Export

Use this menu to display different options for importing data into or exporting data out of your Project.

ASCII Coordinates

You can import and export ASCII coordinates to/from your current Project. Please see the

Import

ASCII Coordinates

and

Export ASCII Coordinates

topics for more information.

DXF/DWG/DGN

Import DXF/DWG/DGN files into your current Project. Please see the

Import DXF/DWG/DGN File

and

topics for more information. When importing in a DWG or DGN files there are some limitations with regards to the file size being imported and the data collector being used. Should you experience any graphical display issues, try importing in a smaller file or unloading the file entirely to clear it up.

Export DXF/DWG files of your current Project. The file will contain drawing entities of your points and lines. Please see the

Export DXF/DWG File

topic for more information.

LandXML

Import and export LandXML files. Exported files can contain CgPoints and Chains. The file will be saved in your current Project directory. Please see the

LandXML Import

and

LandXML Export

topics for more information.

- 319 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Templates

Import and export templates of figures and points to/from your current Project. Please see the

Import

Template

and

Export Template

topics for more information.

Cut Sheet Reports

Layout can create various cutsheet reports. Please see the

Cutsheet Reports

topic for more information.

Notes:

- For importing DXF/DWG/DGN, LandXML, and raster image files, please see the

topic in the

menu.

- For importing DTM surface files, please see the

Surfaces

topic in the

menu.

ASCII Coordinate Import

Main Menu | Import / Export | ASCII Coordinate Import

Use this option to import a list of coordinates to the current Project.

This may be required if a separate coordinate file is uploaded to the device by itself (not as part of a

Project with linework). This is also useful for transfer of points from one file to another.

- 320 -

Main Menu

Function

1. Click on the "Browse for File..." button to navigate to and select your file.

2. Choose the field delimiter, either Comma or Space.

3. Choose the file format. See below for more information regarding file format. If you are uncertain, use the Standard format.

4. Use the assigned role field to select the survey role of the points being imported. If these points are to go into the layout list, then select To Stake Out as the survey role.

5. Write SP (Store Point) record to raw file will store the imported coordinates to the raw file.

This is very useful if you wish to reprocess coordinates later, so we recommend that you select this when importing points.

6. Overwrite Existing Coordinates - allows you to control whether points will be overwritten during the import.

7. Set as Control Points – will set a flag in the database that will prevent these points from being edited or changed in Layout (under any circumstances!)

8. Choose OK to import the coordinates, Cancel to abort the import.

9. You will be shown a confirmation of how many points were imported to the current Project.

File Formats

Both space and comma delimited files are supported.

For all formats, the order of the Northing and Easting fields are determined by setting the Coordinate

Order in the

coordinate system settings

screen.

Standard

ID, Northing/Y or Easting/X, Easting/X or Northing/Y, Elevation, Description:Note

This format expects the file to be in a standard ASCII format. If your descriptions have a colon in them, then Layout will store everything before the colon as a description, and everything after the colon will be considered to be a note.

Standard with Header

Same as the Standard format, but the first row in the file is ignored.

Extended

ID, Northing/Y or Easting/X, Easting/X or Northing/Y, Elevation, Description, Note, Latitude, Longitude, Ellipsoidal Height, Latitude StdDev, Longitude StdDev, Height StdDev

- 321 -

MicroSurvey Layout

This format is different than the standard such that notes are separate from descriptions. Also if you collected GNSS data, the WGS 84 information can also be included and imported along with other information related to the GNSS point.

Extended with Header

Same as the Extended format, but the first row in the file is ignored.

More about the Extended Format

If you import a Layout extended file format ASCII file, Layout will create EP and GS records in the raw file. Also, the coordinates will be imported and stored in the database. Importing this type of file is useful for seeding points when using the OmniStar GNSS system or to create a list of geodetic and cartesian points that you can select while programming a GNSS base receiver.

Importing Cartesian and Geodetic Coordinates

Above is an example of an Extended ASCII file. For the format to work correctly, each point should include Cartesian and Geodetic coordinates for each point. The standard deviations are not needed unless the point is going to be used to "seed" a position for use with the OmniStarVBS system. The

Latitude and Longitude values are required to be stored in decimal degrees.

So if this type of file is imported into Layout the following will occur: l l l

A point is stored in the Project database using the Cartesian Coordinates.

A GS record is written in the raw file using the Cartesian Coordinates as a reference.

An EP record is written to the raw file using the Geodetic Coordinates as a reference.

- 322 -

Main Menu

Importing Geodetic Coordinates Only

You can create an Extended ASCII Point file that only contains a point number, description, note and

Geodetic coordinates. Upon import Layout will use the Geodetic coordinates and your defined coordinate system in your

to compute Cartesian coordinates to be stored in the database.

So if this type of file is imported into Layout the following will occur: l l l l

Using the horizontal and Vertical datum settings you've defined in your

coordinate system settings , Layout will compute a Cartesian coordinate for each point using the Geodetic values

imported from the ASCII file.

A point is stored in the Project database using the Cartesian Coordinates that was computed.

The point will be assigned the point number that was imported from the ASCII file.

A GS record is written in the raw file using the Cartesian Coordinates as a reference.

An EP record is written to the raw file using the Geodetic Coordinates as a reference.

ASCII Coordinate Export

Main Menu | Import / Export | ASCII Coordinate Export

Use this option to export a coordinate list from the current file.

This is useful for transfer of points from one file to another.

- 323 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Function

1. Specify a range of point to export in the form #..#. Accept default of All if desired.

2. Specify the number of decimal places to carry on the export. (maximum=6)

3. Specify if you want to export them with either a space or comma delimiter.

4. Specify the Angular format.

5. Specify the Encoding format.

l l

ANSI - This is the default format for ASCII, which is compatible with majority of the

CAD programs such as Autodesk products.

UNICODE - This is for use with non-English characters in the Description or Note fields.

6. Include Header will add a header row to the exported file.

7. Include Averaging Measurements - This will include all the temporary observations of all the averaged points into the exported file

8. Choose the file format type that you want to use. See below for more details about the different file formats. If you are uncertain, use the Standard format.

9. Choose Export to export the coordinates, or Cancel to abort the export.

10. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a filename including an extension, then press Save File. Layout will not add any extension to the filename you enter.

11. You will be shown a confirmation of how many points were exported.

File Formats

Both space and comma delimited files are supported.

For all formats, the order of the Northing and Easting fields are determined by setting the Coordinate

Order in the

screen.

Standard

ID, Northing/Y or Easting/X, Easting/X or Northing/Y, Elevation, Description:Note

This format will append any notes you have to your description, separated by a colon.

Layout has recently added two check boxes to include the Header and the Averaging Measurements to the ASCII file when exporting.

Extended

ID, Northing/Y or Easting/X, Easting/X or Northing/Y, Elevation, Description, Note, Latitude, Longitude, EllipsoidalHeight, LatitudeStdDev, LongitudeStdDev, HeightStdDev

- 324 -

Main Menu

This format is different than the Standard such that notes are separated from descriptions.

If you collected GNSS data, the WGS 84 information will also be exported along with other information related to the GNSS point. The WGS 84 information will be extracted from your GS records in the raw file.

Extended with Header

Same as the Extended format, but with Header data in the first row.

CST

This is a predefined format intended for Leica ELLIPSE Neo software

Custom Formats

Layout has the option to create a customized ASCII file for exporting. This option allows the user to add additional information to the standard ASCII file format. Simply click in the grey area to add in an extra info line and select what you wish to add in from the pull down menu.

- 325 -

MicroSurvey Layout

There is also an "Options" button in the upper right corner where you can specifically request the

ASCII file to either sort by Point ID or Measurement type as select what GNSS time format.

More about the Extended Format

If you import a Layout extended file format ASCII file, we will create EP and GS records in the raw file. Also, the coordinates will be imported and stored in the database. Importing this type of file is useful for seeding points when using the OmniStar GNSS system.

There is more detailed information about the extended format in the

ASCII Coordinate Import

topic.

DGN/DXF/DWG Import

Main Menu | Import / Export | DGN/DXF/DWG Import

Use this function to import CAD DXF files into a Layout Project.

Layout supports all Point nodes, Lines, Arcs, Polylines, Text and 3D Faces in the DXF file.

Layout does not support Blocks or any other entities not mentioned above in the DXF file.

All items from the DXF file will be drawn in their respective layers as defined in the DXF file. These layers may be toggled on and off using Layout's layer manager.

- 326 -

Main Menu

Importing Steps

1. From the main menu, press the Data Manager button then the Map Data Layers button.

2. Press the Add File button on the Layer Manager.

3. Using the browse window, find the DXF file you would like to import and press the Open File button.

4. Use the Layer Manager to turn on or off any layers you don't want to view.

5. Press Close and return to the map view.

6. Press the zoom extents button to see your entire DXF file.

For more information on the layer manager please visit the

Layer Manager

topic.

Important Notes:

- Your CAD desktop system likely has a super fast processor and 1GB or more of

RAM but most current Windows CE devices run at 206Mhz and have 32 or maybe

64MB of RAM. For this reason, you will not be able to manipulate a 5MB DXF file with the same speed as your desktop system so minimize the size of the DXF files for most efficient operation.

- TEXT is the biggest performance reducer in your DXF files. For best performance, minimize the amount of text in the DXF files or turn off layers containing text when not needed.

DXF/DWG Export

Main Menu | Import / Export | DXF/DWG Export

Use this to export your current Layout drawing as a DXF or DWG file. This allows for easy import of linework and nodes into most cad or graphic systems

- 327 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Function

1. Select the options for your DXF file.

Export Points: If this is checked, your coordinate point nodes will be exported to the DXF file.

You can also specify what layer you want the labels to go on and a default text height.

Export Lines: If this is checked, all figures (lines, arcs, and splines) will be exported to the

DXF file.

Export Contours: If this is checked, all contour lines drawn using the

will be exported to the DXF file.

2. Click Export.

3. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a filename, then press Save File.

Layout will add a .dxf extension to the filename if you did not include it.

4. The DXF file is created and you can copy it to your desktop computer.

- 328 -

Main Menu

Notes about DXF files:

l l l l l l l l l

Upon export, Layout will compare the figure name to see if it has a match in the AutoMap file.

If it does, Layout will draw the points along the figure, as well as draw the figure on the layer specified in the AutoMap library.

Points that are exported will match the point color settings set in the AutoMap library.

Figures that don't have a match in the AutoMap library will be drawn on a layer named

"Default". Color setting will be set to 256.

Points or nodes will be 2D or 3D depending on the Z value.

Lines will be 2D or 3D depending on the Z values of the end points.

Figures will be drawn as polylines.

Curvy lines or arcs will be drawn as segmented polylines. Layout will automatically interpolate an elevation along the arc or curved section of the figure at 1° intervals.

Contours will be drawn as polylines and will be 3D based on the contour elevation.

Points or nodes will appear as an "X" marker in the DXF file because the PDMODE variable is being set to 3 in the DXF file. In most desktop CAD programs you can change this marker type by typing PDMODE.

LandXML Import

Main Menu | Import / Export | LandXML Import

Layout can import LandXML files. Rather than convert these files into some different format, you can read these files directly into Layout.

Importing a LandXML File

There are several different methods of importing a LandXML file: l l l

By using the Import LandXML File command.

By using the Data Manager | Map Data Layers | Add File command.

By placing a LandXML file into a Project folder. This is normally done by desktop software like

MicroSurvey Point Prep. If Layout finds a LandXML file that has the same name as the Project, and it is in the Project folder, then it will automatically be imported when you load the Project.

- 329 -

MicroSurvey Layout

When a LandXML file is read, it is scanned to make a list of the objects that it contains. Loading the entire file into the Layout Project could use many megabytes of valuable memory. Therefore, when you wish to use data from a LandXML file, you need to load it as needed. Sample LandXML files are available at the LandXML web site: www.landxml.org

One of the example files posted is subdivision-xsec.xml. We have downloaded and are now going to show the results of reading it into Layout:

LandXML Components and How to Use Them

There are many different types of objects in a LandXML file. Layout will be expanding the use of these objects as the program grows.

As of the date this manual was written, the following objects are supported. This list will change, so you may notice other options on the smart menus for these objects.

CgPoints

A LandXML file can contain many different sets of points. The LandXML specification requires that every point in a LandXML file have a different id. For example you cannot have two CgPoint sets containing a point with the same id. Since a LandXML file can contain many different CgPoint sets, and these point sets may contain thousands of points, Layout lists these sets in the Project Manager.

When you want to see them on the screen, you need to use the Smart Menu to Load the CgPoint

Sets.

By default when you import your LandXML file, the CgPoints will be displayed on the screen.

CgPoints are not stored in the database but they can be used by our commands. For example you can use the Occupy Point command and select the CgPoints with the point chooser for the setup and backsight points. You can also consider them to be read only points.

Surfaces

Surfaces can be imported into Layout from a LandXML file. The surfaces can be imported in two ways:

- 330 -

Main Menu l l

Fast: We can use the points that define the surface and let Layout re-calculate the TIN model.

This might be acceptable for an area where no attempt was made to edit the triangles or add break lines. Layout can compute a surface in seconds from large numbers of points.

Maintain Triangulation: we can force Layout to read the TIN exactly as computed by the desktop software. This requires much more computing by the import program, but it will exactly maintain the triangulation in the original surface. For example, if the LandXML surface was created by using breaklines and hand editing, you will want to maintain the exact triangles for staking and viewing the surface.

You can set the import method by going to the Main Menu | Data Manager | Surfaces |

Surface

Options .

From the

you can see a list of the surfaces in the XML file. Select the one you want to load.

Alignments, Profiles, and Cross Sections

Alignments, cross sections, and staking of these items are some of the powerful features in Layout.

Almost all modern road design software will export alignments in LandXML format. We read the horizontal alignment (which is normally at elevation zero), the vertical profile, and the cross sections from

LandXML files. Individual components can be selected for staking or viewing information. The Project

Manager is used for visibility of these items, and you can drill down into the components right to the coordinate level.

Reading the basic alignment information is done when you import the LandXML file. Alignments generally are not too large, so we read the alignment, profile and cross sections into memory for later use.

There may be several surfaces in an alignment, so you can view each cross section surface separately. Each may be staked. In this sample file, there are several alignments. Each alignment can be turned on or off, or just the cross sections for an alignment can be turned off.

Following is a tiny excerpt from the first few lines of this LandXML file. Fortunately, it is rarely necessary to open a file; however, if you open one in Internet Explorer, you will see the format. They are easily explored, because you can "collapse" sections of the file by picking on the negative signs at the beginning of the lines in Internet Explorer. In this picture, all of the file has been collapsed except for the header. It is easy to see that the file was created by Autodesk Land Desktop version 3 with Service Pack 1 installed.

- 331 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Parcels/Lots

Parcels are displayed in the graphics when you import a LandXML file. You can select the lines to get basic information, and you can drill down into the Project Manager to see more details. The points that define a Parcel are stored in the CgPoints section of the LandXML file. If you want to see the point numbers on the screen, then you need to load the CgPoints. If you want to stake the points, then you need to load the CgPoints into the Points DB.

Chains/Figures

These LandXML items may or may not appear, because a chain can cross from one CgPoints set to another. This means that if you do not have all the CgPoint sets loaded, then the chains cannot appear.

LandXML Export (Points and Chains)

Main Menu | Import / Export | LandXML Export (Points and Chains)

Writes a LandXML *.xml file, including CgPoint records of the point coordinates and Chain records of the figures in the current Project.

Import Template

Main Menu | Import / Export | Import Template

- 332 -

Main Menu

If you have a template file saved you can import it back into your project. When you start the command you will see the file browse dialog that allows you to find and open the template file. After which you will see the template import toolbar. If you need to create a template file, refer to the

Template

Export

topic.

Select Insertion Point

After you select the template you can select the insertion point in the map screen, and also define a rotation for the template. A preview of the template will be displayed in the map screen in green, press

Next to continue.

Select Origin Point

After you specify the insertion point, you can then choose the origin point. Select points (green dots) on the template preview to define a new origin position.

- 333 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Insert Template

Once you are satisfied with the location and rotation of the template, you can save it into the current project by pressing the Insert button. New points and line work will be added to the project for you automatically.

- 334 -

Main Menu

Export Template

Main Menu | Import / Export | Export Template

You can export and save line work (figures) and points to a file that can then be inserted into different projects. An example of how this feature can be used is when you have a building that is common to several projects. Instead of computing a new building in each project, you can do it just once, save it to a file, then insert it into your other projects.

When you start the command you will see the template export toolbar.

There are four options available for selecting the line work and points.

Window All

This option lets you window the objects. All points and line work contained within the selection window will be accepted.

Window Points

This option lets you window objects, but only coordinate points will be selected all line work is ignored.

Single All

Use this option to manually select objects in the map view to export. You can select points or lines / arcs. If you select a line, the points that define the line will be exported as well.

Single Points

Use this option to select point one by one in the map screen.

- 335 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Save Template

When you're done selecting your objects, you can save them to a file by pressing the Save button.

Choose a location for your template, give the file a descriptive name and save it. Template files have a ".tpl" extension.

Cut Sheet Reports

Layout includes a cut sheet generator. When you layout points or alignments, cut sheet records are recorded in the raw file.

The different cut sheet formats will be described below. To create a cut sheet, select the desired cut sheet format, then press the Create Report button, then choose the folder and filename for it. You can give it any extension (one will not be automatically added) but we recommend using either .CSV

or .TXT. The extension you provide will not affect the contents of the file in any way.

If you've already created a cut sheet and want to open it to review it, press the Open Report button.

Layout automatically creates a (.CSV) comma separated value file for each cut sheet format you create. This file can be read into Excel, which will allow you to format it and print it. The records stored during staking follow the RW5 format so cut sheet records can be created using software packages that support this format.

Point Layout Format

If you've laid out points using the

Layout Point

command you will be able to create a layout point cut sheet report.

- 336 -

Main Menu

LM80 Format: This option will format the cut sheet in the LM 80 format.

Offset Stakes Format

If you've staked points using the

stake alignment

command, you can create a cut sheet report for your station and offset stakes.

Slope Stake Format

If you've staked points using the

slope stake alignment

command, you can create a cut sheet report for your slope stakes.

- 337 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Point and Offset Stake Format

This type of report will display the same records as the Point Stake and Offset Stake reports, but combine them into a single report.

Productivity Report

This type of report will display how many points were staked out in one day. Each day will be separated into its own column so users can track the daily productivity of the field crew.

Reference Line Report

This type of report will display horizontal and vertical offset information with regards to the design and as-built point locations with regards to the referenced line used and the offset distance to the alignment.

- 338 -

Main Menu

Data Manager Menu

Main Menu | Data Manager

This menu allows you to organize, manipulate and view the different data types that may be associated with your Layout Projects.

Points Database

Use this to open the points database. From here you will find numerous tools that can be used to edit your points. Please see the

Coordinate Database

topic for more information.

Map Data Layers

Use this to import DXF, LandXML, and georeferenced raster image files into your Project, and to control the visibility of database layers and any files that you may have associated with your Project.

Please see the

topic for more information.

Surfaces

Use this to import DTM surface files into your Project, view and edit your DTM surfaces, and perform volume calculations. Please see the

Surfaces

topic for more information.

Point Database

Main Menu | Data Manager | Point Database

- 339 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The point database dialog is used to review, edit, and manipulate your point data in your Project database. The list will display all points currently stored in the database, and the data can be sorted by pressing the column headers.

Point ID (Survey Role) Icons

The instrument icon indicates your current occupied point.

The target icon indicates your current backsight point.

The stake icon indicates points that are to be stakedlaid out.

The checked stake icon indicates points that have been laid out.

The hub icon indicates control points, they cannot be edited under any circumstances.

- 340 -

Main Menu

The user icon indicates user entered points, the coordinate can be edited.

The ruler icon indicates measured points, the coordinate cannot be edited.

The 123 icon indicates calculated points, the coordinate cannot be edited.

The stake and square icon indicates a Staked and Stored point.

The Staked and Stored survey role is unique and not associated with LandXML schema.

Note:

To edit the coordinate of a measured or calculated point, you must first change its survey role to user entered.

Edit

Use this to edit the coordinates of a point that is highlighted in the list using the

Store/Edit Points

tool.

Remember you must change the Survey Role to User Entered.

Add

Use this to open the

DTM Surface File Import (QSB)

screen to manually enter a new point.

Find

Use this to select multiple points, based on a single point ID, a point ID range, a point coordinate range, or point descriptions.

Statistics

Use this to display statistics of the coordinate database, including the total number of points, bounding minimum and maximum coordinate values, and point ID's in use, and point ID's not in use.

Layout

After selecting a point, press the Layout button to lay out this point. Pressing this button will take you to the Point Layout dialog.

Map View

Use this to display the currently highlighted points on the screen.

- 341 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Average

Store / Edit Points

Main Menu | Data Manager | Point Database | Edit / Add

This is a multi-use function that is used by many parts of the program. Essentially any time a point needs to be stored or edited, it will done via the store point screen. Depending on what it is you're doing, certain parts of the dialog will be disabled or not editable. Following is an explanation of what you should expect.

Point ID

Enter in the point number you would like to assign to the point. Note that by default it will display the next available point number. If you're editing an existing point, this field will not be editable.

Description

This is where you can enter a description for your point.

Elevation

Input your coordinate values in these fields when manually creating a new point using the add point function. If measuring a point, you cannot manually enter or edit coordinates.

- 342 -

Main Menu

Note Button

Press this to enter a note or record an audio note for the point. See the

Notes

topic for more information.

Store Pnt (point) Button

Press this to store the measured point.

Store SS (side shot) Button

Press this to store the point as a side shot. You would typically use this when not measuring traverse points. You will not see this button when measuring with GNSS.

Store TR (traverse) Button

Press this to store the point as a traverse point. You would typically use this when the measured point belongs to a traverse. You will not see this button when measuring with GNSS.

Cancel Button

Press this to cancel the measurement.

Map Data Layers

Main Menu | Data Manager | Map Data Layers

Use this to load, unload, and control the visibility of DXF files, LandXML files, and JPG or TIFF raster image files that are associated with your Project, and to control the visibility of your database layers.

- 343 -

MicroSurvey Layout

User Data

Layout uses the layer names specified in the AutoMap library to control the visibility of points and figures by their description.

You can control the visibility of the entire database (both points and figures) by checking or unchecking the Database option under the User Data section of the tree. If the box is checked, then the database is turned on and all of its layers will be visible; if unchecked, then the file and all of its layers is turned off and it will not be visible. If the box has another smaller square inside it, this means that some of its layers are turned on and other layers are turned off.

You can control the visibility of individual layers by expanding Database option under the User Data section of the tree, and checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the layer. If the box is checked, then the layer is turned on and entities on that layer will be visible; if unchecked, then the layer is turned off and entities on it will not be visible.

When you close the Project, the layer status will be saved so that the next time the Project is opened, the layer visibility will automatically be set the same as you had left it, so layers that were turned off will remain turned off the next time the Project is opened up.

- 344 -

Main Menu

DXF Files

You can load multiple DXF files into your Layout Project, and control the visibility of each of their layers independently from the others.

You can control the visibility of the entire DXF file by checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the DXF file, under the DXF Files section of the tree. If the box is checked, then the file is turned on and all of its layers will be visible; if unchecked, then the file and all of its layers is turned off and it will not be visible. If the box has another smaller square inside it, this means that some of its layers are turned on and other layers are turned off.

You can control the visibility of individual layers by expanding the name of the DXF file under the DXF

Files section of the tree, and checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the layer. If the box is checked, then the layer is turned on and entities on that layer will be visible; if unchecked, then the layer is turned off and entities on it will not be visible.

When you close the Project, the layer status will be saved so that the next time the Project is opened, the layer visibility will automatically be set the same as you had left it, so files that were turned off will remain turned off the next time the Project is opened up.

Add File

Press the Add File button to select a DXF file that you want to load into your Project. You will be able to browse to and select any DXF file. Please see the

Import DXF File

topic for more information.

- 345 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Remove File

Highlight the DXF file that you want to remove from your Project, then press the Remove File button.

If a file is not highlighted, you will be reminded that a file must first be selected from the tree. This will turn off all layers from the selected file in your Layout Project and disassociate the DXF file. It does not delete the DXF file.

File Settings

Highlight the DXF file that you wish to change the settings for, then press the File Settings button.

You can enable or disable the display of text in the selected file. If your DXF file contains text, turning this off will improve performance of Layout. Pressing the OK or Cancel buttons will return you to the

Layer Manager screen.

- 346 -

Main Menu

LandXML Files

You can load one LandXML file into your Layout Project at a time, and control the visibility of its layers

(points, chains, alignments, and parcels).

You can control the visibility of the entire XML file by checking or unchecking the name of the XML file, under the LXML Files section of the tree. If the box is checked, then the file is turned on and all of its contents will be visible; if unchecked, then the file and all of its layers is turned off and it will not be visible. If the box has another smaller square inside it, this means that some of its layers are turned on and other layers are turned off.

You can control the visibility of individual layers by expanding the name of the XML file under the

LXML Files section of the tree, and checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the layer. If the box is checked, then the layer is turned on and entities on that layer will be visible; if unchecked, then the layer is turned off and entities on it will not be visible.

Add File

Press the Add File button to select a LandXML file that you want to load into your Project. You will be able to browse to and select any XML file. Please see the

Import LandXML File

topic for more information. Note, you must first unload the currently loaded XML file before loading a different one.

- 347 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Remove File

Highlight the XML file that you want to remove from your Project, then press the Remove File button.

If a file is not highlighted, you will be reminded that a file must first be selected from the tree. This will turn off all components of the selected file in your Layout Project and disassociate the XML file. It does not delete the XML file.

File Settings

The File Settings button does not apply to LandXML files.

Surfaces

Main Menu | Data Manager | Surfaces

View Toolbar | Surface Manager

Layout allows you to display a 3D surface representation of the points and lines in your project. This is done by turning on the Point Database surface.

Supported DTM Files

You can import surface information into Layout. Currently you can import a surface from an QSB file.

- 348 -

Main Menu

QSB Surface

Surfaces created and saved in MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop products will have a QSB extension.

These QSB files can be imported into Layout and used to display a TIN, shaded surface or contours on the screen.

To import a QSB file, use the Load button at the bottom of the Surface Manager screen. Please see the

topic for more information.

DTM Surface Manager

The surface called Point Database represents the real-time DTM Surface made up from points and lines that are in your project. If you have imported any other surfaces from a QSB file they will also appear in this list.

To use a surface you first need to load it into memory by checking inside the box before the name of the surface in the list. A surface is loaded if there is a checkmark shown before it. If you expand the surface you can control whether it is drawn as Contour Lines, a wireframe TIN, a solid TIN, or any combination of these.

Settings

Surface settings allow you to specify settings that affect the surfaces or contours that are drawn.

Please see the

Surface Settings

topic for more information.

Volumes

Use this button to calculate a volume. Please see the

Volume Calculation

topic for more information.

- 349 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Load

Use this button to load a .QSB surface file into your project. Please see the

Import DTM Surface File

topic for more information.

Save

Use this button to save the selected surface as a .QSB file which can be imported into your MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop software or into another Layout project.

Close

If you close the surfaces screen and return back to the map screen you will see the loaded surface drawn as a wireframe, solid, and/or with contours depending on what is set in the Settings screen.

Surface Information

You can see additional statistics about the surface by double clicking on its name in the list. This will show the minimum and maximum bounding coordinates, the number of points, breaklines, and triangles in the surface, the minimum and maximum slopes in the surface, the plan and surface area, the positive and negative volumes calculated from a datum elevation of 0, and the amount of memory that the surface is using.

Point Database Surface

This can be used at any time. When this is turned on, all the points and lines in your project will be used to create a real-time DTM surface. This can be used while you're taking shots.

Please refer the

Real-time DTM Surface

topic for more information on Layout DTM surfaces.

- 350 -

Main Menu

Surface Settings

View Toolbar | Surface Manager | Settings

Use the surface settings screen to define settings that affect TIN (Triangular Irregular Network),

TGRID and Contours.

Contour Interval

This will force the contours to be drawn at an interval equal to the value set here. The interval is equal to the drawing units.

Minimum Elevation

This controls the minimum elevation. This is useful if you have some data that is displayed at a zero elevation (example: alignment point data that is horizontal) and you want to exclude these points from the surface.

Limit TIN Side

This will determine the max length that will be allowed for a TIN triangle.

Gridded TIN

If this is on, when you draw the surface it will be represented using a TGRID model instead of a TIN model. TGRID surfaces will apply smoothing in areas that have no breaklines. This may create better quality contours. The Grid Size is a ground unit value that will determine the spacing of the grid lines.

If the Grid Size is 0 then a grid size will be automatically calculated.

- 351 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Color TIN

When this is turned on then the surface color will be determined by the triangles' elevation. When turned off the surface will be displayed using a gray color. If the TIN's wireframe and solid faces are both being displayed, then the faces will be colored but the wireframe will be gray for better visibility.

Volume Calculation

Main Menu | Data Manager | Surfaces | Volumes

View Toolbar | Surface Manager | Volumes

Layout allows you to calculate the volume between a surface and either another surface or a datum elevation. The volume can be computed for the entire surface, or it can be bound by a closed figure.

Calculated Surface

Choose the surface that you want to calculate the volumes for. If you have imported any surfaces from a QSB file they will be available to choose from, or you can choose the real-time Point Database surface.

Reference Surface

You can choose have the volume calculated between your selected surface and either a datum elevation (which defaults at 0 meters/feet), or if you have imported any surfaces from a QSB file they will be available to choose as a reference surface.

- 352 -

Main Menu

Constrain volume calculation within area

If this is unchecked, a surface volume calculation will be computed for the entire surface. If this is checked, an area volume calculation will be computed for a portion of the surface bounded by an area you define. You can press the Define Area button to select a closed figure to assign as a boundary for the volume calculation. After you have selected the figure, press Close to return to the Volumes

Calculation screen.

Calculate

Pressing this will calculate and display the positive, negative and net volumes, the average thickness, and the area of the surface from either the selected datum elevation or reference surface, all constrained within the selected closed figure if selected.

- 353 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The results will also be written into the project's CogoCalcs.txt history file.

Real-time DTM Surface

Layout creates and manipulates a 3D surface from data collected in the field or from data imported through QSB or ASCII point files. A Layout surface is a mathematical description of a surface that exactly honors all input 3D data points and lines.

A Surface represents the existing topography of a job site. Surfaces contain one or more parts such as points, breaklines, triangulated irregular networks (TIN), or triangulated grids (TGRID).

A surface is not a drawing entity, rather it is a mathematical description held in the data collectors memory. Representations of a surface, such as contours, TGRIDS or TINS may be drawn into your diagram as polylines and polyface entities.

Creating a Real-time DTM in Layout

Layout will compute a DTM model from points collected, staked, or imported from any ASCII file and from any existing Layout project. There are no limits to the number of points that are used to create the DTM. The AutoMap Library controls what points and/ or lines are included or excluded from the

DTM surface. The DTM is created in real time and can be appended as additional points are picked up.

To create a DTM, follow the instructions below:

- 354 -

Main Menu

From Main Menu | Data Manager | Surfaces you can turn on the Realtime DTM Surface by placing a checkmark in the box before the "Point Database" surface. Expanding the tree will allow you to define whether it is displayed as Contour Lines, Solid Faces, and/or Triangle Edges.

The surface can be viewed or used in volume computations immediately.

Before turning on the Point Database surface:

After turning on the Point Database surface:

Each point in the database has an attribute called "DTM State". This can be set to "Do not Include". If you set a point to this value, you will see that the surface no longer includes this point. This only applies to the current surface that is computed in Layout. It does not apply to surfaces imported from a QSB file.

What is the difference between a TIN and a TGRID?

The user should become familiar with both options and decide which option is best suited for their project.

TIN honors breaklines but may be too restrictive for contours to follow the natural flow of the terrain.

Contours around small hills may look jagged if too few data points were collected.

- 355 -

MicroSurvey Layout

TGRD honors breaklines and allows the contours to follow the natural flow of the terrain. Contours around small hills will look better if the TGRD option is used.

Generally, the TGRDis for cases where you want curvature introduced between your data points and you have breaklines. This is most easily shown with an example:

- 356 -

Main Menu

Adding Breaklines to a Surface

If a break in the slope continuity is desired, the user MUST ALWAYS use the TIN or TGRD (Triangulated Grid) in conjunction with breaklines. When modeling a surface containing breaklines, a TIN or TGRD honors breaklines exactly.

What happens when you add breaklines?

Breaklines represent 3D continuous traces in space (think of them as a 3D polyline) which:

1. Define the surface elevation

2. Force slopes to be different on either side of the breakline

This line represents a location at the site where the slope changes from a steep hill to a relatively flat area.

Contours Generated without use of Top of Bank breakline:

- 357 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Without a breakline, the contours "flow" over the top of the bank and the contours do not look correct.

Contours generated with use of Top of Bank breakline:

With a breakline, the contours are forced to honor the line, as a change in slope that helps the contours to look correct.

Breakline Control

The user would want to use a figure as a breakline in the triangle formation process (TIN) for the edge of pavement, but probably not for a line connecting points that are not related to the surface features.

An example of this might be a chain connecting legal boundaries as they might cross over roads or creeks without consideration for the existing topography.

- 358 -

Main Menu

Breaklines are used in the creation of the DTM by forcing the triangulation to follow them. Triangles created in the DTM cannot cross a breakline. The edges of the triangles will always follow the breakline. When necessary, Layout will automatically densify the DTM along the breakline to create triangles that conform to the breaklines. This helps with the creation of accurate surface models and contours. Layout contains the exact same functions for surface modeling, contouring, and volumes as MicroSurvey Point Prep.

Contouring

Creating contours in Layout is a simple as choosing the desired DTM surface from the dialog and checking the contour option:

The procedures for contouring a DTM surface are outlined below:

1. Open the

Surface Settings

dialog.

2. Type in the appropriate Contour Interval. The default interval is every 2 units.

3. You can control the Minimum Elevation. This is useful if you have some data that is displayed at a zero elevation (example: alignment point data that is horizontal) and you want to exclude these points.

4. If you want to create a TGRID, then turn on the Gridded TIN option, or leave this off to create a

TIN. The Grid Size is a ground unit value that will determine the spacing of the grid lines.

5. Press OK to return to the

screen.

6. Finally, turn on the contours by expanding the Point Database surface and selecting the Contour Lines option to display them.

7. Close the Surface Manager and return to the map screen to see your contours.

Import DTM Surface File (QSB)

Main Menu | Data Manager | Surfaces | Load

View Toolbar | Surface Manager | Settings

If you have a DTM surface that was created by MicroSurvey Point Prep desktop software, you can import it into Layout. You need to copy the QSB file to your collector before proceeding.

- 359 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Function

1. Open the

Manual Entry - Alignment C/L

, then press the Load button.

2. Browse to where your DTM surface file (.QSB) is located and press the Open button to continue.

3. You will now see the surface list screen. From here you can turn on your layer and configure

DTM settings. Please see the

Surface Sets

topic for more information.

- 360 -

Main Menu

Roads Manager

Main Menu | Roads Manager

To stake an alignment you first need to define the geometry that defines the horizontal and vertical element. You can also define a template that will be used to define cross sections at specific stations along the alignment.

Layout can use the following three methods to define an alignment.

1. Manual Entry – You can manually enter the data to define the alignment.

2. Import XML – You can import a LandXML file that contains your alignment data.

By default you will see an alignment in the list with the current project name. A project can contain multiple roads, and each road can contain the following elements.

l l l l

Horizontal Element: This can contain straight tangents, curves and spirals.

Vertical Element: This can contain grade breaks, parabolic curves and non-symmetrical curves.

Templates: Template can contain horizontal and vertical offsets, as well as widening and super elevation data.

XML Cross Sections: XML cross sections define specific stations along an alignment. These sections contain horizontal, vertical and template data. XML cross sections are created using desktop software which is then imported into Layout.

- 361 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Manage Road

This option is only available once you've created a road using the New Road button or imported an

XML file. To input or review alignment data, press the Manage Road button to access the Road Settings screen.

If you imported a LandXML file, or manually inputted a road you can stake it by pressing this button.

As a minimum you need to have the following before the stake command will continue.

l l l

XML Cross sections

Horizontal C/L, Vertical Profile and template.

Horizontal C/L and DTM Surface

Add Road

Use this button to create a new road. You can create as many roads as needed and they will be stored in an XML file that will reside is the project directory.

Delete Road

Use this to delete a road. You first need to highlight the road you want to delete, and then press the button to remove the road from the alignment. This road will be permanently deleted and cannot be undone.

Map View

Use this button to display the map view. From this view you can use the zoom controls to zoom around your drawing so you can find important or relevant data for your alignment such as a POB point. Press the Close View button to return back to the Roads Manager.

Tell me more about ...

Road Settings

Manual Entry - Vertical Profile

Manual Entry - Template

LandXML Cross Sections

Alignment DTM Surface

Alignment Staking - Part 1

Alignment Staking - Part 2

Alignment Slope Staking

- 362 -

Manage Road

The road settings screen is used to help you create, review or modify road elements.

Main Menu

From this screen you can do anyone of the following: l l l l l l l

Define start station

Define start point or start coordinates

Define the

Define the

Choose either a

Choose an optional

Select a DXF Reference Line

Define Start Station

Each road has to have a starting station defined. The starting station will place the station sign automatically for you after you enter the station. Stations generally are measured in 100 foot intervals when working in feet, and measured in 1000 metre intervals when in metric projects.

There are three station format settings that you can choose from: 0+000.000, 0+00.00, or 0.000. You can change this by going to the Main Menu | Settings |

QSB or LandXML importer , you can stake to the

or by pressing the Alignment C/L button and selecting Settings.

- 363 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Note: Positive or negative start stations are valid.

Define Start Point or Coordinates

Every road that you create needs to have a starting location defined. You have two options available to define this location.

Start ID

If you have a point stored in your project's database that is also the start point for the alignment, you can use this point as the start location. Simply enter the point number in the Start Pnt field, or use the point chooser to select it from the map. Once you've selected the point, the point's Northing and Easting values will be displayed. At this point, the elevation is not needed because the profile is what defines the elevations along the road.

When you use the point chooser or enter a point id, all that will happen is the coordinates for the point are written to the alignment file. The next time you open the alignment file, you will no longer see the point ID that was used, you will only see the coordinate values.

Enter Coordinates

If you don't have a point that defines the start location, you can define it by entering a Northing and

Easting value. You have to leave Start ID field blank if you want to enter coordinates.

Manual Entry - Alignment C/L

Main Menu | Roads Manager | Edit Road | Alignment C/L

To define the centerline data press the Alignment C/L button which will open a menu. On this menu select Edit to open the C/L Editor.

If you're entering a new road the C/L Editor will not have any elements listed. In the example shown below there are three elements defined; 2 tangents and 1 curve element. In the element list, it will always display the length of the element and its end station. Furthermore, all elements that are defined will be displayed in the Map so you can visually confirm that the geometry is correct.

Delete C/L Alignment

You cannot delete a C/L Alignment once it has been created.

- 364 -

Main Menu

The C/L Editor can display a view of the map along the bottom. This view can be toggled on and off by pressing the Show Map/Hide Map button.

If you would like to zoom into or pan around the map, press the Map View button which will display zoom and pan controls. Press the Close View button when you want to return the C/L Editor.

Adding an Element

To add an element to a road you need to use the Add Element button. Once you press this you will see 5 options appear that will help you define the different elements supported by Layout.

l l l l l

Line (Tangent)

Curve

Spiral

Spiral-Curve-Spiral

Chain

Tip: When you're prompted for a distance or direction, you can always use the

distance

and

direction

recall features just like you would for COGO calculations.

Line (Tangent) Element

In the Line Element editor, gray fields indicate fields that cannot be edited. All other non gray fields can be edited by the user. When you enter your known values and have confirmed their correctness, press OK to save these values, or press Cancel to exit without saving.

- 365 -

MicroSurvey Layout

A tangent is defined by a direction and length. There are four ways you can define the tangent and they are explained in further detail below.

Direction and Length

If you know these two values, you can enter them in their respective fields. You will see that the end coordinates and end station will be computed automatically.

End Nothing and End Easting

If you know the coordinates for the end of the tangent, you can enter them in the End Northing and

End Easting fields. Once you've done this, the direction, length and end station fields will be updated automatically.

Direction and End Station

If you know the direction and end station of the tangent, enter these known values in their respective fields. Once you've done this, the length and end coordinate fields will be updated automatically.

End Point ID

If you have a point in the project database that defines the end of the tangent, you can enter the point number in the ID field, or use the point chooser to select it from the map. Once you've done this, the direction, length, end coordinates and end station fields will automatically be updated.

Curve Element

When you select this option your will see the curve editor with most of the fields being empty.

- 366 -

Main Menu

Define Known Data

Enter the Known Data

1. You always have to define the direction for the curve, either right or left.

2. Enter your know values.

3. You don't have to specify the PC point, the function will assume that you're beginning at the end of the last leg.

4. A PC Tangent direction will automatically be computed based on the previous tangent. You can always over ride this value if you need to define a non-tangent curve.

5. Press OK to save your inputted values, Cancel to exit without saving.

Spiral Element

When you select this option your will see the spiral editor. This will help you define a spiral segment for your alignment.

- 367 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Define Known Data

To solve for this type of element you need to know: l l l

Spiral Direction

End Radius

Spiral Length

In the editor, gray fields indicate fields that cannot be edited. All other non gray fields can be edited by the user.

Press OK to save your inputted values, Cancel to exit without saving.

- 368 -

Main Menu

Spiral – Curve – Spiral

Define Known Data

To solve for this type of element you need to know: l l l l l

Spiral Direction

Spiral In Length

Spiral Out Length

Curve Radius

Curve Length

In the editor, gray fields indicate fields that cannot be edited. All other non gray fields can be edited by the user.

Press OK to save your inputted values, Cancel to exit without saving.

Chain

Use this option if you want to select points or figures in your drawing to define the centerline and the profile (optional).

When you select the Add Figure option you will be taken to the map screen where you can select a figure.

You can also add points individually by using the Add Points(s) button.

Press OK to save the chain, press Cancel to exit without saving.

- 369 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Note:

You should only select Tangent sections for a Chain. If you Add a Figure which contains arcs or splines, the chain will straight-line any curved segments, so the resulting

Chain length and stationing will not be the same as the original Figure.

Chain Element

When you return to the road editor you will see that a chain element has been created. Chain elements differ from regular elements in that even though a chain can be made up of line and curve elements, it will appear in the list as a chain.

Auto Profile

After you press OK, you will be asked if you would like to create a vertical profile based on the chain point's elevation. If you select Yes, then you will be prompted for a Profile Name.

Vertical Profile

As mentioned above, a vertical profile can optionally be created automatically. If this option is chosen by the user, PVI points will be created for the profile. Each PVI point represents the points that make up the chain.

- 370 -

Main Menu

Manual Entry - Vertical Profile

Main Menu | Roads Manager | Edit Road | Vertical Profile

To create your vertical profile for your alignment, press the Vertical Profile button. When you do this you will see two options: New and Edit. Press New to create a new profile. If you want to edit an existing profile, then you need to select the profile, and then press the Edit button.

Delete Profile

You cannot delete a profile once it is created.

Profile Editor Overview

When you create a new profile you will see the profile editor. The Add Element button is the command center for you profiles and it allows you to add profile elements: l l l l

PVI

Parabolic Curve

Unsymmetric Parabolic Curve

Circular Curve

Once created, you can always edit and delete each element.

- 371 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Station Check

Use this button to calculate an elevation along your vertical profile at the station you define. In the example below you will see the station entered was 0+150, and the computed elevation is 382.750.

The station check button can be used with all vertical element types.

High / Low Display

When you use the High / Low button it will compute the high and low points for your vertical profile.

- 372 -

Main Menu

In the example above you can see that the high and low points are listed in the grid. This option can be used to display the high / low information for all vertical profile elements.

PVI Element

PVI elements are essentially straight grade segments that change direction at grade breaks. Each grade break (PVI) has to be defined by a station and elevation.

- 373 -

MicroSurvey Layout

When you select to add a PVI element you will have two fields available where the station and the elevation at that station can be entered. Once you have a minimum of two PVI points, the slope of the line will be displayed.

Parabolic Curve Element

This option allows you to enter an equal tangent vertical parabolic curve. At a minimum you need to know the PVI Station, PVI Elevation, and Curve Length for your vertical curve. Furthermore if this is a new profile you need to define a PVI point before the vertical curve, as well as define a PVI, Parabolic, or Unsymmetrical Parabolic curve after the vertical curve. Elements are needed before and after the vertical curve element so the profile editor can calculate the tangents.

- 374 -

Main Menu

In the example you will see that a PVI was established for the beginning of the vertical profile. Then the PVI for the vertical curve was defined, as well as another parabolic curve. You will also notice that if you click a Para element, its location will be displayed in the display area.

Station Check

You can also do a station check on a parabolic vertical curve. Simply press the Sta Check button and enter the station you would like to compute an elevation for.

High / Low Calculation

With all vertical curves, the high or low point can be computed. For example, if we use the High/Low button to compute this information you will see the high point is at station 0+154.167 at an elevation of

382.761m.

- 375 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Unsymmetrical Parabolic Curve Element

This option allows you to enter an unequal tangent vertical parabolic curve. As a minimum you need to know the PVI Station, PVI Elevation, Curve Length In, and Curve Length Out for your vertical curve. Furthermore if this is a new profile you need to define a PVI point before the vertical curve, as well as define a PVI, Parabolic, or Unsymmetrical Parabolic curve after the vertical curve. Elements are needed before and after the vertical curve element so the profile editor can calculate the tangents.

- 376 -

Main Menu

In the example you will see that a PVI was established for the beginning of the vertical profile. Then the PVI for the unsymmetrical vertical curve was defined, as well as another PVI element. You will also notice that if you click an Unsym element, its location will be displayed in the display area.

Station Check

You can also do a station check on an unsymmetrical vertical curve. Simply press the Sta Check button and enter the station you would like to compute an elevation for.

High / Low Calculation

With all vertical curves, the high or low point can be computed. For example, if we use the High/Low button to compute this information you will see the High point is at station 0+233.333 at an elevation of 382.786m.

- 377 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Circular Curve

This option allows you to enter an equal tangent vertical circular curve. At a minimum you need to know the PVI Station, PVI Elevation, and Curve Radius for your vertical curve. Furthermore if this is a new profile you need to define a PVI point before the vertical curve, as well as define a PVI, Parabolic, or circular after the vertical curve. Elements are needed before and after the vertical curve element so the profile editor can calculate the tangents.

- 378 -

Main Menu

In the example you will see that a PVI was established for the beginning of the vertical profile. Then the first vertical circular curve was defined, as well as two more circular curve elements after and to finish it off, a final PVI is needed. You will also notice that if you click a circular curve element, its location will be displayed in the display area.

Station Check

You can also do a station check on a vertical circular curve. Simply press the Station Check button and enter the station you would like to compute an elevation for.

High / Low Calculation

With all vertical circular curves, the high or low point can be computed. For example, if we use the

High/Low button to compute this information you will see the High point is at station 0+164.199 at an elevation of 2.661m.

- 379 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Manual Entry - Template

Main Menu | Roads Manager | Edit Road | Template

You can define templates that will be used to create a cross section along your alignment. You can create new templates, and edit existing ones you've created. Each template can have unlimited zones right or left of the centerline. Each template can contain zone modifiers that can help you define sections that need widening or superelevation.

When you create a new template you will be asked for a template name. After you enter the name you will see the Template editor.

- 380 -

Main Menu

Add Zones

Many software programs refer to templates as having segments, in Layout they are referred to as zones. Zones contain horizontal and vertical components, and these zones are located on the right or left of the template centerline.

You first need to define what side of the centerline your zone belongs to: Left or Right.

Once you do that you can choose the Add Zone command from the Commands button.

When you select the add zone command you will see your first zone item appear in the grid area. You need to enter a horizontal width distance and then specify how you will be defining the slope for the zone. The slope for the zone can be defined by entering a slope value (%) or a vertical distance also referred to as a delta Z. In the example shown below you will see that three zones have been defined for the left side of the template.

By default all new zones are attached to the zone found furthest from the centerline.

- 381 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Delete Zones

Any zone that is highlighted in the zone list can be deleted by using the Delete Zone command.

There is no undo, so be careful when you use this command.

Clear All

At any time, you can clear the zone list so you can start over. To do this use the Clear Zone command. There is no undo, so be careful when you use this command.

Mirror Zones

There are two variations of this command. You can mirror your zones from left to right, or right to left.

In our example from above, when the Mirror Left to Right command is used, the zones are duplicated on the right side of the template.

- 382 -

Main Menu

Note: Depending on what side you're displaying, you will only see the zones listed for that side of the template. To see the zones for the other side you need to change to the opposite side using the Left

Zone and Right Zone buttons.

Move Zone

Zones can be shifted around by moving them in or out form the centerline. To do this, use the Move In and Move Out commands.

View Zone Modifiers

The template you define is a typical cross section for the entire alignment. You can define changes to the template at specific stations and these changes are referred to as Zone Modifiers. Zone modifiers modify the typical template to allow for deviations such as road widening and super elevations.

This tool is meant to be used when you've defined zone modifiers. Please see the advanced template editing for more information.

Advanced Zone Edit

Advanced editing of your zones is available to give you even more power and flexibility. Being able to modify the zones at specific stations, allow you to create template transitions, widenings and superelevation transitions.

You first need to highlight the zone you want to modify in the zone list. Once you do that press the

Advanced Zone Edit… command. This will then display the zone editor for the zone you've selected, in this example it is zone 3.

- 383 -

MicroSurvey Layout

By default when you create a zone, the width, delta elevation and slope are used from the beginning of the zone to the end. The start and end stations are determined by start and end station defined in the horizontal alignment.

Slopes Modifier

When you use this button you will see the slope modifier page. On this page you can define different modifiers that change the slope or delta Z value for the zone.

Cut/Fill Modifier

When you use this button you will see the cut/fill modifier page. On this page you can define different modifiers that change the cut / fill value for the zone.

Note: This function is currently not implemented fully and is reserved for a future version.

Cut/Fill Slope values from the hinge point can be set in the

Options

screen.

Widths Modifier

When you use this button you will see the widths modifier page. On this page you can define different modifiers that change the width value for the zone.

Advanced Template Editing

Advanced Zone Edit – Widening Example

In this example we will use the template example from the Template section. We want to widen the template at a specific station and change the grade of the template.

- 384 -

Main Menu

The original zone 3 has a constant elevation and width from beginning to end, but we want to modify it to include a section that has a slope and width difference.

The new zone 3 will look like the following example. From station 6+00 to 7+00 the width of the zone transitions from a width of 5' to 10' and the elevation transitions from 0 down to -2'. Then from station

8+00 to 9+-00 it transitions back to the normal width and grade.

Slope Modifier

First you need to highlight the zone that you want to add modifiers to.

Then select the Advanced Zone Edit command from the commands button. This will open the zone modifier screen for the zone. In our example, we'll be modifying zone 3 on the left side of the template.

To add slope modifiers, press the Slopes (#) button. From here you can press the Add button to add modifiers for the zone. The following table shows the information that would have been inputted.

- 385 -

MicroSurvey Layout

You have to define if you are entering a relative vertical change, or want Layout to compute it for you using a slope percent and horizontal distance for the zone. You can do this by selecting the Vert Type and set it to Vertical Distance or Slope.

Press Ok to save the modifiers.

Widths Modifier

First you need to highlight the zone that you want to add modifiers to.

To add width modifiers, press the Widths (#) button. From here you can press the Add button to add modifiers for the zone. The following table shows the information that would have been inputted.

Press Ok to save the modifiers.

- 386 -

Main Menu

Checking Width Modifiers

At any time from the Template editor you can confirm that your modifiers are correct by using the station slider.

If we use our example from above, and want to preview the template at station 6+00, you can do so by entering it in the station field.

If we check station 7+00 you will see that the zone now extends further and drops down.

- 387 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Advanced Zone Editing – Superelevation

In this example we will use the template example from the Template section. We want to add superelevation data to our template so it can be staked in the field. Layout cannot calculate surperelevations; you need to know what delta z or slope the zone should be transitioning for your superelevation section.

To do this we will be adding slope modifiers to Zone 1 L and Zone 1 R.

Labels A to F show the stations where we will be adding modifiers to modify the template so the road transitions from normal crown to full superelevation and back. Note: In this example the superelevation is exaggerated for ease of viewing.

Slope Modifier

First you need to highlight the zone that you want to add modifiers to.

To add slope modifiers, press the Slopes (#) button. From here you can press the Add button to add modifiers for the zone. The following table shows the information that would have been inputted.

- 388 -

Main Menu

Press Ok to save the modifiers.

Checking Width Modifiers

At any time from the Template editor you can confirm that your modifiers are correct by using the station slider.

If we use our example from above, and want to preview the template at station 9+00, you can do so by entering it in the station field. You will see at this station we have a typical road cross section.

- 389 -

MicroSurvey Layout

If we check station 10+78.54 you will see that we are at the full superelevation section.

LandXML Cross Sections

Main Menu | Roads Manager | Edit Road | Cross-Sections

LandXML cross sections are created with desktop software such as Eagle Point, Caice, LDD and many others.

- 390 -

Main Menu

If you import a LandXML file that has cross sections in it, you can immediately go to the Roads Manager and select the road to stake. You will see the roads in the Cross-Sections list. Choose one, then press the Stake Roads button you will see the stake Alignment screen.

Please see the

Stake Alignment

section for more information about using this command.

Alignment DTM Surface

Main Menu | Roads Manager | Edit Road | DTM Surface

If you've imported a surface file, either through the

surface along a defined horizontal alignment.

All you need to do is define the alignment using the Alignment C/L button then select a surface from the surface drop down list found next to the DTM Surface button.

When you press the Stake Road button you will see the alignment screen. In the area where you would normally see your cross section or template, you will now see the surface at the stake station you have defined.

If you enter a Design Offset, it will compute an elevation based on the surface.

- 391 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Alignment Staking - Part 1

There are two things that have to happen before you can stake a road.

1. You have to create an alignment, vertical profile and a template. Or…

2. Import a LandXML file and use XML cross sections to stake from.

Stake from Alignment, Profile and Template.

If you've taken the time to define your alignment, you need to select the vertical profile and template that you want to stake from in the road settings screen.

- 392 -

Main Menu

Use the Stake Road button to start the road staking which will display the Stake Alignment screen.

Station and Station Interval

If you enter a station interval, it will move forward and back along the alignment by this amount when you use the Prev and Next buttons. This interval will start from the station that is currently entered in the Stake Station field.

- 393 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Stake Station

You can also manually enter the station you would like to stake by entering it in the Station field.

Design Offsets

Move Along Template

You can move along the template by using the Left and Right buttons. As you do this the offset from the centerline will be displayed in the Offset field. Furthermore you will see what side of the template you're on by looking at the direction field. You will also note in the template preview, the "x" visually marks the design offset.

Define an Offset

You can define your own offset to stake by entering the value in the Offset field. To enter a Left offset, use a negative value.

- 394 -

Main Menu

Stake Offset and Setback

Stake Offset

By default the Stake Offset will equal the Offset value. The stake offset is designed to help you enter the offset that you want to stake your point at. Sometimes, the contractor asks you to stake a point at a certain distance from the centerline, this will help you do that.

Setback

The setback and stake offset fields work in conjunction with one another. You will note that as you enter a stake offset, a value is computed in the setback field. This value is computed by subtracting the Stake Offset from the Design Offset.

If you know that the offset or setback for a template point is to be a specific value, enter the value in the setback field; the stake offset field will update automatically.

- 395 -

MicroSurvey Layout

You will note that when a setback or stake offset is defined, you will see an orange circle in the preview screen. This circle indicates the location of the setback.

Note: If you want to make sure that you're staking nothing but design points along the template, then make sure the Setback field is equal to 0.0.

Elevation and Vertical Offset

Elevation

The field will show you the computed elevation on the template at the design offset specified. This value can be changed to allow you stake a different elevation.

Vertical Offset

This field works in conjunction with the elevation field. If the user enters a different elevation than the one that was computed on the template, the difference between the elevations is shown in the vertical offset field.

If you know what the vertical offset is for the point you're staking on the template, you can enter it in this field. You will see the elevation for the point update to reflect the offset you defined.

- 396 -

Main Menu

In the template preview screen you will see an orange circle. This circle indicates the location of the vertical offset point that will be staked.

Note: If you want to make sure that you're staking nothing but design points along the template, then make sure the Setback field is equal to 0.0.

Template Preview

You can zoom into your template using the zoom controls. You can also pan the template by tapping on it and dragging it on the screen.

Use the Map button to display the location of the template along you alignment. This will be displayed in the map view window.

Stake Offset

Once you've defined that point you want to stake, you can select the Stake Offset button to start the staking process. When you press this button you will see the staking toolbar. For an explanation of the staking toolbar and alignment staking, please refer to the next section,

Alignment Staking - Part 2

Stake Slope

This is the Stake Slope toggle. Normally you will slope stake from the hinge point on the template, but it is totally up to you. The slope staking feature can be used from any point on the template.

Road Settings

Press this button to return to the road settings screen.

- 397 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Stake from LandXML Cross Sections

To stake cross sections from a LandXML file you first need to import it using the LandXML importer found in the Import Menu.

You can then select the alignment form the map screen to open the Roads Manager, or you can access it form the Roads Menu. In this menu you can select the alignment that has the cross sections, and then press the Road Settings button.

You then have to select the cross section that you want to use by selecting it in the cross sections field.

When you press the Stake Road button you will see the Stake Alignment screen which is described in detail above.

Stake Alignment with a Reference Line

To stake to an Alignment using a Reference Line the user needs to first import in a XML file containing an alignment then a DXF file is needed for the Reference Line information. Use the Importer feature found in the main menu to bring in both data files.

- 398 -

Main Menu

After this is completed go into the Roads Manager to select which road alignment to use. Continue by pressing the Manage Road button to take you to the Road Settings page. The Alignment info should be updated and reflect a valid Start Station and Alignment C/L length. From here the user must define a line by pressing the Select Reference Line button at the bottom of the list of settings.

By pressing this it will take the user to the Map View where you can navigate around the screen to select the appropriate DXF linework to be used in as the Reference Line in the routine. Once selected press the OK button to take you back to the Road Settings page where the label for that line will now be displayed.

Press the Stake Road button if you are satisfied with the selected road alignment and reference line to proceed to the Stake Reference Line setup page.

- 399 -

MicroSurvey Layout

From the Stake Reference Line dialog the user can customize the features work flow by the following settings;

Alignment Station

In this section the user has the ability to set which Station location to start at and the interval distance to use when proceeding to the next station. There are additional settings to further control the moving from one station to another.

The AUTO check box when check ON will automatically move up the next station interval by either incremental or decremental along the alignment after a point has been stored.

The Include Element Transition Points check box when checked ON will stop at the next vertical and horizontal deflection point along the alignment. This will ignore the station interval value to ensure a key transition point is not skipped over.

Reference Line Offsets

Here the user can enter in a Horizontal and Vertical offset value. This offset will be calculated from the point on the referenced line. An interval can also be applied here manually for the horizontal offset value.

When you are satisfied with the values entered press the Stake Reference Line button to continue to the Stake Point screen. After a point has been successfully staked out and stored the routine will go back to the Stake Reference Line window. Alternatively pressing the Cancel if you wish to back out to the Map View screen.

- 400 -

Main Menu

Alignment Offset Staking

Continued from

Alignment Staking ...

From the stake alignment screen, when you press the Stake Offset button if you are staking with a robotic instrument or GNSS you will immediately see the staking toolbar. If you are staking with a conventional instrument you will see the turn-to information first, directing you to the design point.

- 401 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The alignment offset staking process is very similar to normal

point staking

. What is different is you will see the station/offset information about where the prism is in relation to the alignment and more importantly, to the point you're staking.

Staking Method

Turn an Angle: You will see the horizontal angles to the design point and to your actual measurement. This is useful for getting online (left/right) with a conventional total station.

Directional: You will see the move distances (In/Out/Left/Right or N/S/E/W, as well as Cut/Fill) guiding you from the actual measurement to the design point.

Radial: You will see a direction and distance guiding you from the actual measurement to the design point.

Stationing - Absolute: You will see the offset of the actual measurement along the alignment.

Stationing - Relative: You will see the move distances guiding you along the alignment from the actual measurement to the design point.

Staking Information

The station/offset of the design point is indicated directly on the staking toolbar, and also in the

Staking Information screen which you can access by pressing the Info button in the staking toolbar.

The station/offset of the actual measurement is available in the Staking Information screen.

- 402 -

Main Menu

The move or rotate information which will guide you from the actual measurement to the design point is indicated in the

observation toolbar

. You can press the Page button to toggle between various information if you do not see these values. If your measurement is within your defined tolerance of the design point then the text will be green, if not then the text will be red. This information is also available in the Staking Information screen. The type of information shown will vary based on your current

Staking Method.

Template Preview

At any time during your staking you can press the Profile button to see the actual rod position which will be shows as an orange circle, in relation to the template defined for the alignment.

- 403 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Zoom Stake

If you press the Zoom Stake button in the staking toolbar, you will be zoomed in to show you both the design point and the actual measurement. The green circular area surrounding the design point reflects the area where you are within the defined staking tolerances.

- 404 -

Main Menu

Store Point

When you are ready to store the stake point press the Store Point button. You will then see the results for your stakeout.

If you are using GNSS to stake the alignment, then you will not see the Store Point button. Instead, press the Measure button to trigger a measurement and then store the resulting shot.

Press Save Point and Raw Data to store a point for this shot and to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file. By default the description for the stored stake point will equal the station and offset that was being staked.

Press Save Raw Data to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file, without storing a point.

If you press Cancel, nothing is stored or written to the raw file.

Records written to raw file

Following are the records that are written to the raw file when you store a point.

If you do not store a point then the SP (Store Point) record is not recorded as no point was stored in the database.

SP,PN4,N 20000.0068,E 5000.0099,EL100.1038,--0+00.00 C 0.000

CF,ST0.000,OD1,OL0.010,EL100.1038,GD100.0000

OE,ST0.000,OE0.010

DE,PN,N 20000.000,E 5000.000,EL100.000,--

SD,ND-0.007,ED-0.010,LD-0.104

SK,OP1,FP4,AR201.48000,ZE93.10000,SD269.6600,--0+00.00 C 0.000

- 405 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Alignment Slope Staking

Continued from

Alignment Staking ...

When you're staking a point from a template, you can select the Stake Slope button from any point.

However, you will usually slope stake from the hinge points on your template.

When you start slope staking and you measure your first shot, the program computes an intersection between a horizontal plane containing the measurement and the slope defined in the

stake settings

from the hinge point. Layout will then compute a best guess location for the catch point and will tell you how much you need to move. After you measure a second shot, Layout will create an imaginary line between the two shots and intersects the slope from the hinge point. It then computes a new solution for the catch point.

- 406 -

Main Menu

At any time during your staking you can press the Profile button to see the actual rod position which will be shows as an orange circle. You will also see the slope lines from the hinge point.

When you get near the catch point if you press the Zoom Stake button you will see a green circle in the map view representing the area within your specified staking tolerances.

- 407 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Slope Staking Results

When you store your catch point position you will see the results screen. This screen will always report the following:

Cut or Fill Slope: The first line will always tell you if you staked a cut slope or fill slope. It will also display the design slope that was specified and record the actual computed slope that was staked.

- 408 -

Main Menu

Station: This will display the station of the template or cross section, and will show the actual station staked at the catch point.

Hinge Point: This is the distance from the rod position to the hinge point. It will also indicate the vertical distance from rod position to the hinge point. A cut indicates that the hinge point is lower; fill indicates that it is higher than the current rod position.

Center Line: This is the distance from the rod position to the centerline. It will also indicate the vertical distance from rod position to the centerline. A cut indicates that the centerline is lower; fill indicates that it is higher than the current rod position.

Save Shot

Press Save Point and Raw Data store a point for this shot and to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file. By default the description for the stored stake point will equal the station and offset that was being slope staked. An example of an auto generated description is CP 4+00.00 R

22.000. The CP stands for Catch Point.

Press Save Raw Data to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file, without storing a point.

If you press Cancel, nothing is stored or written to the raw file.

Records written to raw file

Following are the records that are written to the raw file when you store a point.

If you do not store the staked point, the SP (Store Point) record will not be recorded as no point was stored in the database.

SP,PN81,N 5002.9770,E 4997.8367,EL99.9829,--CP 0+12.00 L 1.000

SL,ST12.000,OD2,EL99.983,GD99.983,AS0.005,HH0.985,VH0.966,HC1.985,VC0.966,-

CF0,DS1.000000,OB1.019583

SK,OP100,FP81,AR282.28000,ZE90.16000,SD3.6800,--CP 0+12.00 L 1.000

Slope Staking with Offset/Setback

In the Stake Alignment screen if you specify a stake offset or a setback distance, after you store your catch point position you will be asked if you want "Continue with staking the catch point setback?" If you press No, then this will be cancelled.

When you press Yes, you will then see the "Turn To" screen which will stake a position that is offset from the computed catch point. This offset will be equal to the offset you specified in the alignment screen.

- 409 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Now on the staking toolbar you will see the word Stk: Pnt CP Setback which indicates you're currently staking a slope stake setback point.

When you get to the offset position and store the point you will see the results screen once again.

This time, the offsets to the hinge point and centerline will include the offset distance.

- 410 -

Main Menu

The vertical distances that are reported on the results screen are not computed using the current rod position. These values will be in relation to the actual catch point that was staked.

When you store the point you will see that the description that is auto generated for the point will be similar to the following example. REF CP 4+00.00 R 24.00

Records written to raw file

Following are the records that are written to the raw file when you store a point.

- 411 -

MicroSurvey Layout

If you have the Store Staked Point toggle turned off in the stake settings screen, you will see that no

SP record is recorded as no point was stored in the database.

SP,PN5004,N 5007.7522,E 5001.5139,EL100.1445,--CP 0+06.00 L 1.000

SL,ST6.000,OD2,EL100.144,GD100.144,AS-

0.002,HH0.498,VH0.501,HC1.498,VC0.501,CF0,DS1.000000,OB0.994169

SK,OP101,FP5004,AR353.45220,ZE90.23420,SD13.9200,--CP 0+06.00 L 1.000

SP,PN82,N 5007.2194,E 5002.2307,EL102.2842,--REF CP 0+06.00 L 2.000

SR,ST6.000,OD2,EL102.284,GD100.144,AS-

0.002,HH2.390,VH0.501,HC2.387,VC0.501,CF0,DS1.000000,OB0.994169,OL1.000

DE,PNCP Setback,N 5007.078,E 5002.253,EL100.144,--

SD,ND-0.141,ED0.022,LD-2.140

SK,OP101,FP82,AR351.10340,ZE82.00000,SD14.6850,--REF CP 0+06.00 L 2.000

- 412 -

Total Station Reference

OTAL

TATION

EFERENCE

Make and Model Settings

Layout includes instrument and GNSS drivers for most popular brands. This list of supported hardware is constantly changing and for a complete list of supported hardware, please visit the following webpage: http://hardware.microsurvey.com

Total Station Profile

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Total Station Profile

This screen will help you configure your total stating settings such as the make and model of instrument you plan on using and set any desired parameters you may need to use with your instrument.

This option will only be available if you specified Total Station in the

Target Manager topic for more information.

screen and then Edit a profile.

Model and Communication

This allows you to specify the make and model of instrument that will be connected to Layout. You can also specify the communication settings such as baud rate and com port. See the

Model and

Communication

topic for more information.

- 413 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Target Manager

This allows you to create, copy, and delete targets in Layout. You can define a unique backsight and foresight target for example. See the

EDM Settings

This allows you to specify if you will be using prism offsets in Layout and allows you to specify tolerances that will be used to ensure your EDM measurement meet your criteria. See the

EDM Settings

topic for more information.

Search Settings

When using a robotic instrument, you can specify search window parameters. See the

Search Settings

topic for more information.

Model and Communication

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Total Station Profile | Model and Communication

This is where you can specify the make and model of instrument you will be connecting to, as well as specify your communication parameters.

Total Station Make

Use this to select the make of your instrument.

- 414 -

Total Station Reference

Total Station Model

Use this to select the model of your instrument.

Status

This indicates whether Layout is Connected or Not Connected to your instrument.

Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity

If you know the settings of your instrument you can set them here in Layout. They have to match exactly the ones on your instrument or you will get a communications error when you try to connect.

It is important to confirm these settings on your instrument when you're trying to connect

Layout for the first time! Most connection problems occur because the user has specified parameters that don't match the ones on their instrument.

On many data collectors you can select Bluetooth as your communication port. If you select the

Bluetooth port, the traditional serial communication options (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity) will be replaced with a Bluetooth Search function.

Please note that not all Bluetooth-enabled devices will list Bluetooth as a Port option.

In some cases you must configure and use a virtual COM port through Windows CE's internal Bluetooth Settings, for example COM6.

Bluetooth Search

If you set the port to Bluetooth, a Bluetooth Search button will appear. Press the search button to find the device you want to communicate wirelessly with. All devices within range will be listed, choose the one you want to use

The device you selected will be saved into your instrument profile for future use so you do not need to

Search every time.

Bluetooth PIN

After initiating a Bluetooth connection, you will be prompted to enter the PIN (passkey) for the instrument you are connecting to. If your instrument does not need one just leave it blank and continue by pressing OK.

The PIN you enter will be encrypted and stored in your instrument profile.

RC Port

If you are connecting with a Topcon Robot, you can specify which port on your data collector the RC unit is connected to.

- 415 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Radio Settings

Use this to set the communication parameters for your radios or other communication device, such as the channel or frequency. You can also use it to specify a direct connection to Layout instead of using radios. Please see the

Radio Settings

topic for additional information.

Connect

Use this to connect to your instrument after you have specified your communication settings.

If you see the following message, "No communication with instrument. Check settings, cables and power." read the

No Communication

topic for possible causes.

Layout connects successfully, the Status will change to "Connected", and if your instrument supports graphical representation of the level bubble, you will see the

Check Level

screen.

Radio Configuration

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Total Station Profile | Model and Communication | Radio Settings

Use this to specify if you want to connect to your robotic instrument using a direct connection or through the instrument's radios. If you're using a Topcon, you can specify your RC unit as the communication device and assign a COM port for it. Press the Radio Settings to bring up the options for what type of radio you are using to connect to the Topcon instrument.

- 416 -

Total Station Reference

Connection

Direct

This will allow you to connect directly to your instrument through an instrument cable.

Radio

This will allow you to connect to your instrument using external radios. Select your radio channel, if this option is available.

Note: If you are using radios with your instrument but this option is disabled or not available, then pick the Direct option instead.

This will allow Layout and your instrument to communicate through the RC unit.

EDM Settings

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Total Station Profile | EDM Settings

Total Station Toolbar | Instrument Settings | EDM Settings

From here you can specify EDM settings such as prism offsets and measurement modes.

- 417 -

MicroSurvey Layout

EDM Settings

Time Out (s)

Use this to specify the length of time Layout will try to receive a measurement from your instrument.

You may need to set this to a higher number if you're trying to receive measurement in wooded areas or long sights.

Use Default Time Out

If this is checked on Layout will use a default time out value. If you would like to change it you need to uncheck it and update the Time Out field.

Minimum and Maximum

You can specify the minimum and maximum distance that Layout will accept as being valid. Example is if you set this the minimum to 10 feet and you measure 5 feet, Layout will not record the measurement and will display a "Distance out of range" error in the status toolbar.

Guide Light

If your instrument has guide lights you will be able to set their intensity modes here. Please refer to your owner's manual for more information on the different intensities.

Search Settings

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Total Station Profile | Search Settings

Total Station Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Search Settings

- 418 -

Total Station Reference

When using a robotic or motorized instrument you can specify search settings for your instrument.

Search Modes

Some of Layout's search modes are common to all robotic instruments, but there are a few model specific ones. The modes available are:

Relative Window

This allows you to specify a "window" defined by measuring a point at the top right and bottom left corners. If you press the search button, the search limits will be relative to the direction the instrument is currently pointing. In other words if your search window ranges are 30° horizontal and 30° vertical, it will apply this to your current direction. So the search will be limited to an area 15° left, right, up and down from your current direction.

Absolute Window

This allows you to specify an absolute search "center" for your search window. This forces Layout to search in an absolute area defined by the angles set in the search window center fields. Furthermore, the search window range parameters apply to the search window center. For example, let's assume you defined 180° as the horizontal search window center, and the horizontal search window range is 30°. Your instrument will be forced to search in an area 15° left and right of the 180° plate reading. So if your prism is situated at a circle reading of 210°, it would never find you as the instrument would never go past a circle reading of 195° (180+15) when searching.

- 419 -

MicroSurvey Layout

RC-2 Fast Track

If you're using a Topcon instrument, you can set the search mode to RC-2. This will force the instrument to use the RC-2 system for the search.

PS Next

This setting will appear if your Leica instrument has the power search system. Using this setting with

Layout onboard will operate the new directional Power Search function relative to the prism. Pressing the PS button on the right side will force the instrument to start its search turning to the right. If Layout is being operated via a Data Collector and this setting is used the functions will be relative to the

Instrument. So pressing the PS button on the right side will force the instrument to turn to the left.

PS Next (Reversed)

This setting will appear if your Leica instrument has the power search system. Settings it to this will reverse the behaviour of the Power Search directional function. If Layout is being operated onboard then pressing the PS right will turn the instrument left and opposite if Layout is being operated on a data collector.

PS Absolute Window

This setting will appear if your Leica instrument has the power search system. This will force the power search system to do a relative search based on the search window range.

RC-PR

If you're using a Sokkia SRX, you can set the search mode to RC-PR. This will force the instrument to use the RC system for the search.

Search Window Range

Use this to define the upper right corner and lower left corner of your search window. Pressing the measure button will step you through the procedure and it will calculate the horizontal and vertical search range. This range will be applied to the instrument's current direction when the user presses the search button.

Search Window Center

Use this to set an absolute center for your search window. The search window range parameters will be applied to the search window values that were measured. Pressing the measure button will step you through the procedure and it will calculate the horizontal and vertical search range.

Auto search for prism

If this is checked, then if your instrument has lost its lock on the prism, Layout will automatically initiate a search for the prism when the measure button is pressed. You will see the word "Search" on the lock button at the top of the

robotic instrument toolbar

while a search is in progress.

- 420 -

Total Station Reference

Conventional Total Station

When connecting to a conventional total station there are a few things you need to confirm before connecting to Layout.

You need to know what the communication parameters are set to on the instrument. Please take the time to find what the following settings are set to on the instrument: Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity.

Because of all the different instruments available, we cannot provide help on retrieving these settings from your instrument. Please refer to your owner's manual or contact technical support from your equipment manufacturer.

Total Station Profile

Once you know the settings, you can connect Layout to the instrument. If you just installed Layout you can start the program and follow the prompts until you get to the

screen.

From there, select Total Station as the Instrument Type, and then press the Add button to create a new Instrument Profile. Name the profile for your instrument, and then press the Edit button to access the

screen to configure your profile. From there choose the Model

and Communication button to configure Layout.

You can also access this screen by going to Main Menu | Connect | Instrument Selection and choose total station.

Select Make and Model

Layout uses a smart driver that will poll the instrument to see what commands it supports. Because of this you will see that in the Model section we don't list every instrument built by the manufacturer. If you're unsure of what make and model to choose visit our website and use the online helpdesk support center to do a search for your instrument.

Communication Settings

Confirm the settings so they match the settings from your instrument. If you don't know what the settings on the instrument are, you can always try the Default Comm Settings button.

Other Settings

On the

screen, you can review the other options to set some additional parameters for your instrument.

- 421 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Connect to Instrument

If you're not connected to the instrument you will see a status of "Not Connected" displayed above the Connect to Instrument button. When you're ready to connect make sure you have done the following:

1. Powered on the instrument

2. Levelled the instrument

3. Compensated the instrument.

4. Connected the data cable from the instrument to your data collector.

Once you have done all four steps, you can press the Connect to Instrument button. If you see a status of "Connected" displayed above the Connect to Instrument button then you have successfully connected.

Getting Started

To start taking measurement you need to exit out the Total Station Configuration screen by pressing close button. Depending on the instrument you connected to you will have different options available.

Please review the

Instrument Toolbar

topic for more information.

Tip: You can use the enter key on your device to take a measurement. For example, if your Measure

Mode is set to Measure and Store and you press the enter key, your instrument will take a measurement.

Robotic Total Station

When connecting to a robotic total station there are a few things you need to confirm before connecting to Layout.

- 422 -

Total Station Reference

Create Total Station Profile

Once you know the settings, you can connect Layout to the instrument. If you just installed Layout you can start the program and follow the prompts until you get to the

screen.

screen to configure your profile. From there choose the Model

and Communication button to configure Layout.

You can also access this screen by going to Main Menu | Connect | Instrument Selection and choose total station.

Select Make and Model

Layout uses a smart driver that will poll the instrument to see what commands it supports. Because of this you will see that in the Model section we don't list every instrument built by the manufacturer. If you're unsure of what model and make to choose visit our website and use the online helpdesk support center to do a search for your instrument.

Communication Settings

Layout has updated its Bluetooth connection process to save all previously connected devices in a convenient pull down list. To connect to a Bluetooth device from the Instrument Selection screen choose the type of device you wanting to connect to and Click "Add" button. This will prompt the user to give the device a unique name and then proceed to the Instrument Profile screen. Now click on the

"Model and Communication" button to take you to the next screen where it will prompt the user for the make and model of the device you wish to connect to. Press the "Bluetooth Device List" button to take you to the BT device List screen where you can Search for, Edit or Delete a device.

- 423 -

MicroSurvey Layout

- 424 -

Total Station Reference

Other Settings

On the

Robotic Instrument Toolbar

screen, you can review the other options to set some additional parameters for your instrument.

- 425 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Connect to Instrument

1. Powered on the instrument and radios

2. Leveled the instrument

3. Compensated the instrument

4. Connected the data cable from the instrument to one radio, and your data collector to the other radio

Getting Started

To start taking measurement you need to exit out the Total Station Configuration screen by pressing the Connect button. Depending on the instrument you connected to you will have different options available. Please review the

topic for more information.

No Communication

When trying to communicate with your instrument you will see sometimes see a "No communication

with instrument. Check settings, cables and power." error message if Layout can't make a connection with your instrument.

Usually this happens when your communication parameters are not the same on the instrument and in Layout. You need to check these settings again to make sure they're correct.

This can also happen if you have a bad cable. If you're using a robotic instrument you might have setup your radios incorrectly.

Total Station Settings

Total Station Toolbar | Instrument Settings

- 426 -

Total Station Reference

Use the vertical scroll bar along the side to access additional instrument settings if they cannot all fit on screen at the same time.

Please note that not every instrument supports each of the following functions, so you may not see all of the following buttons when connected to your total station.

Level Instrument

This will open the

Check Level

screen, where you can check how level your instrument is.

Instrument Information

When this is pressed, we will display the current battery status of your instrument. Note, not all instruments support this.

EDM Settings

Use this to set the EDM mode for your instrument. Every manufacturer has different measurement modes available but we will list only those that your instrument supports. Please refer to your instrument manual for more information on the EDM modes your instrument supports. Any time you change your EDM Mode, Layout writes a comment into the raw file indicating which mode is being used.

Set Angle

Use this to open the

Set Angle

screen where you can view the current angles and turn or flop your motorized instrument.

- 427 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Auto-Center On / Off

Use this to automatically center the map when a point is shot. If turned on, whenever you take a measurement, the current prism location will always appear in the center of your map display.

ATR On / Off

Use this to turn on and off your instruments Auto Target Recognition feature.

Laser Pointer On / Off

This turns on and off the instrument's red laser pointer.

Guide Lights On / Off

This will turn on and off your instrument's guide lights.

Instrument Joystick

This is the Total Station Joystick function. When activated you will be able to move your motorized instrument to the left, right, up and down by using the joystick touch-screen. There are three speeds that can be activated: slow, medium, and fast. The smaller inside blue buttons activate the slowest turn mode, and the larger outside blue buttons activate the fastest turn mode. To stop the instrument from turning, simply press the red Stop button at the center. The directions assume you are at the

pole looking at the instrument. Pressing the right buttons will turn the instrument to your right, pressing the up buttons will turn the scope up, etc.

Instrument Connect / Disconnect

Use this to connect or disconnect Layout from the instrument. When you are connected to the instrument you will see the Disconnect Instrument button.

Rotate Instrument

Total Station Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Rotate Instrument

You can access this screen by pressing the Rotate Instrument button on the

Leica version of the Target Manager topic .

screen.

- 428 -

Total Station Reference

Horizontal and Vertical Angles

Use these two fields to enter in angles that will be used by the Set Angle buttons.

Move Absolute

Use this to turn the instrument to a plate reading that you’ve entered in the HA or VA fields. For example if you enter 45°30’30" for the HA and 90°10’00" for the VA, pressing the Absolute button will turn your instrument so the plate reading equals these values.

Move Relative

Use this to turn an angle to the right or left of the current instrument plate reading. Positive values will be added to the current plate reading, negative values will be subtracted. Enter your values in the HA and VA fields.

Turn +90°

Pressing this will force your instrument to turn 90 degrees to the right.

Turn -90°

Pressing this will force your instrument to turn 90 degrees to the left.

Flip Scope

This will plunge the scope and reverse the direction for you.

- 429 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Check Level

Total Station Toolbar | Settings | Level Instrument

If your instrument supports it, you can check to see how level your instrument is.

Plummet Intensity

If your instrument has a laser plummet or laser pointer, Layout can toggle those functions on or off.

On some models of total station this feature is turned on automatically.

Division

You can now adjust the sensitivity of your display to show 20, 30, and 60 second intervals.

Tolerance

You can now set a tolerance for the level bubble sensor. If you exceed that tolerance then you will receive a warning message that indicates your instrument is out of level. You can also set the tolerance level to OFF, which basically turns off the tilt compensator on the instrument. Please note that turning the compensator off can greatly affect the quality of the data surveyed.

Check Level Every Shot

Use this option to force our software to check instrument level before every measurement. The default is off.

- 430 -

Total Station Reference

Basic Measure

Total Station Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Basic Measure

Total Station Onboard

The Basic Measure mode is a quick way for the user to setup and take a quick measurement without having a Project or a total station setup and provides a direct view of the angular and distance values.

However using this mode will not allow the observation to be stored to the database or RAW file.

Options

Plate Angle

Users can define a desired plate angle to be applied to the current orientation.

Set Laser Pointer

Toggles Laser Pointer ON/OFF

Target Manager

Target Manager allows the users to toggle between Prisms and EDM modes.

Note: Basic Measure mode does not take Target Height into consideration.

Measure

Initiates an observation from the Total Station.

- 431 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Pressing this button with Layout onboard Total Station will take the user to the Project Manager.

Target Manager

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager

The Target Manager is a place where you can manage your EDM (electronic distance measurement) targets. You can create, edit, copy, and delete targets.

The Target Manager is divided into 2 sections: Backsight and Foresight.

Note: Leica users should refer to the

Target Manager: Backsight

Use the Backsight screen to define your backsight target and enter a backsight target height.

Target

Press this button to select a backsight target from the Prism Selection window.

Target Height

Enter the height of your target here.

Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default height to this Target

Height field. The default height is defined in the

screen.

- 432 -

Total Station Reference

EDM Mode

Use this field to select the EDM Mode you would like to use. You will only be able to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type.

Prism Constant

This field will display whatever prism constant that you entered for the selected target.

This records the settings you have just made, closes the Target Manager, and returns you to the

MapView.

Target List

Press this button to access the

. The Target List consists of user-defined and default instrument targets. Here you can create, copy, edit, and delete targets.

Default Settings

Press this button to access the

screen. This is where you define the default target heights.

Cancel

Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the

MapView.

Target Manager: Foresight

Use the Foresight screen to select the foresight target and enter a target height.

- 433 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Target

Press this button to select a foresight target from the Prism Selection window.

Target Height

Enter the height of your foresight target here.

Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default target height to this Tar-

get Height field. The default height is defined in the

screen.

EDM Mode

Use this field to select the EDM Mode you would like to use. Typically you will want to select an EDM

Mode that corresponds to your target type.

Use Temp. Height

Press this button to activate the Temporary Height function (button is active in the above image). To enable the temporary height be used, you must press the Use Temp. Height button. Once activated, the following measurement will use this temporary height but it will be a one-time measurement, and then the system will immediately revert back to the height defined in the Target Height field. This is handy if you need to take a quick shot using a different height such as when measuring an invert.

Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default Temporary height to this Target Height field. The default height is defined in the

screen

- 434 -

Total Station Reference

Prism Constant

This field will display whatever prism offset that you entered for the selected target.

This records the settings you have just made, closes the Target Manager, and returns you to the

MapView.

Cancel

Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the

MapView.

Prism Selection Window

Press the button labelled with the desired prism to use to set it as the Prism for either the backsight or foresight.

Target List

Press this button to access the

Click here for help with Leica Targets

. Here you can create, copy, edit, and delete targets.

Cancel

Press this button to go back to the Target Manager window.

Target List

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Target List

- 435 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The Target List is where you can create, edit, copy, and delete targets. The Target List comes with 2 default targets (Default Prism and Default Reflectorless) but you can create as many more as you like. All targets are saved in the Settings.xml file and is located in the Programs folder.

You are not permitted to delete or edit a default target but you certainly can copy one and edit the copy.

New

Tap on this button to access the

New Target

dialog. Here you can create a new target.

Edit

Tap on a target to select it. Then press the Edit button to access the

Edit Target

dialog. Default targets cannot be edited.

Delete

Tap on a target to select it. Then press the Delete button to delete the selected target. You will receive a warning message that you must acknowledge before deletion is complete. Default targets cannot be deleted.

Copy

Tap on a target to select it. Then press the Copy button. This will open the

Edit Target

dialog and you can then edit the copied parameters.

- 436 -

Total Station Reference

Close

Pressing this button returns you to the Target Manager screen.

New Target

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Target List | New

Use this option to create a new target. Provide the new target with a unique name, a prism constant, and select an icon to represent your new target.

Click here for help creating a new Leica Geosystems target.

Target Name

Use this field to either edit or enter a new name for the target you are editing.

Target Type

There are two target types available to select. Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset. This can be a round prism, 360, mini, etc. RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to use a designated reflector.

Prism Icon

Use this field to select an icon for your new target.

- 437 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Prism Constant

This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector. Your prism will have a published prism constant (also called and offset).

Save

Press this button to store your new changes to the Settings.xml file, and return you to the

screen.

Cancel

Press this button to cancel creating a new target. You will be returned to the

Click here for help on editing a Leica Geosystems target.

screen.

Edit Target

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Target List | Edit

Use this option to edit an existing target. You will also see this display after you copy an existing target.

Target Name

Use this field to either edit or enter a new name for the target you are editing.

- 438 -

Total Station Reference

Target Type

Prism Icon

Use this field to select an icon for your new target.

Prism Constant (mm)

This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector. Your prism will have a published offset.

Save

Press this button to store your new changes to the Settings.xml file, and return you to the

screen.

Cancel

Press this button to cancel creating a new target. You will be returned to the

screen.

Default Settings

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Default Settings

The Default Settings screen is where you can define the default target heights for prism targets, RL

(reflectorless) targets, and a temporary height. The temporary height value is used for taking a onetime measurement using the height value entered in this field. After the measurement is completed, the system will revert back to using the current target height.

- 439 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Prism Height

Enter your most common prism height into this field. When you press the Use Default Height button in the

screen, this value will populate the Target Height field. This is convenient when you have a standard prism height and want to assign it quickly.

Important Note:

You must be in a prism measure mode to be able to use the Default Height button in the

screen and have it use a default prism height.

RL Height

Enter your most common ReflectorLess (RL) height into this field. When you press the Use Default

Height button in the

screen, this value will populate the Target Height field with this default height.

Important Note:

You must be using a reflectorless measure mode to populate this field using the

Default Height button in the Target Manager screen, and have it use the default reflectorless height.

Temporary Height

The temporary height function works as a one-time measurement using the height entered into this field. After the measurement has completed, the target height will revert back to the height that had been defined in the Target Height field. This is very handy when you want to take a quick one-time measurement such as for when measuring an invert.

- 440 -

Total Station Reference

Set instrument prism constant to zero

If this has a check mark in the box, a prism constant of zero will be uploaded to your instrument. The offsets specified in the foresight and backsight targets will be applied to the measurements when received by Layout. Remove the check mark if you don't want Layout to modify your instrument's prism offset. Not all instruments support this feature.

When you connect your instrument to Layout, special notes are recorded in the raw file regarding prism offsets.

If you have the ”Set Instrument” toggle turned on and your instrument supports this feature, Layout will set your instrument's prism offset to zero so no correction will be applied to the measurement.

Then once Layout receives this uncorrected measurement, it will use the values you specified in the prism offset fields and adjust the distance accordingly. For example, if you specified an offset of

30mm, Layout will upload an offset of zero to your instrument and apply the 30 mm offset to the measurement after it is received. In your raw file you will see the following note:

--Layout Prism: 30mm Instrument Prism: 0mm

Most prism offset are specified in millimeters. Layout will make the necessary conversions so the proper adjustment is applied.

If Layout can't set the prism offset on your instrument, it usually can't read it either. Since a prism offset wasn't uploaded, we don't know what prism offset is set on the instrument. So we indicate this by writing to the raw file that the instrument prism offset is "unknown".

--Layout Prism: 30mm Instrument Prism: Unknown

When this happens you will usually want to confirm what offset are currently configured on your instrument in regards to prism offsets.

Special Notes:

- When using instruments that don't support uploading of prism constants, be sure not to double up your prism offsets by applying it in the instrument and Layout at the same time.

- Since prism offsets are so important, on the measurement progress meter you will see what offset is being applied to your measurement.

Pressing this button will save your changes in this dialog, and return you to the

Cancel

Pressing this button will ignore your changes in this dialog and return you to the

Target Manager .

- 441 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Target Manager: Leica Instruments

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager

The Target Manager is a place where you can manage your EDM (electronic distance measurement) targets. You can create, edit, copy, and delete targets. Leica Geosystems uses a different method for determining prism offsets as they have a value called a Leica Constant. See the help on the

New

screens for information on how to calculate a Leica Constant.

The Target Manager is divided into 2 sections: Backsight and Foresight.

Target Manager: Backsight

Use the Backsight screen to define your backsight target, choose a measure mode, and enter a backsight target height. Tap on the Backsight tab at the top of the screen to access the Backsight section

Target

Use this field to select a backsight target from the

Target Height

Enter the height of your target here.

Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default Target height to this Tar-

get Height field. The default height is defined in the

screen.

- 442 -

Total Station Reference

EDM Mode

Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use. Typically you will want to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type.

Leica Constant

This field will display the Leica constant associated with your target. See the

New

Target Manager , and returns you to the

Help for an explanation of how to compute a Leica constant. This will be especially important if you are using a non-Leica target.

This records the settings you have just made, closes the

MapView.

Target List

Press this button to access the

. Here you can create, copy, edit, and delete targets.

Cancel

Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the

MapView.

Target Manager: Foresight

Use the Foresight screen to select the foresight target, choose a measure mode, and enter a target height. You also have the option of using a temporary target height. Tap on the Foresight tab at the top of the screen to access the Foresight section.

- 443 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Target

Use this field to select a foresight target.

Target Height

Enter the height of your foresight target here.

Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default height to this Target

Height field. The default height is defined in the

screen.

Use Temp. Height

Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default height to this Target

Height field. The default height is defined in the

screen.

EDM Mode

Use this field to select the EDM Mode you would like to use. Typically you will want to select an EDM

Mode that corresponds to your target type.

Leica Constant

This field will display the Leica constant associated with your target. See the

New

Help for an explanation of how to compute a Leica constant. This will be especially important if you are using a non-Leica target.

This records the settings you have just made, closes the Target Manager, and returns you to the

MapView.

Target List

Press this button to access the

. Here you can create, copy, edit, and delete targets.

Cancel

Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the

MapView.

- 444 -

Total Station Reference

Press the button labelled with the desired prism to use to set it as the Prism for either the backsight or foresight.

Target List

Press this button to access the

. Here you can create, copy, edit, and delete targets.

Cancel

Press this button to go back to the Target Manager window.

Target List: Leica

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Target List

The Target List is where user-defined and default Leica targets are kept. The Target List is where you can create, edit, copy, and delete targets. The Leica instruments Target List comes with 9 default

Leica targets. You cannot edit or delete a default Leica target but you can copy a default target and edit the copy. All targets are saved in the Settings.xml file, and is located in the Programs folder.

- 445 -

MicroSurvey Layout

You are not permitted to delete or edit a default target but you certainly can copy one and edit the copy.

New

Tap on this button to access the

New Target

dialog. Here you can create a new target.

Edit

Tap on a target to select it. Then press the Edit button to access the

dialog. Default targets cannot be edited.

Delete

Copy

Tap on a target to select it. Then press the Copy button. This will open the

Edit Target

dialog and you can then edit the copied parameters.

Close

Pressing this button returns you to the Target Manager screen.

New Target: Leica

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Target List | New

- 446 -

Total Station Reference

Use this option to create a new target for your Leica Geosystems instrument. Provide the new target with a unique name, define the target type, and enter the Leica constant. Leica uses a different prism offset method than other manufacturers and you should familiarized yourself with how they are computed. See the Leica Constant section below for more information.

Target Name

Use this field to either edit or enter a new name for the target you are creating.

Target Type

Prism Icon

The mandatory icon for any new Leica target must have the User Defined prism icon. This is a Leica instrument requirement and therefore cannot be changed.

Leica Constant (mm)

Leica prism constants differ from non-Leica prism constants. In summary, Leica’s prism constant of

0mm is equal to -34.4mm absolute prism constant relative to the plumb line. A simple formula to explain the relationship:

Leica Constant (for non-Leica prisms) = Absolute Constant + 34.4mm, or

Absolute Constant (for Leica prisms) = Leica Constant – 34.4mm

- 447 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Examples:

1. SECO -30mm offset prism a. Leica Constant = -30mm + 34.4mm = 4.4mm

b. Absolute Constant = -30mm

2. SECO 0mm offset prism a. Leica Constant = 0mm + 34.4mm = 34.4mm

b. Absolute Constant = 0mm

3. Leica GPR1 round prism a. Absolute Constant = 0mm - 34.4mm = -34.4mm

b. Leica Constant = 0mm

4. Leica GRZ4 360° prism a. Absolute Constant = 23.1mm - 34.4mm = -11.3mm

b. Leica Constant = 23.1mm

It is strongly recommended that you test your use of prism constants on a known baseline to be sure that your non-Leica prism is in the true zero prism system.

Absolute Constant (mm)

This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector. Use the formula in the Leica Constant section above to calculate the Leica constant. Enter that value in the Leica Constant field and see the Absolute constant be automatically computed for you.

Save

Press this button to store your new changes to the Settings.xml file, and return you to the Target List screen.

Cancel

Press this button to cancel creating a new target. You will be returned to the Target List screen.

Edit Target: Leica

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Target List | Edit

- 448 -

Total Station Reference

Use this option to edit an existing user-defined target or edit a copy of a Leica instrument target. You will also see this display after you copy an existing target. Leica uses a different prism offset method than other manufacturers and you should familiarized yourself with how they are computed. See the

Leica Constant section below for more information.

Target Name

Use this field to either edit or enter a new and unique name for the target you are editing.

Target Type

There are two target types available. Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset or prism constant. This can be a round prism, 360, mini, etc. RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable, and you do not wish to or cannot use a designated reflector.

Prism Icon

When creating Leica instrument targets, the prism icon must be User Entered, and that's why you are not permitted to edit the target's icon. This is a Leica instrument requirement and therefore cannot be changed.

Leica Constant (mm)

Leica prism constants differ from non-Leica prism constants. In summary, Leica’s prism constant of

0mm is equal to -34.4mm absolute prism constant relative to the plumb line. A simple formula to explain the relationship:

Leica Constant (for non-Leica prisms) = Absolute Constant + 34.4mm, or

- 449 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Absolute Constant (for Leica prisms) = Leica Constant – 34.4mm

Examples:

1. SECO -30mm offset prism a. Leica Constant = -30mm + 34.4mm = 4.4mm

b. Absolute Constant = -30mm

2. SECO 0mm offset prism a. Leica Constant = 0mm + 34.4mm = 34.4mm

b. Absolute Constant = 0mm

3. Leica GPR1 round prism a. Absolute Constant = 0mm - 34.4mm = -34.4mm

b. Leica Constant = 0mm

4. Leica GRZ4 360° prism a. Absolute Constant = 23.1mm - 34.4mm = -11.3mm

b. Leica Constant = 23.1mm

It is strongly recommended that you test your use of prism constants on a known baseline to be sure that your non-Leica prism is in the true zero prism system.

Absolute Constant (mm)

The Absolute Constant or more commonly known as the Prism Constant defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector. Use the formula in the Leica

Constant section above to calculate the Leica constant. Enter that value in the Leica Constant field and see the Absolute constant be automatically computed for you.

Save

Press this button to store your target edits. Targets are stored to the Settings.xml file, and you are returned to the

screen.

Cancel

Press this button to cancel creating a new target. You will be returned to the

GNSS Configuration (Reference)

screen.

Default Settings: Leica

Total Station Toolbar | Target Manager | Default Settings

- 450 -

Total Station Reference

The Default Settings screen is where you can define the default target heights for prism targets, RL

Prism Height

Enter your most common prism height into this field. When you press the Use Default Height button in the Target Manager screen, this value will populate the Target Height field. This is convenient for when you have a standard prism height and want to assign it quickly.

Important Note: You must be in a prism measure mode to be able to use the Default Height button in the Target Manager screen and have it use a default prism height.

RL Height

Enter your most common ReflectorLess (RL) height into this field. When you press the Use Default

Height button in the Target Manager screen, this value will populate the Target Height field with this default height.

Important Note: You must be using a reflectorless measure mode to populate this field using the

Default Height button in the Target Manager screen, and have it use the default reflectorless height.

- 451 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Temporary Height

The temporary height fucntion works as a one-time measurement using the height entered into this field. After the measurement has completed, the target height will revert back to the height that had been defined in the Target Height field. This is very handy when you want to take a quick one-time measurement such as for when measuring an invert.

Pressing this button will save your changes in this dialog, and return you to the Target Manager.

Cancel

Pressing this button will ignore your changes in this dialog and return you to the Target Manager.

Note: If you are wondering where the Set Instrument Prism Constant to Zero check box is, this is now done automatically when using Leica instruments.

- 452 -

GNSS Reference

GNSS R

EFERENCE

Create/Edit GNSS Profile

Select GNSS Profile

Main Menu | Connect

This is where you can create a new profile for each rover/base receiver you will be using.

There are two ways to get to this screen.

1. You can open the profile screen for your rover or base by going to Main Menu | Settings | Instrument Selection. This will display the Instrument Selection screen which contains the GNSS

Rover and GNSS Reference profiles.

2. If you already have your instrument type set to GNSS and you're currently in the map view, you can press the Settings button on the

GNSS toolbar

. This will display the Instrument Selection screen which contains the GNSS Rover and GNSS Reference profiles.

Editing Profiles

On the Add Profile screen you can enter any name you wish for the profile. Profiles can be copied from one data collector to another, so you can have a "Master" profile file that is sent to all crews so they can quickly set up systems.

- 453 -

MicroSurvey Layout

When you're ready to edit the settings for the profile you have selected, press the Edit button. This will display the GNSS configuration screen for the selected rover or reference profile.

Refer to the

GNSS Configuration (Rover)

topics for more information on the settings available for your profiles.

Your profiles are stored in the Settings.xml file within the ...\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows

CE/Mobile) or ...\Documents\MicroSurvey\Layout\Projects\ (Windows Tablet/PC) directory so once you have configured one data collector, you can copy this file onto other data collectors to make the profiles available on them. This file should also be backed up for easy recovery.

Using Profiles for Connection

Once you've created your profiles, you can use them to connect to your receiver. Simply select the correct GNSS Mode, either GNSS Rover or GNSS Reference, then select the profile you want to use in the profile list.

When you've physically connected the data collector to your receiver, press the Connect button to start the connection process.

If it isn't successful you will see the following message "Could not detect GNSS receiver! Please check configuration, cable and power." You can then press the Auto Detect Baud Rate button to force

Layout to automatically try different baud rate settings. If this doesn't work you should review your profile settings and ensure that you have the correct COM port selected and that you have your data collector connected to the correct port on the GNSS receiver.

GNSS Reference Profile

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Profile

The GNSS Configuration for your reference unit is accessed from the

GNSS Tolerance (Reference)

screen by selecting GNSS Reference as the Instrument Type, then pressing the Edit button to configure your selected GNSS Reference Profile.

- 454 -

GNSS Reference

Model and Communication

This is used to select the Make and Model of receiver, the port that the data collector is connected to and the mode that the current receiver will play in the RTK process. Please see the

GNSS Model and

Communication

topic for more information.

Tolerance

This is used to enter information about the location of the reference (base) station. Please see the

topic for more information.

Antenna Height

The antenna settings are used to calculate or enter the height of the antenna phase center above the ground. Please see the

GNSS Antenna Configuration

topic for more information.

GNSS Rover Profile

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Profile

The GNSS Configuration for your rover unit is accessed from the

GNSS Model and Communication

screen by selecting GNSS Rover as the Instrument Type, then pressing the Edit button to configure your selected GNSS Rover Profile.

- 455 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Model and Communication

This is used to select the Make and Model of receiver, and the port settings that the data collector will connect with. Please see the

topic for more information.

Tolerance Setting: [Description] (x3)

The three configurable tolerance modes are used to enter information used in computing the position of the rover once a measurement has begun. Please see the

GNSS Tolerance Modes (Rover)

topic for more information.

Active Tolerance: [Description]

This displays the current tolerance mode, which can be changed at any time during your survey by selecting the

button in the

. Please see the

topic for more information

Antenna Height

The antenna settings are used to calculate or enter the height of the antenna phase center above the ground. Please see the

GNSS Antenna Configuration

topic for more information.

Auto Recording

The Auto Recording settings are used for collecting data in a "Kinematic" mode. The receiver can automatically log a point every X distance or Y seconds. The user simply selects what option they prefer to use for logging Kinematic data and start the survey. Keep in mind while collecting data at higher velocities that Layout receives position updates from the GNSS at a maximum rate of once per second.

- 456 -

GNSS Reference

GNSS Model and Communication

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Profile | Model and Communication

The Model and Communication settings are used to select the Make and Model of receiver, the port that the data collector is connected to, and other communication parameters.

Cable Connection

Model

Specify the make and model of receiver you are connecting to.

Sensor Port

If your receiver has more than one data port, specify the port on the receiver that the data collector will be connected to.

Port

Specify the port on your data collector (usually COM1) that you will connect a cable between your receiver and this port.

- 457 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits

Specify the communication parameters for the serial connection. If you’re unsure of what baud rate your receiver is set to you might want to set the baud rate to Auto Detect. This will force Layout to check for communication using all the baud rate settings and if successful, it will set this baud rate in the profile.

Bluetooth Connection

Port

On many data collectors you can select Bluetooth as your communication port. If you select the

Bluetooth port, the traditional serial communication options (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity) will be replaced with a Bluetooth Search function.

Please note that not all Bluetooth-enabled devices will list Bluetooth as a Port option.

In some cases you must configure and use a virtual COM port through Windows CE's internal Bluetooth Settings, for example COM6.

Bluetooth Search

The device you selected will be saved into your instrument profile for future use so you do not need to

Search every time.

- 458 -

GNSS Reference

Bluetooth PIN

The PIN you enter will be encrypted and stored in your instrument profile.

GNSS Tolerance Settings (Reference)

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Profile | Tolerance Settings

SVs Mask

The SVs Mask setting is used to establish the minimum number of satellites that are necessary to produce a solution with a valid position. The SVs must also pass the elevation mask test to be included in this number for the calculation of the rover position.

PDOP Mask

The PDOP mask is used to control the acceptable geometry of the satellites used to compute the

RTK position. If the PDOP value exceeds this number, the user will not be eligible to collect an RTK position.

- 459 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Elevation Mask

The Elevation Mask is used to determine which satellites to use in computing the differential corrections to broadcast to the rover(s). Satellites below this value will not be used in the solution. Elevation mask angles are typically equal or less than the elevation mask set for the rover system.

GNSS Tolerance Settings (Rover)

Main Menu | Connect | Edit Profile | Tolerance Settings

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Sensor Configure | Tolerance Settings

The tolerances settings are used to enter information used in computing the position of the rover once a GNSS measurement has begun.

You can define three different tolerance modes that can be selected from the Sensor Configure option in the

menu while surveying. Tolerance settings are used to ensure that certain criteria are being met every time you take a measurement. The reason for three different settings is to allow you to specify different tolerances for different types of measurements you might need to make.

For example, control points would need to be measured more precisely then those used for topographic measurements.

Description

This is where you can assign a "friendly" description to your three tolerance modes to make them more easily identifiable to you - for example "Control Points" or "Topo Points".

Options

Real Time

Toggle to set the Tolerance Settings for RTK.

Observations

This is the minimum number of observations that the receiver must collect and average in order to compute a solution.

Solution

Each observation must be of the specified solution type (or better). You can select from several Solution modes depending on your receiver make and model, these can be:

- 460 -

GNSS Reference l l l l l

Autonomous

SBAS (Satellite-based Augmentation System)

DGPS (Differential Global Positioning System)

RTK Float (Differential Carrier Solution)

RTK Fixed (Differential Carrier Solution)

Please refer to your GNSS manufacturer's documentation for the solutions' respective positional accuracy.

Elevation Mask

The elevation mask is used to filter out satellites that are close to the horizon and are, thus, unreliable. Typical elevation mask angles can range between 10º and 20º.

PDOP

The PDOP (Position Dilution of Precision) mask is used to control the acceptable geometry of the satellites used to compute the solution. If the PDOP value exceeds this number, the user will not be eligible to collect a position. Typical PDOP masks are 5 or 6.

Satellites Computed

The Satellites mask is used to establish the minimum number of satellites that are necessary to produce a solution with a valid position. Each satellite must also pass the elevation mask test to be included in this number for the calculation of the rover position.

StdDev Horizontal

Layout will use the instantaneous Standard Deviation values that your receiver is outputting to determine if the measurement can proceed. If the instantaneous Standard Deviation values are equal to or less than the values you've specified, then the measurement can proceed. Once this happens, Layout will start averaging the measurements and will compute and display averaged Standard Deviation values. These averaged Standard Deviation values must then remain equal to or less than the values you've specified for the entire duration of the measurement, for the measurement to be accepted as being within the specified tolerances.

This is your maximum acceptable horizontal standard deviation to be maintained during the point measurement.

StdDev Vertical

This is your maximum acceptable vertical standard deviation to be maintained during the point measurement.

Correction Age

The maximum time (in seconds) since correction data was received.

- 461 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Point Tolerance

Point Tolerance - Observations

This is the minimum number of observations that the receiver must collect and average in order to compute a solution.

Point Tolerance - Time

This is the minimum time duration that the receiver must collect and average observations in order to compute a solution.

Post Processing Tolerances

These settings apply when using Layout to collect static data for later post processing.

Please note that Layout does not support collecting raw data on all GNSS receivers, please refer to the

Raw Data Logging

topic for additional details including a list of receivers which support this function.

Usage

This option determines whether Layout should use Post Process mode to collect static data for later post processing.

Selecting Always instructs Layout to automatically switch into Post Process mode to collect static data for all points.

Selecting Auto Start instructs Layout to automatically switch into Post Process mode to collect static data for the point currently being measured, if the current solution masks are not met.

Selecting Manual allows you to switch into Post Process mode to collect static data for any point as it is being measured, but Layout will not do so automatically.

Time - Less than 5 SVs

This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked during the static session is 4 satellites. Default = 30 minutes.

If at any time the number of satellites drops below 4 (which is the minimum number of satellites required to post process a 3D solution), the internal clock timing the static session will reset to zero and begin again.

Time - Less than 6 SVs

This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked during the static session is 5 satellites. Default = 25 minutes.

- 462 -

GNSS Reference

Time - Less than 7 SVs

This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked during the static session is 6 satellites. Default = 20 minutes.

Time - Less than 8 SVs

This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked during the static session is 7 satellites. Default = 15 minutes.

Time - 8 or more SVs

This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked during the static session is 8 or more satellites. Default = 10 minutes.

GNSS Antenna Height

GNSS Toolbar | Antenna Height

The antenna settings are used to calculate or enter the height of the antenna phase center above the ground. You can enter the true height (if it is known) or enter the measured height and any horizontal or vertical offsets and have Layout calculate the antenna height for you.

Depending on the model you've selected, manufacturer specific antenna offsets will be listed. If your specific antenna model is not listed, you can select "User Supplied" and specify appropriate offset measurements. For more detailed information about these offsets, refer to your users guide for your receiver.

- 463 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The true height is simply computed by the use of Pythagoras' theorem:

TrueHeight = VerticalOffset + sqrt( (MeasuredHeight)2 - (HorizontalOffset)2 )

You can change the true or measured antenna height at any time, on the

screen when storing your GNSS shots.

Overview - Reference Receiver

Before you can start your GNSS survey, there are a few things you need to confirm and setup.

Profile and Coordinate System Files

l l

You will need to determine and select the correct

coordinate system

and optional

geoid model

to use for your GNSS survey work.

Create a profile for your reference (base) and rover receivers. Profiles contain receiver settings such as baud rates and tolerance masks that are used by Layout. Refer to the

Reference Configuration

and

Rover Configuration

topics for more information.

- 464 -

GNSS Reference

Reference (Base) Connection Procedure

1. Main Menu | Connect |

2. Choose GNSS Reference as the type of instrument.

3. If you have not already done so, you need to create a profile for your reference receiver. If you have a profile already defined, select it now and then press Connect.

4. You will now see the map screen. On the GNSS Toolbar you can review information about receiver, sky plot list, display current position, and review DOP values.

5. Select one of the available methods to set your reference position, described in more detail in the

Reference Position Modes

topic. The three different methods are: Known Geodetic Position, Averaged Geodetic Position, or Local Transformation to Point.

6. When you're ready to measure the reference position, press the Measure button on the

GNSS

Toolbar

7. You will be prompted with an option to store the measured position in the points database.

8. Once the reference position has been set, the

Link Configure

dialog will be displayed where you can configure your radio settings to transmit corrections.

9. If setting up your receivers for the first time, press the Setup button to set the radio protocol and frequency, etc.

10. Press the Connect button to begin broadcasting corrections.

11. This completes the Reference portion of the connection. Disconnect from the Reference receiver and continue to the

Rover Connection

steps.

Overview - Rover Receiver

Before you can start your GNSS survey, there are a few things you need to confirm and setup.

Profile and Coordinate System Files

l l

You will need to determine and select the correct

coordinate system

and optional

geoid model

to use for your GNSS survey work.

Create a profile for your reference (base) and rover receivers. Profiles contain receiver settings such as baud rates and tolerance masks that are used by Layout. Refer to the

Reference Configuration

and

Rover Configuration

topics for more information.

- 465 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Rover Connection Procedure

1. Main Menu | Connect |

GNSS toolbar . Refer to the

2. Choose GNSS Rover as the type of instrument.

3. If you have not already done so, you need to create a profile for your rover receiver. If you have a profile already defined, select it now and then press Connect.

4. Once connected, the

Link Configure

dialog will be displayed where you can configure your correction settings.

5. If setting up your receiver for the first time, additional steps will be required to make the initial connection. Exact steps vary depending on the device type: UHF Radio / GSM / Data Collector Internet.

6. Press the Connect button to begin receiving corrections.

7. With a successful connection you will see the map screen. The Measure button might say

"No Link" to begin with, then switch to "RTK Float" and finally to "RTK Fixed".

8. To record a position, simply press the Measure button on the

GNSS Measurement

topic for more information.

Electronic Bubble / Tilt Survey

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Sensor Configure | Electronic Bubble

The Electronic Bubble utilizes MEMS sensors in the GNSS receiver to compensate for the antenna pole tilt.

This feature improves the GNSS point collection workflow by: l l l

Vertical and horizontal distance introduced by the pole tilt will be compensated automatically if desired.

Eliminate the need to focus on the conventional bubble on the GNSS pole while taking measurements.

Stop user from saving points if the pole tilt angle is greater than tolerance level.

The Electronic Bubble feature requires calibrations before being used in production works. With a supported GNSS receiver connected, Settings and Calibrations related to the Electronic Bubble can be located in the Settings | Sensor Configure | Electronic Bubble screen.

- 466 -

GNSS Reference

Settings

Electronic Bubble

Toggles Electronic Bubble feature ON/OFF

Tilt Compensated

Toggles tilt compensation ON/OFF

With tilt compensation turned on, tilt distance will be added into the calculation of GNSS measurements.

Tilt Rejection

Toggles tilt rejection ON/OFF

With tilt rejection turned on, user will not be able to store points if the tilt angle exceeds the specified rejection tolerance.

Tilt Rejection (Deg)

Tilt rejection tolerance in degrees. User can only store points if only the tilt angle is below the set limit.

Magnetic Declination

Specify the angle between magnetic north and true north

- 467 -

MicroSurvey Layout l l

Computed- Magnetic Declination is computed using International Geomagnetic Reference

Field (IGRF-12) model.

User - Enter a desired magnetic declination value.

Calibrate Sensors

Calibrate Tilt Sensors

This procedure calibrates the internal tilt sensor, and stores the zeroed the vertical angle.

1. Click “Calibrate Tilt Sensors” button to enter the procedure.

2. Level the GNSS receiver with a calibrated reference such as a bipod or tripod.

3. Ensure the GNSS receiver is in a stable plumb position.

4. Click “Calibrate” button to finish the tilt sensor calibration.

Note: Control panel on the GNSS receiver must be facing the operator when using the electronic bubble.

Calibrate Magnetic Sensors

This procedure calibrates the internal magnetic sensor.

1. Click “Calibrate Magnetic Sensors” button to enter the procedure.

2. Ensure the GNSS receiver is away from any artificial magnetic sources.

3. Click “Calibrate” button to start the magnetic calibration.

4. Slowly rotate the GNSS receiver about its 3 axes to fill up the progress bar.

Note that the progress bar will not move unless the instrument is being rotated.

This demonstrate the rotation axes: l l l

Longitudinal Axis (Roll)

Lateral Axis (Pitch)

Vertical Axis (Yaw)

- 468 -

GNSS Reference

We recommend to perform both calibration procedures on regular basis to ensure the reliability and accuracy of the Electronic Bubble. Magnetic Sensor may require more frequent calibration than tilt sensor depending on your calibration location and distance travelled. Consult with your GNSS receiver manufacture representative for more information regarding calibrate internals.

Settings

Electronic Bubble

After calibration, the electronic bubble can be found in two places.

l l

Observation toolbar (One of the pages)

GNSS Measurement screen

The black arrow shows the direction of magnetic north.

The bubble is green if the instrument is plumb, and red if the instrument is tilted beyond certain degree.

- 469 -

MicroSurvey Layout

On the GNSS Measurement Screen, if the Tilt Rejection is turned on and current tilt angle exceeds the preset rejection value, the Store Position button will be deactivated and GNSS measurements will not be averaged until the GNSS receiver turns to a plumb and stable position.

- 470 -

GNSS Reference

Reference and Rover Common Tools

Correction Link

The Link Configure screen is used to configure the radio or GSM link for transmitting or receiving RTK corrections. The mode will vary depending on your receiver type. The Setup button allows the user to go into further device details including channels and frequencies for radios and GSM modems.

If you need to connect to a NTRIP caster, you can also access that in the setup screen.

Accessing Link Configure

To access this screen you need to first connect to a reference or rover receiver. Once connected you can access this dialog. Please review the

Reference (Base) Receiver Overview

or the

Rover

Receiver Overview

topics for more details about work flow.

Device

Device Type

Select the appropriate Correction Link device type, such as GSM Module, UHF Radio Module, Data

Collector Internet, or Other Device.

Device Port

Select the appropriate Port when multiple options exist.

- 471 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Device Setup

When you press the Setup button on the dialog above, the Radio Setup or Modem Setup screen will appear. Choose the radio make and model from the pull-down and set the channel or frequency, the radio will be programmed by Layout to the channel or frequency selected (on some models). If you are using an NTRIP or GPRS server, enter your internet and server credentials here.

Correction Data

Message Type

The message type is used in determining what data streams are sent from the reference station to the rover. They can be RTCM, CMR or a proprietary format.

Base Station ID

Select a specific Base Station ID to restrict message corrections to specific reference stations.

RTCM Transformation

To receive horizontal and vertical coordinate system information from your network, enable RTCM

Transformation messages.

GNSS RTCM Transformation

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Link Configure | RTCM Transformation

RTCM Transformation messages can be utilized to provide horizontal and vertical systems from RTK network using RTCM 3.1 or higher correction messages.

At the Link Configure dialog select the option to enable the RTCM Transformation messages.

RTCM Transformation Information

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Link Information

Information Table:

The information table displays the mountpoint name, current status of the incoming corrections, and coordinate systems information received from the NTRIP Caster.

NTRIP casters typically do not send out RTCM transformation messages at the same frequency as

RTK correction messages. A 90 seconds waiting time is reserved to receive the messages.

Please ensure the Target System field is what you would expect at current location.

If no the transformation messages are not received after 90s, the Options screen will automatically show up, which allows you to select a valid predefined coordinate system or choose a different mount point.

- 472 -

GNSS Reference

OK:

The OK button will only become active if valid transformation messages are received.

Options:

l l l l

Coordinate System - Predefined coordinate systems can be used if you no longer wish to use

RTCM transformation. Horizontal and Vertical system can be selected separately.

Mount Points - A different mount points can be selected if the current mount point do not support RTCM messages.

Go Back - Allows you go back to the previous screen and continue waiting for incoming messages

Cancel - This button will exit the link configuration work flow and bring out the map view. You will need to select a valid coordinate system before taking measurement if the RTCM transformation messages are not received.

Correction Information

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Link Information

The Correction Information screen is accessed from the

rover profile , including

screen. It displays information about the correction message being received by your receiver via a radio link from a base receiver, or via a cellular modem link from an NTRIP or GPRS server.

- 473 -

MicroSurvey Layout

For information on configuring your correction link please see the

Correction Link

topic.

GNSS Satellite Plot

To access this screen, press the Satellite button on the GNSS

Toolbar.

The Satellite Plot screen is a graphical representation of the current GNSS satellite constellation. It shows all visible satellites including both GPS and GLONASS. Those satellites being used in the current solution are indicated with a black dot, and those being ignored are indicated with a white dot.

Each satellite is displayed with its PRN (identification) number, and the Elevation Mask specified in your current

Tolerance Mode

is indicated by a red dashed line.

Press the View List button to open the

Satellite List

screen.

Press the Satellite Setup button to enable/disable constellations.

- 474 -

GNSS Reference

Press the Close button to return to the map screen.

GNSS Satellite List

To access this screen, press the Satellite button on the GNSS

Toolbar, then press the View List button on the

Satellite Plot

screen.

The Satellite List screen displays information on the current GNSS satellite constellation. It shows all visible satellites including both GPS and GLONASS. Those satellites being used in the current solution are indicated with a checkmark, and those being ignored are indicated with an X.

Each satellite is displayed with its PRN (identification) number, Azimuth and Elevation, and Signalto-Noise Ratio.

- 475 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Press the View Plot button to open the

Satellite Plot

screen.

Press the Close button to return to the map screen.

GNSS Settings

The GNSS Settings screen is accessed from the

GNSS Toolbar .

- 476 -

GNSS Reference

Sensor Configure

This will allow you to make changes to most of the settings in your

reference

configuring the three tolerance modes, selecting the active tolerance mode, configuring the antenna height, configuring the auto-recording options and depending on the GNSS Sensor connected, the

Electronic Bubble settings will be shown here as well. (The Model and Communication options cannot be configured while you are connected to your GNSS receiver.)

Sensor Information

The

Sensor Information

screen displays detailed information about the hardware you are connected to.

- 477 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Link Configure

This turns on your GNSS Receiver's

radio or modem

to begin receiving RTK corrections, from either a base receiver or an NTRIP or GPRS server.

- 478 -

GNSS Reference

Link Information

The

Link Information

screen displays detailed real-time information about the correction message being received by your receiver via a radio link from a base receiver, or via a cellular modem link from an NTRIP or GPRS server.

Position Information

The

Position Information

screen displays detailed real-time information about your current position.

- 479 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Antenna Height

The

Antenna Height

screen allows you to configure the antenna height of your GNSS receiver.

Active Tolerance Mode

This button indicates which of the three

tolerance modes

setup in your Rover Profile is currently being used. Press this button to select the active tolerance mode. To configure the three tolerance modes, see the "Sensor Configure" button described above.

- 480 -

GNSS Reference

Raw Data Logging

The

Raw Data Logging

screen is used to start and stop raw data logging on your GNSS reference or rover receiver, for later post-processing.

Reset RTK Filters

Use this to reset the RTK solution in your receiver, to force it to recalculate a new solution and resolve any ambiguities again from scratch. This has the same effect as inverting your receiver to reset the solution.

Select Mount Point

Use this to select a different mount point from the NTRIP caster you are currently connected to.

Instrument Disconnect

Use this to disconnect from your receiver. If you are connected to a reference receiver, corrections will continue to be transmitted after you disconnect.

Sensor Information

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Sensor Information

- 481 -

MicroSurvey Layout

The Sensor Information screen is accessed from the

screen. It displays information about the hardware you are connected to. The specific information available will vary by model, but typically you will see the make and model of your receiver, its serial number, battery status, firmware information, and more.

Position Information

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Position Information

The Position Information screen is accessed from the

screen. It displays detailed information about your current position.

- 482 -

GNSS Reference

The following information is displayed and updates in real-time: l l l l l l l l l l

Geodetic Position (Latitude, Longitude, Ellipsoid Height)

Measured Antenna Height

Baseline Length

Cartesian Position (Northing, Easting, Elevation)

Coordinate Systems (Horizontal and Vertical)

Solution Type

Standard Deviation

PDOP

Number of Satellites

UTC Date and Time

Raw Data Logging

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Raw Data Logging

Use this to start and stop raw data logging on your GNSS reference or rover receiver, for later postprocessing of your point data. You can log raw data on the receiver while you carry on with your survey in Layout.

- 483 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Note: Layout cannot control the data logging on all models of GNSS receivers. Currently, we support data logging on the:

Acnovo GX9

Acnovo GX10

Altus APS-3

Altus APS-3G

Altus APS-NR2

Ashtech / Thales ProMark 500

Ashtech / Thales ProMark 800

Champion AllStar

Champion Pro

CHC i80

CHC X900+

CHC X91+

ComNav T300 geo-FENNEL FGS 1

GeoMax Zenith10

GeoMax Zenith15

GeoMax Zenith20

GeoMax Zenith25/25Pro

GeoMax Zenith35/35Pro

GINTEC G9

GINTEC G10

Hemisphere S320

Hemisphere S321

Horizon Kronos C3

Javad Triumph-1

KOLIDA K5 Plus

LINERTEC LGN-200S

Leica 1200

Leica GS15

Leica GS10

Leica SmartRover

Leica GPS900

NavCom SF-3040

NavCom SF-3050

NovAtel DL4

Pentax G3100-R1

Pentax G3100-R2

Pentax SMT888-3G

Pentax SMT888-3G Rev 2

Prexiso G4/G5

Septentrio Altus APS3G

Septentrio Altus NR2

Sokkia GRX1

Sokkia GSR2600

SOUTH GALAXY G1/G1 Plus

SOUTH GALAXY G6

SOUTH S82/S82-V

SOUTH S86

Spectra Precision SP80

STONEX S8 Plus

STONEX S9i

STONEX S9III Plus

STONEX S10

Topcon GR-3

Topcon HiPer

Z-SURVEY Z6

- 484 -

GNSS Reference

Command Console

GNSS Toolbar | Instrument Settings | Command Console

The Command Console screen is accessed from the

Point on Floor and Ceiling

screen. It allows you to send commands to your receiver to configure settings, or other related tasks.

You must determine the exact syntax to enter in the console and you can usually gather this information from your GNSS manufacturer.

Send

This will send the parameters that you've entered to your receiver.

Run Script

This allows you to import and read a text file that has a sequence of commands that you would like to upload to your receiver.

Clear Console

This will clear console of all parameters sent and received from your receiver.

- 485 -

MicroSurvey Layout

- 486 -

Disto/Laser Reference

ISTO

ASER

EFERENCE

Main Menu | Connect | Disto/Laser

3D Disto

To use a 3D Disto: l l

Having a serial number starting with 175 or 177 requires the 3D Disto Software for Windows installed on your computer to make the initial USB or WiFi connection. These devices also are recommended to be used with a USB WiFi stick for WiFi connectivity.

Having a serial number starting with 176 will connect automatically without the 3D Disto Software for Windows, and does not require a USB WiFi stick.

Layout supports live video streaming from the 3D Disto camera into the MapView area. Use the controls at the edges of the video image to turn the 3D Disto, or tap on the image to turn to the point.

Measuring

To measure a location simply press the measure button in Layout.

Layout

To stakeout a location simply start any of the Layout routines. The 3D Disto will automatically turn to the point you are trying to locate. Press the measure button to calculate a position.

- 487 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Additional Information

The following topics make use of the 3D Disto l l l

Pipe Through Wall

Point On Wall

3D Disto Connection Guide

The general connection procedure for Leica 3D Disto:

- 488 -

Disto/Laser Reference

1. Only required for devices having serial numbers starting with 175 or 177: l

Download the latest 3D Disto software for Windows from Leica myWorld .

l l

Install the 3D Disto software and run it.

In the 3D Disto software, select the Connect USB or Connect WiFi button to connect: l

Once connected, the main screen of the 3D Disto software will be displayed. The communication ports are now configured on the PC/Tablet.

Close the 3D Disto software.

2. Launch Layout and open a Project.

3. At the Instrument Selection screen, pick the Disto/Laser type and choose the pre-configured

3D Disto profile, then pick Edit:

- 489 -

MicroSurvey Layout

4. Choose Model and Communication.

5. Pick the Connection Type: l

If choosing USB you are ready to Connect, pick Connect l

If choosing WiFi you will need to perform a WiFi search first, pick Search to search for

3D Disto devices. If successfully found, pick Connect

- 490 -

Disto/Laser Reference

6. Complete, see the Measure Modes (Disto/Laser)

topic for supported functionality.

S910 Disto

The Leica S910 Disto is fully supported using a WiFi connection. It can be operated using workflows very similar to a Total Station when combined with a tripod or stand. Without a tripod or stand, the

S910 can be used to capture distances for various applications, including:

l l l

The

Drawing Tool

Traverse / Intersection

calculations

calculations

Disto S910 Connection Guide

The general connection procedure for Leica Disto S910:

1. Launch Layout and open a Project.

2. At the Instrument Selection screen, pick the Disto/Laser type and choose the pre-configured

Disto S910 profile, then pick Edit:

3. Choose Model and Communication.

4. WiFi is the only supported Connection Type, pick Search to search for Disto S910 devices. If successfully found, pick Connect.

5. Complete, see the Measure Modes (Disto/Laser) topic for supported functionality.

- 491 -

MicroSurvey Layout

Bluetooth Disto

Layout supports handheld Leica Distos with Bluetooth connectivity. Supported models include Disto

A6 and D330i. Bluetooth LE is not currently supported (E7100i, E7500i, etc.). Supported models are able to capture distances for various applications, including: l l l

The

Drawing Tool

Traverse / Intersection

calculations